Download pdf - 2012 Chevrolet Cruze Owner Manual M - General Motors · PDF fileChevrolet Cruze Owner Manual - 2012 Black plate (1,1) 2012 Chevrolet Cruze Owner Manual M ... Chevrolet Cruze Owner

Black plate (1,1)Chevrolet Cruze Owner Manual - 2012

2012 Chevrolet Cruze Owner Manual M

In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4Vehicle Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15Performance andMaintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19

Keys, Doors, andWindows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1Keys and Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12Vehicle Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14Exterior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15Interior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21

Seats and Restraints . . . . . . . . . 3-1Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33

Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . 4-1Additional StorageFeatures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

Instruments and Controls . . . . 5-1Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7

Information Displays . . . . . . . . . . 5-23Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . . 5-34

Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Lighting Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6

Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . 7-1Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23Trademarks and LicenseAgreements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35

Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1Climate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6


2012 Chevrolet Cruze Owner Manual M

Driving and Operating . . . . . . . . 9-1Driving Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Starting and Operating . . . . . . . 9-15Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27Automatic Transmission . . . . . . 9-29Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . 9-33Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35Ride Control Systems . . . . . . . . 9-37Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40Object Detection Systems . . . . 9-42Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-44Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-48Conversions andAdd-Ons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-55

Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2Vehicle Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-29Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35Wheels and Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-80Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-83Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . 10-86

Service and Maintenance . . . 11-1General Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . 11-3Special ApplicationServices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9

Additional Maintenanceand Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10

Recommended Fluids,Lubricants, and Parts . . . . . . 11-13

Maintenance Records . . . . . . . 11-16

Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1Vehicle Identification . . . . . . . . . 12-1Vehicle Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Customer Information . . . . . . . 13-1Customer Information . . . . . . . . 13-1Reporting Safety Defects . . . . 13-13Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i-1


Introduction iii

The names, logos, emblems,slogans, vehicle model names,and vehicle body designs appearingin this manual including, but notlimited to, GM, the GM logo,CHEVROLET, the CHEVROLETEmblem, and CRUZE aretrademarks and/or service marksof General Motors LLC, itssubsidiaries, affiliates, or licensors.

This manual describes features thatmay or may not be on your specificvehicle either because they areoptions that you did not purchase ordue to changes subsequent to theprinting of this owner manual.Please refer to the purchasedocumentation relating to yourspecific vehicle to confirm each ofthe features found on your vehicle.For vehicles first sold in Canada,substitute the name “GeneralMotors of Canada Limited” forChevrolet Motor Division whereverit appears in this manual.

Keep this manual in the vehicle forquick reference.

Canadian Vehicle Owners

Propriétaires Canadiens

A French language copy of thismanual can be obtained from yourdealer or from:

On peut obtenir un exemplaire dece guide en français auprès duconcessionnaire ou à l'adressesuivante:

Helm, IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

1-800-551-4123Numéro de poste 6438 de languefrançaisewww.helminc.com

Litho in U.S.A.Part No. 20935335 A First Printing ©2011 General Motors LLC. All Rights Reserved.


iv Introduction

Using this ManualTo quickly locate information aboutthe vehicle, use the Index in theback of the manual. It is analphabetical list of what is in themanual and the page number whereit can be found.

Danger, Warnings, andCautionsWarning messages found on vehiclelabels and in this manual describehazards and what to do to avoid orreduce them.

Danger indicates a hazard with ahigh level of risk which will result inserious injury or death.

Warning or Caution indicates ahazard that could result in injuryor death.

{ WARNING

These mean there is somethingthat could hurt you or otherpeople.

Notice: This means there issomething that could result inproperty or vehicle damage. Thiswould not be covered by thevehicle's warranty.

A circle with a slash through itis a safety symbol which means“Do Not,” “Do not do this,” or“Do not let this happen.”

SymbolsThe vehicle has components andlabels that use symbols instead oftext. Symbols are shown along withthe text describing the operation orinformation relating to a specificcomponent, control, message,gauge, or indicator.

M : This symbol is shown whenyou need to see your owner manualfor additional instructions orinformation.

* : This symbol is shown whenyou need to see a service manualfor additional instructions orinformation.


Introduction v

Vehicle Symbol Chart

Here are some additional symbolsthat may be found on the vehicleand what they mean. For moreinformation on the symbol, refer tothe Index.

9 : Airbag Readiness Light

# : Air Conditioning

! : Antilock Brake System (ABS)

% : Audio Steering Wheel Controlsor OnStar®

$ : Brake System Warning Light

" : Charging System

I : Cruise Control

B : Engine Coolant Temperature

O : Exterior Lamps

# : Fog Lamps

. : Fuel Gauge

+ : Fuses

3 : Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger

j : LATCH System ChildRestraints

* : Malfunction Indicator Lamp

: : Oil Pressure

} : Power

/ : Remote Vehicle Start

> : Safety Belt Reminders

7 : Tire Pressure Monitor

d : Traction Control/Stabilitrak®

M : Windshield Washer Fluid


vi Introduction

2 NOTES


In Brief 1-1

In Brief

Instrument PanelInstrument Panel Overview . . . . 1-2

Initial Drive InformationInitial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 1-5Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9Head Restraint Adjustment . . . . 1-9Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9Passenger SensingSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10

Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10

Steering WheelAdjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11

Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . 1-13Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15

Vehicle FeaturesRadio(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16Portable Audio Devices . . . . . . 1-17Bluetooth® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . 1-17Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18Navigation System . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18Driver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18

Ultrasonic Parking Assist . . . . 1-19Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19

Performance and MaintenanceTraction ControlSystem (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19

StabiliTrak® System . . . . . . . . . 1-20Tire Pressure Monitor . . . . . . . . 1-20Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20

Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . 1-21Driving for Better FuelEconomy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21

Roadside AssistanceProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22

OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22


1-2 In Brief

Instrument Panel

Instrument Panel Overview


In Brief 1-3

A. Exterior Lamp Controls onpage 6‑1.

Front Fog Lamps on page 6‑4(If Equipped).

Instrument Panel IlluminationControl on page 6‑5.

B. Air Vents on page 8‑6.

C. Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger on page 6‑2.

Turn and Lane‐Change Lever.See Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals on page 6‑4.

Driver Information Center (DIC)Buttons. See Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 5‑23.

D. Instrument Cluster on page 5‑8.

E. Horn on page 5‑3.

F. Driver Information Center (DIC)on page 5‑23.

G. Steering Wheel Controls onpage 5‑2.

H. Windshield Wiper/Washer onpage 5‑3.

I. Infotainment on page 7‑2.

Satellite Radio on page 7‑14(If Equipped).

J. Infotainment Display Screen.

K. Instrument Panel Storage onpage 4‑1.

L. Light Sensor. See AutomaticHeadlamp System on page 6‑3.

M. Passenger Airbag. See WhereAre the Airbags? on page 3‑21.

N. Hood Release. See Hood onpage 10‑4.

O. Data Link Connector (DLC)(Out of View). See MalfunctionIndicator Lamp on page 5‑13.

P. Instrument Panel Fuse Block onpage 10‑40.

Q. Cruise Control on page 9‑40.

R. Steering Wheel Adjustment onpage 5‑2.

S. Driver Airbag. See Where Arethe Airbags? on page 3‑21.

T. Ignition Switch or KeylessIgnition Button (If Equipped).See Ignition Positions (KeyAccess) on page 9‑15 orIgnition Positions (KeylessAccess) on page 9‑18.

U. Driver Knee Airbag. See WhereAre the Airbags? on page 3‑21.

V. Power Door Locks onpage 2‑11.

W. Hazard Warning Flashers onpage 6‑3.

X. Shift Lever. See AutomaticTransmission on page 9‑29 orManual Transmission onpage 9‑33.

Y. Traction Control System (TCS)on page 9‑37.

StabiliTrak® System onpage 9‑38.


1-4 In Brief

Z. Climate Control Systems onpage 8‑1 (If Equipped).

Automatic Climate ControlSystem on page 8‑3(If Equipped).

Heated Front Seats on page 3‑7(If Equipped).

AA. Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator on page 5‑12.

AB. Passenger Knee Airbag. SeeWhere Are the Airbags? onpage 3‑21.

Initial DriveInformationThis section provides a briefoverview about some of theimportant features that may or maynot be on your specific vehicle.

For more detailed information, referto each of the features which can befound later in this owner manual.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) SystemThe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter will work up to 20 m(65 ft) away from the vehicle.

RKE Transmitter with RemoteStart Shown

Press the key release button toextend the key blade. The key canbe used for the ignition and alllocks.

Press K to unlock the driver door orall doors.

Press Q to lock all doors.

Lock and unlock feedback can bepersonalized. See VehiclePersonalization on page 5‑34.


In Brief 1-5

Press and holdV briefly to openthe trunk.

Press and hold 7 briefly to locatethe vehicle.

Press and hold 7 for at leasttwo seconds to sound thepanic alarm.

Press 7 again to cancel thepanic alarm.

See Keys on page 2‑2 and RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 2‑3.

Remote Vehicle StartFor vehicles with this feature, theengine can be started from outsidethe vehicle.

Starting the Vehicle

1. Aim the RKE transmitter atthe vehicle.

2. Press and release Q.3. Immediately after completing

Step 2, press and hold/ untilthe turn signal lamps flash, or forabout two seconds if the vehicleis not in view.

When the engine starts, the parkinglamps will turn on and remain on aslong as the engine is running. Thedoors will be locked and the climatecontrol system may come on.

The engine will continue to run for10 minutes. Repeat the steps for a10-minute time extension. Remotestart can be extended only once.

Canceling a Remote Start

To cancel a remote start, do one ofthe following:. Aim the RKE transmitter at

the vehicle and press andhold/ until the parking lampsturn off.

. Turn on the hazard warningflashers.

. Turn the vehicle on and then off.

See Remote Vehicle Start onpage 2‑9.


1-6 In Brief

Door LocksTo lock or unlock the vehicle fromoutside, use the Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter or the key.From inside the vehicle, use thepower door lock switch.

See Door Locks on page 2‑10.

Power Door Locks

The power door lock switch is onthe instrument panel.

K : Press to unlock the doors.

Q : Press to lock the doors.

See Power Door Locks onpage 2‑11.

Safety Locks

The rear door safety locks preventpassengers from opening the reardoors from inside the vehicle.

Presso { to activate the safetylocks on the rear doors. The LEDlight (A) comes on when activated.

The rear door power windows arealso disabled.

Presso { again to deactivate thelockout switch.

If the LED light flashes, the featuremay not be working properly.

See Safety Locks on page 2‑12.


In Brief 1-7

Seat Adjustment

Manual Front Seats

To adjust a manual seat:

1. Pull the handle at the front ofthe seat.

2. Slide the seat to the desiredposition and release the handle.

3. Try to move the seat backand forth to be sure it islocked in place.

Seat Height Adjuster

If available, move the lever up ordown to manually raise or lowerthe seat.

Seat Cushion Tilt Feature

Six-Way Manual Seat Shown,Four-Way Similar

If available, move the lever up ordown to raise or lower the front ofthe seat cushion.


1-8 In Brief

Reclining Seatbacks

To recline the seatback:

1. Lift the lever.

2. Move the seatback to thedesired position, then releasethe lever to lock the seatbackin place.

3. Push and pull on the seatback tomake sure it is locked.

To return the seatback to anupright position:

1. Lift the lever fully withoutapplying pressure to theseatback, and the seatbackreturns to the upright position.


See Reclining Seatbacks onpage 3‑5.

Power Driver Seat

To adjust a power driver seat,if equipped:. Move the seat forward or

rearward by sliding the controlforward or rearward.

. Raise or lower the front part ofthe seat cushion by moving thefront of the control up or down.

. Raise or lower the entire seat bymoving the rear of the control upor down.

See Power Seat Adjustment onpage 3‑4.

Rear Seats

The rear seatbacks can be folded.

For detailed instructions, see RearSeats on page 3‑8.


In Brief 1-9

Heated Seats

On vehicles with heated front seats,the controls are on the centerconsole. The engine must berunning to operate the heated seats.

Press L or M to heat the driveror passenger seat cushion andseatback.

Press the control once for thehighest setting. With each press ofthe control, the heated seat willchange to the next lower setting,

and then the off setting. Three lightsindicate the highest setting andone light the lowest.

See Heated Front Seats onpage 3‑7 for more information.

Head RestraintAdjustmentDo not drive until the head restraintsfor all occupants are installed andadjusted properly.

To achieve a comfortable seatingposition, change the seatbackrecline angle as little as necessarywhile keeping the seat and thehead restraint height in theproper position.

For more information see HeadRestraints on page 3‑2 and SeatAdjustment on page 3‑3.

Safety Belts

Refer to the following sections forimportant information on how touse safety belts properly:. Safety Belts on page 3‑10.. How to Wear Safety Belts

Properly on page 3‑11.. Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 3‑12.. Lower Anchors and Tethers for

Children (LATCH System) onpage 3‑41.


1-10 In Brief

Passenger SensingSystem

United States

Canada

The passenger sensing systemturns off the front outboardpassenger frontal airbag and kneeairbag under certain conditions.No other airbag is affected by thepassenger sensing system. SeePassenger Sensing System onpage 3‑26 for important information.

The passenger airbag statusindicator will be visible on theinstrument panel when the vehicle isstarted. See Passenger AirbagStatus Indicator on page 5‑12.

Mirror Adjustment

Exterior

Controls for the outside powermirrors are on the driver door.

1. Turn the selector switch toL (left) or R (right) to choosethe driver or passenger mirror.

2. Move the control to adjustthe mirror.

3. Turn the selector switch to theO position to deselect the mirror.

See Power Mirrors on page 2‑16.

If the vehicle has heated mirrors,see Heated Mirrors on page 2‑16.

Vehicles with a manual mirroradjustment have controls next toeach mirror.

See Manual Mirrors on page 2‑16.


In Brief 1-11

Interior

Adjust the inside rearview mirror bymoving it up and down or side toside. Adjust the mirror to avoid glarefrom the headlamps behind you.Push the tab forward for daytimeuse and pull it for nighttime use.

See Manual Rearview Mirror onpage 2‑17.

The vehicle may have an automaticdimming inside rearview mirror.Automatic dimming reduces theglare of lights from behind thevehicle. The dimming feature andindicator light come on each timethe vehicle is started.

See Automatic Dimming RearviewMirror on page 2‑17.

Steering WheelAdjustment

To adjust the steering wheel:

1. Pull the lever (A) down.

2. Move the steering wheel upor down.

3. Pull or push the steering wheelcloser or away from you.

4. Push the lever (A) up to lock thesteering wheel in place.

Do not adjust the steering wheelwhile driving.

Interior LightingDome Lamps

The dome lamp controls are locatedin the headliner.

( : Press to turn the lamps off,even when a door is open.

H : Press to turn the lamps onautomatically when a door isopened.

' : Press to turn on thedome lamps.


1-12 In Brief

Reading Lamps

The reading lamps are located inthe overhead console.

# or$ : Press the button neareach lamp to turn it on or off.

Instrument Panel IlluminationControl

This feature controls the brightnessof the instrument panel controls andinfotainment display screen. Thethumbwheel is located to the left ofthe steering column on theinstrument panel.

D (Instrument PanelBrightness): Turn the thumbwheelup or down and hold, to brighten ordim the instrument panel controlsand infotainment display screen.

Exterior Lighting

The exterior lamps control is locatedon the instrument panel to theoutboard side of the steeringcolumn.

O : Briefly turn to this position toturn the automatic light control off oron again.

AUTO: Turns the headlamps onautomatically at normal brightness,together with the parking lamps,taillamps, license plate lamps,sidemarker lamps, and instrumentpanel lights.


In Brief 1-13

; : Turns on the parking lamps,taillamps, license plate lamps,sidemarker lamps, and instrumentpanel lights.

5 : Turns on the headlamps,parking lamps, taillamps, licenseplate lamps, sidemarker lamps, andinstrument panel lights. A warningchime sounds if the driver door isopened when the ignition switch isoff and the headlamps are on.

# : For vehicles with fog lamps,press to turn the lamps on or off.

For more information, see:. Exterior Lamp Controls on

page 6‑1.. Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)

on page 6‑2.. Front Fog Lamps on page 6‑4.

Windshield Wiper/Washer

The windshield wiper lever is on theside of the steering column. Withthe ignition in ACC/ACCESSORY orON/RUN, move the windshieldwiper lever to select the wiperspeed.

2: Fast wipes.

1: Slow wipes.

3 : Turn the band up for morefrequent wipes or down for lessfrequent wipes.

9 : Turns the windshieldwipers off.

3 : Briefly move the wiper leverdown for a single wipe or hold downfor several wipes.

Windshield Washer

Pull the windshield wiper lever tospray windshield washer fluid andactivate the wipers.

See Windshield Wiper/Washer onpage 5‑3.


1-14 In Brief

Climate ControlsThe heating, cooling, defrosting, andventilation for the vehicle can becontrolled with these systems.

Vehicles without Air Conditioning

A. Temperature Control

B. Bi-level Air Mode

C. Floor Air Mode

D. Vent Air Mode

E. Fan Control

F. Driver and Passenger HeatedSeats (If Equipped)

G. Rear Window Defogger

H. Defog

I. Defrost

Vehicles with Air Conditioning



C. Floor Air Mode

D. Vent Air Mode

E. Fan Control



H. Recirculation

I. Defog

J. Air Conditioning

K. Defrost

Automatic Climate Control System


B. Rear Window Defogger

C. AUTO (Automatic Operation)

D. Defrost

E. Fan Control


In Brief 1-15


G. Power

H. Recirculation

I. MODE (Air Delivery Mode)

J. AQS (Air Quality Sensor)

K. Air Conditioning

See Climate Control Systems onpage 8‑1 or Automatic ClimateControl System on page 8‑3(If Equipped).

Transmission

Manual Mode

Driver Shift Control (DSC) allowsthe automatic transmission to beshifted similar to a manualtransmission.

Electronic Range Select (ERS)allows for the selection of a rangeof gears.

See Manual Mode on page 9‑31.

Up‐Shift Light

If the vehicle has a manualtransmission, it will have an up-shiftlight that indicates when to shift tothe next higher gear for the best fueleconomy.

See Manual Transmission onpage 9‑33.

Vehicle Features

Radio(s)O : Press to turn the system onand off. Turn to increase ordecrease the volume.

BAND: Press to choose betweenFM, AM, or XM™, if equipped.

MENU: Turn to select radiostations. Press to select a menu.

g : Press to seek the previousstation or track.

l : Press to seek the next stationor track.

Buttons 1 to 6: Press to save andselect favorite stations.

INFO: Press to show availableinformation about the currentstation or track.

For more information about theseand other radio features, seeOperation on page 7‑6.


1-16 In Brief

Storing a Favorite Station

Stations from all bands can bestored in the favorite lists in anyorder. Up to six stations can bestored in each favorite page and thenumber of available favorite pagescan be set.

To store the station to a position inthe list, press the correspondingnumeric button 1 to 6 until a beepis heard.

For more information, see “Storing aStation as a Favorite” in AM-FMRadio on page 7‑12.

Setting the Clock

Adjusting the Time

The clock menu can be only beused with the radio on while in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY.

1. Press the CONFIG button andselect Time Settings.

2. Select Set Time.

3. Turn the MENU knob to adjustthe highlighted number.

4. Press the MENU knob to selectthe next number.

5. To save the time and return tothe Time Settings menu, pressthe BACK button at any time orpress the MENU knob afteradjusting the minutes.

Setting the 12/24 Hour Format


2. Highlight 12/24 Hour Format.

3. Press the MENU knob to selectthe 12 hour or 24 hour displayformat.

See Clock on page 5‑5.

Satellite RadioVehicles with an XM™ sxatelliteradio tuner and a valid XM satelliteradio subscription can receiveXM programming.

XM Satellite Radio Service

XM is a satellite radio service basedin the 48 contiguous United Statesand 10 Canadian provinces. XMsatellite radio has a wide variety ofprogramming and commercial-freemusic, coast to coast, and indigital-quality sound. A fee isrequired to receive the XM service.

For more information refer to:. www.xmradio.com or call

1-800-929-2100 (U.S.).. www.xmradio.ca or call

1-877-438-9677 (Canada).

For more information, see SatelliteRadio on page 7‑14.


In Brief 1-17

Portable Audio DevicesSome vehicles have a 3.5 mm(1/8 in) auxiliary input and a USBport located in the center console.External devices such as iPods®,laptop computers, MP3 players,CD changers, and USB storagedevices may be connected,depending on the audio system.

For more information, see AuxiliaryDevices on page 7‑20.

Bluetooth®

The Bluetooth system allows userswith a Bluetooth-enabled cell phoneto make and receive hands-freecalls using the vehicle audiosystem, microphone, and controls.

The Bluetooth-enabled cell phonemust be paired with the in-vehicleBluetooth system before it can beused in the vehicle. Not all phoneswill support all functions.

See Bluetooth (Overview) onpage 7‑23 or Bluetooth(Infotainment Controls) onpage 7‑25 or Bluetooth (VoiceRecognition) on page 7‑29.

Steering Wheel Controls

For vehicles with audio steeringwheel controls, some audio controlscan be adjusted at the steeringwheel.

b / g : Press to interact with theavailable Bluetooth, OnStar,or navigation system.

$ /i : Press to silence thevehicle speakers only. Press againto turn the sound on. For vehicleswith OnStar or Bluetooth systems,press to reject an incoming call,or to end a current call.

_ SRC ^ : Turn _ or ^ to select aradio band or audio source.

Press _ or ^ to select the next orprevious favorite radio station, CD,or MP3 track.

Press SRC to change betweenradio and CD or DVD.

+ x −: Press + to increase or − todecrease the volume.

For more information, see SteeringWheel Controls on page 5‑2.


1-18 In Brief

Cruise Control

For vehicles with cruise control:

1 : Press to turn the cruise controlsystem on and off.

RES/+ : Move the thumbwheel upto resume a previously set speed orto accelerate.

SET/− : Move the thumbwheeldown to set a speed or to make thevehicle decelerate.

* : Press to disengage cruisecontrol without erasing the setspeed from memory.

See Cruise Control on page 9‑40.

Navigation SystemIf the vehicle has a navigationsystem, there is a separatenavigation system manual thatincludes information on the radio,audio players, and navigationsystem.

The navigation system providesdetailed maps of most majorfreeways and roads. After adestination has been set, thesystem provides turn-by-turninstructions for reaching thedestination. In addition, the systemcan help locate a variety of points ofinterest (POIs), such as banks,airports, restaurants, and more.

See the navigation system manualfor more information.

Driver InformationCenter (DIC)The DIC display is located in thecenter of the instrument panelcluster. It shows the status of manyvehicle systems. The controls forthe DIC are located on the turnsignal lever.

A. SET/CLR: Press to set or clearthe menu item when it isdisplayed.

B. wx: Use the thumbwheel toscroll through the items ineach menu.


In Brief 1-19

C. MENU: Press to display theTrip/Fuel menu and the VehicleInformation menu. This button isalso used to return to or exit thelast screen displayed onthe DIC.

For more information, see DriverInformation Center (DIC) onpage 5‑23.

Ultrasonic Parking AssistIf available, Ultrasonic Rear ParkingAssist (URPA) uses sensors on therear bumper to detect objects whileparking the vehicle. It operates atspeeds less than 8 km/h (5 mph).URPA uses audible beeps toprovide distance and systeminformation.

Keep the sensors on the vehicle'srear bumper clean to ensure properoperation.

See Ultrasonic Parking Assist onpage 9‑42 for more information.

Power OutletsThe accessory power outlets can beused to plug in electrical equipment,such as a cell phone or MP3 player.

There is one accessory power outletlocated on the center floor consoleand one on the rear of the centerfloor console. These outlets arepowered when the key is in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY, or untilthe driver door is opened within10 minutes of turning off the vehicle.See Retained Accessory Power(RAP) on page 9‑23.

See Power Outlets on page 5‑5.

Performance andMaintenance

Traction ControlSystem (TCS)The traction control system limitswheel spin. The system is on whenthe vehicle is started.. To turn off traction control, press

and release g located on the

console. i illuminates and theappropriate DIC messagedisplays. See Vehicle Messages(Canada Base Level) onpage 5‑28 or Vehicle Messages(Canada Uplevel and UnitedStates) on page 5‑28.

. Press and release g again toturn traction control back on.

For more information, see TractionControl System (TCS) onpage 9‑37.


1-20 In Brief

StabiliTrak® SystemThe StabiliTrak system assists withdirectional control of the vehicle indifficult driving conditions. Thesystem is on when the vehicle isstarted.. To turn off both Traction Control

and StabiliTrak, press andhold g until g and i illuminateand the appropriate DICmessage displays. See VehicleMessages (Canada Base Level)on page 5‑28 or VehicleMessages (Canada Uplevel andUnited States) on page 5‑28.

. Press g again to turn on bothsystems.

For more information, seeStabiliTrak® System on page 9‑38.

Tire Pressure MonitorThis vehicle may have a TirePressure Monitor System (TPMS).

The TPMS warning light alerts youto a significant loss in pressure ofone of the vehicle's tires. If thewarning light comes on, stop assoon as possible and inflate thetires to the recommended pressureshown on the Tire and LoadingInformation label. See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9‑10. The warninglight will remain on until the tirepressure is corrected.

During cooler conditions, the low tirepressure warning light may appearwhen the vehicle is first started andthen turn off. This may be an early

indicator that the tire pressures aregetting low and the tires need to beinflated to the proper pressure.

The TPMS does not replace normalmonthly tire maintenance. It is thedriver’s responsibility to maintaincorrect tire pressures.

See Tire Pressure Monitor Systemon page 10‑50.

Tire Sealant andCompressor KitThis vehicle may come with a sparetire and tire changing equipment ora tire sealant and compressor kit.The kit can be used to temporarilyseal small punctures in the treadarea of the tire.

See Tire Sealant and CompressorKit on page 10‑65 for completeoperating information.

If the vehicle came with a spare tireand tire changing equipment, see Ifa Tire Goes Flat on page 10‑63.


In Brief 1-21

Engine Oil Life SystemThe engine oil life system calculatesengine oil life based on vehicle useand displays the CHANGE ENGINEOIL SOON DIC message orCode 82 DIC message when it isnecessary to change the engine oiland filter.

Remember, the Oil Life displaymust be reset after each oil change.It will not reset itself. Also, becareful not to reset the Oil Lifedisplay accidentally at break="2"any time other than when the oil hasjust been changed. It cannot bereset accurately until the next oilchange. To reset the engine oil lifesystem press theSET button while the Oil Life displayis active.

Resetting the Oil Life System

1. Using the DIC MENU button andthumbwheel, scroll until youreach REMAINING OIL LIFE onthe DIC (oil can symbol with% sign for Canada).

2. Press the SET button to resetthe oil life at 100%. Whenprompted, use the thumbwheelto highlight YES or NO. Pressthe SET/CLEAR button toconfirm.

Be careful not to reset the oil lifedisplay accidentally at any timeother than after the oil is changed.It cannot be reset accurately.

See Engine Oil Life System onpage 10‑12.

Driving for Better FuelEconomyDriving habits can affect fuelmileage. Here are some driving tipsto get the best fuel economypossible.. Avoid fast starts and accelerate

smoothly.. Brake gradually and avoid

abrupt stops.

. Avoid idling the engine for longperiods of time.

. When road and weatherconditions are appropriate, usecruise control.

. Always follow posted speedlimits or drive more slowly whenconditions require.

. Keep vehicle tires properlyinflated.

. Combine several trips into asingle trip.

. Replace the vehicle's tires withthe same TPC Spec numbermolded into the tire's sidewallnear the size.

. Follow recommended scheduledmaintenance.


1-22 In Brief

Roadside AssistanceProgramU.S.: 1-800-243-8872

TTY Users: 1-888-889-2438

Canada: 1-800-268-6800

As the owner of a new Chevrolet,you are automatically enrolled in theRoadside Assistance program.

See Roadside Assistance Programon page 13‑6 for more information.

Roadside Assistance and OnStar

If you have an active OnStarsubscription, press theQ buttonand the current GPS location will besent to an OnStar advisor who willassess your problem, contactRoadside Assistance, and relayyour exact location to get the helpyou need.

Online Owner Center

The Online Owner Center is acomplimentary service that includesonline service reminders, vehiclemaintenance tips, online ownermanual, special privileges,and more.

Sign up today at:www.chevyownercenter.com(U.S.) or www.gm.ca (Canada).

OnStar®

For vehicles with an active OnStarsubscription, OnStar uses severalinnovative technologies and liveAdvisors to provide a wide rangeof safety, security, navigation,diagnostics, and calling services.

Automatic Crash Response

In a crash, built‐in sensorsautomatically alert an OnStarAdvisor who is immediatelyconnected to the vehicle to seeif you need help.

How OnStar Service Works

Q : Push this blue button toconnect to a specially trainedOnStar Advisor to verify youraccount information and toanswer questions.

] : Push this red emergencybutton to get priority help fromspecially trained OnStar EmergencyAdvisors.

X : Push this button for hands‐free,voice‐activated calling and to givevoice commands for Hands‐FreeCalling and Turn‐by‐TurnNavigation.


In Brief 1-23

Automatic Crash Response,Emergency Services, Crisis Assist,Stolen Vehicle Assistance, VehicleDiagnostics, Remote Door Unlock,Roadside Assistance, Turn‐by‐TurnNavigation, and Hands‐Free Callingare available on most vehicles. Notall OnStar services are available onall vehicles. For more information,see the OnStar Owner's Guide; visitwww.onstar.com (U.S.) orwww.onstar.ca (Canada); contactOnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR(1‐888‐466‐7827) or TTY1‐877‐248‐2080; or pushtheQ button to speak with anOnStar Advisor 24 hours a day,seven days a week.

For a full description of OnStarservices and system limitations, seethe OnStar Owner's Guide in theglove box.

OnStar service is subject to theOnStar Terms and Conditionsincluded in the OnStar GloveBox Kit.

OnStar service requires wirelesscommunication networks and theGlobal Positioning System (GPS)satellite network. Not all OnStarservices are available everywhereor on all vehicles at all times.

OnStar service cannot work unlessthe vehicle is in a place whereOnStar has an agreement with awireless service provider for servicein that area, and the wirelessservice provider has coverage,network capacity, reception, andtechnology compatible with OnStar'sservice. Service involving locationinformation about the vehicle cannotwork unless GPS signals areavailable, unobstructed, andcompatible with the OnStarhardware. The vehicle must have aworking electrical system andadequate battery power for theOnStar equipment to operate.

OnStar service may not work if theOnStar equipment is not properlyinstalled or you have not maintainedit even if the vehicle is in goodworking order and in compliancewith all government regulations.If you try to add, connect, or modifyany equipment or software in thevehicle, OnStar service may notwork. Other problems beyondOnStar's control may preventservice to you, such as hills, tallbuildings, tunnels, weather,electrical system design andarchitecture of the vehicle, damageto important parts of the vehicle in acrash, or wireless phone networkcongestion or jamming.

See Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13‑16 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and Industry CanadaStandards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.


1-24 In Brief

OnStar Steering WheelControls

This vehicle may have Talk/Mutebuttons that can be used to interactwith OnStar Hands-Free calling.See Steering Wheel Controls onpage 5‑2 for more information.

On some vehicles, the Talk/Mutebuttons can be used to dial phoneextensions. See the OnStar Owner'sGuide for more information.

Your Responsibility

Increase the volume of the radio ifthe OnStar Advisor cannot beheard.

If the light next to the OnStarbuttons is red, the system may notbe functioning properly.PushQ and request a vehiclediagnostic. If the light appears clear(no light appears), your OnStarsubscription has expired and allservices have been deactivated.PushQ to confirm that the OnStarequipment is active.


Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-1

Keys, Doors, andWindows

Keys and LocksKeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 2-9Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . 2-11Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12

DoorsTrunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12

Vehicle SecurityVehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14Vehicle Alarm System . . . . . . . 2-14Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14Immobilizer Operation . . . . . . . 2-14

Exterior MirrorsConvex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15Manual Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16

Interior MirrorsManual Rearview Mirror . . . . . . 2-17Automatic DimmingRearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17

WindowsWindows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20

RoofSunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21


2-2 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Keys and Locks

Keys

{ WARNING

Leaving children in a vehicle withthe ignition key is dangerous formany reasons. Children or otherscould be badly injured or evenkilled. They could operate thepower windows or other controlsor even make the vehicle move.The windows will function with thekeys in the ignition and childrencould be seriously injured or killedif caught in the path of a closingwindow. Do not leave the keys ina vehicle with children.

{ WARNING

Leaving children in a vehicle withthe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter is dangerous for manyreasons; children or others couldbe badly injured or even killed.They could operate the powerwindows or other controls or evenmake the vehicle move. Thewindows will function with theRKE transmitter in the vehicleand they could be seriouslyinjured or killed if caught in thepath of a closing window. Do notleave the RKE transmitter in avehicle with children.

The key that is part of the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter canbe used for the ignition and all locksif the vehicle is a key accessvehicle. If the vehicle has thekeyless ignition, the key can beused for the locks.



Press the button on the RKEtransmitter to extend the key. Pressthe button and the key blade toretract the key.

See your dealer if a new key isneeded.

Notice: If the keys get locked inthe vehicle, it may have to bedamaged to get them out. Alwayscarry a spare key.

If locked out of the vehicle, seeRoadside Assistance Program onpage 13‑6.

With an active OnStar subscription,an OnStar Advisor may remotelyunlock the vehicle. See OnStar® onpage 1‑22.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) SystemSee Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13‑16 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and Industry CanadaStandards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.

If there is a decrease in the RKEoperating range:. Check the distance. The

transmitter may be too far fromthe vehicle.

. Check the location. Othervehicles or objects may beblocking the signal.

. Check the transmitter's battery.See “Battery Replacement” laterin this section.

. If the transmitter is still notworking correctly, see yourdealer or a qualified technicianfor service.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System OperationThe transmitter functions will workup to 20 m (65 ft) away from thevehicle. On vehicles with remotestart the distance will be greater.

Keep in mind that other conditions,such as those previously stated, canimpact the performance of thetransmitter.



Q (Lock): Press to lock all doors.

The turn signal indicators may flashand/or the horn may sound toindicate locking. See “LockingFeedback” under VehiclePersonalization on page 5‑34.

If the driver door is open when Q ispressed, all doors lock except thedriver door, if enabled through thevehicle personalization.

If the passenger door is open whenQ is pressed, all doors lock.

Pressing Q may also arm thetheft-deterrent system. See VehicleAlarm System on page 2‑14.

K (Unlock): Press to unlock thedriver door or all doors. See “DoorUnlock Options” under VehiclePersonalization on page 5‑34.

The turn signal indicators may flashand/or the horn may sound toindicate unlocking. See “UnlockFeedback” under VehiclePersonalization on page 5‑34.

Pressing K will disarm thetheft-deterrent system. See VehicleAlarm System on page 2‑14.

V (Remote Trunk Release):Press and hold briefly to open thetrunk.

7 (Vehicle Locator/PanicAlarm): Press and hold briefly tolocate the vehicle. The exteriorlamps flash and the horn chirps.

Press and hold 7 for at leasttwo seconds to sound the panicalarm. The horn sounds and the

turn signals flash for 30 seconds,or until 7 is pressed again or thevehicle is started.

/ (Remote Vehicle Start): Forvehicles with this feature, press Qand then press and hold/ withinfive seconds to start the engine fromoutside the vehicle using the RKEtransmitter. See Remote VehicleStart on page 2‑9 for additionalinformation.

The buttons on the keys aredisabled when there is a key is inthe ignition, if equipped.

Keyless Access Operation

Some vehicles have a keylessaccess system that lets you lockand unlock the doors and accessthe trunk without removing the RKEtransmitter from your pocket, purse,briefcase, etc. The RKE transmittershould be within 1 m (3 ft) of thedoor or trunk being opened. If thevehicle has this feature, there will bea body colored touch pad on theoutside front door handles.



Keyless Unlocking

With the RKE transmitter within1 m (3 ft), approach the front doorand pull the handle to unlock andopen the door. If the transmitter isrecognized, the door will unlockand open.

Entering any door other than thedriver door will always cause all ofthe doors to unlock. This is notcustomizable.

To customize which doors unlockwhen the driver door is opened, see“Door Unlock Options” underVehicle Personalization onpage 5‑34.

Keyless Locking

If the vehicle has the keylessaccess system, this feature allowsyou to select whether the doorsautomatically lock during normalvehicle exit. When the vehicle isturned off and all doors becomeclosed, the vehicle will determinehow many keyless accesstransmitters remain in the vehiclesinterior. If at least one keylessaccess transmitter has beenremoved from the interior of thevehicle, the doors will lock aftereight seconds.

If there are two keyless accesstransmitters in the vehicle and oneis removed, the other will be lockedin. A person approaching theoutside of the locked vehicle withoutan authorized keyless accesstransmitter will not be able to openthe door, even with the transmitter inthe vehicle.

Lock Sensor

When all doors are closed and theignition is off, the vehicle can belocked by pressing this area on thedoor handle. This feature will beavailable for several minutes afterthe vehicle has been turned off.

Keyless Trunk Opening

Lift up on the touch pad locatedabove the license plate to open thetrunk if the RKE transmitter iswithin range.



Programming Transmitters tothe Vehicle

Only RKE transmitters programmedto the vehicle will work. If atransmitter is lost or stolen, areplacement can be purchased andprogrammed through your dealer.The vehicle can be reprogrammedso that lost or stolen transmitters nolonger work. Any remainingtransmitters will need to bereprogrammed. Each vehicle canhave up to five transmitters matchedto it.

Programming with a RecognizedTransmitter (Keyless AccessVehicles Only)

A new transmitter can beprogrammed to the vehicle whenthere is one recognized transmitter.To program, the vehicle must be offand all of the transmitters, bothcurrently recognized and new, mustbe with you.

1. Remove the plastic trim piecefrom the small storage area nextto the accessory power outlettowards the front of the console,to access the transmitter slot.Push the button on therecognized transmitter to extendthe key blade. Insert the keyblade into the transmitter slot.

2. Insert the vehicle key of the newtransmitter into the key lockcylinder located on the outsideof the driver door and turn thekey to the unlock positionfive times within 10 seconds.

The Driver InformationCenter (DIC) displays READYFOR REMOTE #2, 3, 4 or 5.

3. Remove the recognized key andplace the new transmitter intothe transmitter slot.

4. Press the ignition. When thetransmitter is learned, the DICwill show that it is ready toprogram the next transmitter.

5. Remove the transmitter from thetransmitter pocket and press K.

To program additionaltransmitters, repeat Steps 3through 5.

When all additional transmittersare programmed, press and holdthe ignition for 10 seconds toexit programming mode.Replace the plastic trim piecefrom the small storage area.



Programming without aRecognized Transmitter(Keyless Access Vehicles Only)

If there are no currently recognizedtransmitters available, follow thisprocedure to program up to fivetransmitters. This feature is notavailable in Canada. This procedurewill take approximately 30 minutesto complete. The vehicle must be offand all of the transmitters you wishto program must be with you.

1. Insert the vehicle key of thetransmitter into the key lockcylinder located on the outsideof the driver door and turn thekey to the unlock position fivetimes within 10 seconds.

The Driver Information Center(DIC) displays REMOTE LEARNPENDING, PLEASE WAIT.

2. Wait for 10 minutes until theDIC displays PRESS ENGINESTART BUTTON TO LEARNand then press the ignition.

The DIC displays will againshow REMOTE LEARNPENDING, PLEASE WAIT.

3. Repeat Step 2 two additionaltimes. After the third time allpreviously known transmitterswill no longer work with thevehicle. Remaining transmitterscan be relearned during thenext steps.

The DIC display shouldnow show READY FORREMOTE # 1.

4. Remove the plastic trim piecefrom the small storage area nextto the accessory power outlettowards the front of the console,to access the transmitter slot.Push the button on therecognized transmitter to extendthe key blade. Insert the keyblade into the transmitter slot.

5. Press the ignition. When thetransmitter is learned the DICwill show that it is ready toprogram the next transmitter.

6. Remove the transmitter from thetransmitter slot and press K.

To program additionaltransmitters, repeat Steps 4through 6.

When all additional transmittersare programmed, press and holdthe ignition for 10 seconds toexit programming mode.Replace the plastic trim piecefrom the small storage area.



Starting the Vehicle with a LowTransmitter Battery

If the transmitter battery is weak, theDIC may display NO REMOTEDETECTED when you try to startthe vehicle. The REPLACEBATTERY IN REMOTE KEYmessage may also be displayedat this time.

To start the vehicle:

1. Remove the plastic trim piecefrom the small storage area nextto the accessory power outlettowards the front of the console,to access the transmitter slot.

2. Push the button on therecognized transmitter to extendthe key blade. Insert the keyblade into the transmitter slot.

3. With the vehicle in P (Park) orN (Neutral), press the brakepedal and the ignition button.See Starting the Engine onpage 9‑20 for additionalinformation about the vehicle'skeyless ignition with pushbuttonstart.

Replace the transmitter batteryas soon as possible.

Battery Replacement

Replace the battery if the REPLACEBATTERY IN REMOTE KEYmessage displays in the DIC. See“Replace Battery in Remote Key”under Key and Lock Messages onpage 5‑31.

The battery is not rechargeable.To replace the battery:

1. Push the button on thetransmitter to extend thekey blade.

2. Remove the battery cover byprying it with a finger.



3. Remove the battery by pushingon the battery and sliding ittoward the key blade.

4. Insert the new battery, positiveside facing up. Push the batterydown until it is held in place.Replace with a CR2032 orequivalent battery.

5. Snap the battery cover back onto the transmitter.

Remote Vehicle StartThe vehicle may have this featurethat allows you to start the enginefrom outside the vehicle.

/ (Remote Vehicle Start):This button will be on theRKE transmitter if the vehicle hasremote start.

Vehicles with an automatic climatecontrol system will default to aheating or cooling mode dependingon the outside temperature during aremote start. A vehicle withoutautomatic climate control willdefault to the last used heating or

cooling mode. Once the key isturned to ON/RUN, the climatecontrol system will turn on at thesetting the vehicle was last set to.If the vehicle has heated seats, theymay come on during a remote start.See Heated Front Seats onpage 3‑7 for more information.

Laws in some local communitiesmay restrict the use of remotestarters. For example, some lawsrequire a person using remote startto have the vehicle in view. Checklocal regulations for anyrequirements.

There are other conditions whichcan affect the performance of thetransmitter. See Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System on page 2‑3 foradditional information.

Starting the Vehicle

To start the engine using the remotestart feature:

1. Aim the RKE transmitter atthe vehicle.

2. Press and release Q.

3. Immediately after completingStep 2, press and hold/ untilthe turn signal lamps flash, or forabout two seconds if the vehicleis not in view.

When the engine starts, the parkinglamps will turn on and remain on aslong as the engine is running. Thedoors will be locked and the climatecontrol system may come on.

The engine will continue to run for10 minutes. Repeat the steps for a10-minute time extension. Remotestart can be extended only once.

Insert the key and turn it to ON/RUNbefore driving.

Extending Engine Run Time

For a 10-minute extension, repeatSteps 1 through 3 while the engineis still running. The remote start canbe extended once.

When the remote start is extended,the second 10 minutes will startimmediately.



For example, if the engine hasbeen running for five minutes, and10 minutes are added, the enginewill run for a total of 15 minutes.

A maximum of two remote starts,or a single start with an extension,are allowed between ignition cycles.

After this, the vehicle's ignitionswitch must be turned to ON/RUNand then back to LOCK/OFF usingthe key, before the remote startprocedure can be used again.

Canceling a Remote Start

To cancel a remote start, do one ofthe following:. Aim the RKE transmitter at the

vehicle and press and hold/until the parking lamps turn off.

. Turn on the hazard warningflashers.

. Turn the vehicle on and then off.

Conditions in Which Remote StartWill Not Work

The remote vehicle start feature willnot operate if:. The key is in the ignition.. The hood is not closed.. The hazard warning flashers

are on.. The malfunction indicator lamp

is on.. The engine coolant temperature

is too high.. The oil pressure is low.. Two remote vehicle starts, or a

single remote start with anextension, have alreadybeen used.

. The vehicle is not in P (Park).

Door Locks

{ WARNING

Unlocked doors can bedangerous.

. Passengers, especiallychildren, can easily open thedoors and fall out of a movingvehicle. The chance of beingthrown out of the vehicle in acrash is increased if thedoors are not locked. So, allpassengers should wearsafety belts properly and thedoors should be lockedwhenever the vehicle isdriven.

. Young children who get intounlocked vehicles may beunable to get out. A child canbe overcome by extreme heatand can suffer permanentinjuries or even death fromheat stroke. Always lock thevehicle whenever leaving it.

(Continued)



WARNING (Continued)

. Outsiders can easily enterthrough an unlocked doorwhen slowing or stopping thevehicle. Lock the doors tohelp prevent this fromhappening.

To lock or unlock a door fromoutside the vehicle, use the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.From inside the vehicle, use thepower door lock switch or themanual lock knob. Pushing downthe manual lock knob on the driverdoor will lock all doors.

The doors can also be unlockedfrom the inside by pulling the doorhandle. Pulling the door handleagain unlatches the door.

Power Door Locks

The power door lock switch is onthe instrument panel.

Q (Lock): Press to lock the doors.

K (Unlock): Press to unlockthe doors.

Automatic Door Locks

Automatic Door Lock

The doors are programmed toautomatically lock when the shiftlever is moved out of P (Park).

The automatic door lock featurecannot be disabled.

Automatic Door Unlock

The doors will automatically unlockwhen the shift lever is moved intoP (Park).

See Vehicle Personalization onpage 5‑34.



Safety LocksThe rear door safety locks preventpassengers from opening the reardoors from inside the vehicle.

Presso { to activate the safetylocks on the rear doors. The LEDlight (A) comes on when activated.

The rear door power windows arealso disabled.



Doors

Trunk

{ WARNING

Exhaust gases can enter thevehicle if it is driven with theliftgate, trunk/hatch open, or withany objects that pass through theseal between the body and thetrunk/hatch or liftgate. Engineexhaust contains carbonmonoxide (CO) which cannot beseen or smelled. It can causeunconsciousness and even death.

If the vehicle must be driven withthe liftgate, or trunk/hatch open:

. Close all of the windows.

. Fully open the air outlets onor under the instrumentpanel.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Adjust the Climate Controlsystem to a setting thatbrings in only outside air andset the fan speed to thehighest setting. See “ClimateControl Systems” in theIndex.

. If the vehicle has a powerliftgate, disable the powerliftgate function.

For more information aboutcarbon monoxide, see EngineExhaust on page 9‑27.



Remote Trunk Release

To open the trunk from outside thevehicle, press theV button onthe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter, or by pressing the touchpad above the license plate whenthe doors are unlocked.

If the engine is running, the doorsmust be unlocked. Vehicles with anautomatic transmission must be inP (Park), vehicles with a manualtransmission must have the parkbrake applied.

Emergency Trunk ReleaseHandle

Notice: Do not use theemergency trunk release handleas a tie-down or anchor pointwhen securing items in the trunkas it could damage the handle.The emergency trunk releasehandle is only intended to aid aperson trapped in a latched trunk,enabling them to open the trunkfrom the inside.

There is an emergency trunkrelease handle located inside thetrunk on the trunk lid. The releasehandle can be accessed by foldingthe rear seatback. See Rear Seatson page 3‑8. Pull the release handleto open the trunk from the inside.



Vehicle SecurityThis vehicle has theft-deterrentfeatures; however, they do not makeit impossible to steal.

Vehicle Alarm SystemThis vehicle has a theft alarmsystem.

Arming the System

To arm the system, use the powerdoor lock switch or the RKEtransmitter to lock the vehicle whileexiting with the vehicle turned off.

The alarm arms after about30 seconds after all the doors havebeen closed.

Press Q again and the system armsimmediately.

The security light, located in thecenter of the instrument panel, willflash slowly.

Disarming the System

To disarm the system press K onthe RKE transmitter.

Turning off the System Alarm

If there is an attempt to open thedoors, trunk, or hood without firstpressing K on the transmitter, thesystem alarm will be activated.The exterior lamps will flash andthe horn will sound for about30 seconds.

To turn off the system alarmpress K on the RKE transmitter.

ImmobilizerSee Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13‑16 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and Industry CanadaStandards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.

Immobilizer OperationThis vehicle has a passivetheft-deterrent system.

The system does not have to bemanually armed or disarmed.

The vehicle is automaticallyimmobilized when the key isremoved from the ignition.

The system is automaticallydisarmed when the vehicle isstarted with the correct key. The keyuses a transponder that matches animmobilizer control unit in thevehicle and automatically disarmsthe system. Only an authorized keystarts the vehicle. The vehicle maynot start if the key is damaged.



The security light, located in theinstrument panel cluster, comes onif there is a problem with arming ordisarming the theft-deterrentsystem.

When trying to start the vehicle, thesecurity light comes on briefly whenthe ignition is turned on.

If the engine does not start and thesecurity light stays on, there is aproblem with the system. Turn theignition off and try again.

If the engine still does not start, andthe key appears to be undamagedor the light continues to stay on, tryanother ignition key. If the enginedoes not start with the other key, thevehicle needs service. If the vehicledoes start, the first key may bedamaged. See your dealer who canservice the theft-deterrent systemand have a new key made.

Do not leave the key or devicethat disarms or deactivates thetheft-deterrent system in the vehicle.

Exterior Mirrors

Convex Mirrors

{ WARNING

A convex mirror can make things,like other vehicles, look fartheraway than they really are. If youcut too sharply into the right lane,you could hit a vehicle on theright. Check the inside mirror orglance over your shoulder beforechanging lanes.

The passenger side mirror is convexshaped. A convex mirror's surface iscurved so more can be seen fromthe driver seat.



Manual Mirrors

Vehicles with a manual mirroradjustment have controls next toeach mirror.

Adjust the inside rearview mirror bymoving it up and down or side toside. Adjust the mirror to avoid glarefrom the headlamps behind you.Push the tab forward for daytimeuse and pull it for nighttime use.

Power Mirrors

Controls for the outside powermirrors are located on thedriver door.

To adjust the mirror:

1. Turn the selector switch toL (left) or R (right) to choosethe driver or passenger mirror.

2. Move the control to adjustthe mirror.

3. Turn the selector switch to theO position to deselect the mirror.

Folding Mirrors

Manual Foldaway Mirrors

The vehicle has manual foldingmirrors. These mirrors can be foldedinward to prevent damage whengoing through an automatic carwash. To fold, pull the mirror towardthe vehicle. Push the mirror outwardto return it to the original position.

Heated MirrorsThe vehicle may have heatedmirrors.

= (Rear Window Defogger):Press to heat the outside rearviewmirrors. See “Rear WindowDefogger” under Automatic ClimateControl System on page 8‑3 formore information.



Interior Mirrors

Manual Rearview MirrorHold the mirror in the center tomove it for a clearer view of behindyour vehicle. Adjust the mirror toavoid glare from the headlampsbehind you. Push the tab at thebottom of the mirror forward fordaytime use and pull it fornighttime use.

Automatic DimmingRearview MirrorThe vehicle may have an automaticdimming inside rearview mirror.Automatic dimming reduces theglare from the headlamps of thevehicle behind you. The dimmingfeature and the indicator light comeon each time the vehicle is started.

Vehicles with OnStar have threecontrol buttons located at thebottom of the mirror. See yourdealer for more information aboutOnStar and how to subscribe to it.See the OnStar Owner's Guide formore information about the servicesOnStar provides.

Cleaning the Mirror

Do not spray glass cleaner directlyon the mirror. Use a soft toweldampened with water.



Windows

{ WARNING

Leaving children, helpless adults,or pets in a vehicle with thewindows closed is dangerous.They can be overcome by theextreme heat and sufferpermanent injuries or even deathfrom heat stroke. Never leave achild, a helpless adult, or a petalone in a vehicle, especially withthe windows closed in warm orhot weather.

The vehicle aerodynamics aredesigned to improve fuel economyperformance. This may result in apulsing sound when either rearwindow is down and the frontwindows are up. To reduce thesound, open either a front windowor the sunroof (if equipped).

Power Windows

{ WARNING

Leaving children in a vehicle withthe keys is dangerous for manyreasons. Children or others couldbe badly injured or even killed.They could operate the powerwindows or other controls or evenmake the vehicle move. Thewindows will function and theycould be seriously injured or killedif caught in the path of a closingwindow. Do not leave keys in avehicle with children.

When there are children in therear seat use the window lockoutbutton to prevent unintentionaloperation of the windows.



The power window switches on thedriver door control all four windows.The passenger doors have awindow switch that controls thatwindow. Push the switch down toopen the window. Pull the front ofthe switch up to close it.

The switches work when theignition is in ON/RUN, ACC/ACCESSORY, or in RetainedAccessory Power (RAP). SeeRetained Accessory Power (RAP)on page 9‑23.

Express Window Operation

Your vehicle may have windowswith an express-up or down feature.This feature allows the window to belowered or raised without holdingthe switch. Passenger side and rearwindows only have express-down.Pull a window switch up or push itdown all the way, release it, andthe window goes down or upautomatically. Stop the window bypushing or pulling the switch.

Obstacle Detection Feature

If equipped with express-up, and anobject is in the path of the windowwhen closing, the window will stopat the obstruction and auto-reverseto a preset factory position. Weatherconditions such as severe cold and/or ice may also cause the window toauto-reverse. The window will returnto normal operation once theobstruction or condition is removed.

If conditions prevent the windowfrom closing and the windowcontinues to auto-reverse, it ispossible to close the window withthe ignition in ON/RUN by holdingthe window switch in the partially orfully pulled up position. Release ofthe switch from the partially pulledup position will cause the window tostop. Release of the switch from thefully pulled up position will activatethe express-up and related obstacledetection features.

Programming the PowerWindows

If the battery on the vehicle hasbeen recharged or disconnected,or is not working, you will need toreprogram each front power windowfor the express-up feature to work.Before reprogramming, replace orrecharge the vehicle's battery.



To program each front window,follow these steps:

1. With the ignition in ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN,or when Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) is active, closeall doors.

2. Press and hold the powerwindow switch until the windowis fully open.

3. Pull the power window switch upuntil the window is fully closed.

4. Continue holding the switch upfor approximately two secondsafter the window is completelyclosed.

The window is now reprogrammed.Repeat the process for the otherwindows.

Window Lockout

The rear window lockout switch ison the driver door. This featureprevents the rear passengerwindows from operating, exceptfrom the driver position.

Presso { to activate the rearwindow lockout switch. The LEDlight (A) comes on when activated.

The rear door locks are alsodisabled.



Overload Feature

If the windows are operatedrepeatedly in short intervals, thewindow operation is disabled for ashort time.

Sun Visors

Pull the sun visor down to blockglare. Detach the sun visor from thecenter mount to pivot to the sidewindow, or to extend along the rod,if available.



Roof

Sunroof

On vehicles with a sunroof, theswitches are on the overheadconsole.

The sunroof only operates whenthe ignition is in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY or in RetainedAccessory Power (RAP). SeeRetained Accessory Power (RAP)on page 9‑23 for more information.

To open or close the sunroof, pressthe open or close sunroof switch (A)to the first detent position.

To express open or close thesunroof with the safety functionenabled, press the open or closesunroof switch (A) to the seconddetent position and release.To stop the movement, press theswitch again.

To automatically tilt or close thesunroof, press the tilt open orclose sunroof switch (B).

If an object is in the path of thesunroof while it is closing, theanti-pinch feature will detect theobject and stop the sunroof.

The sunroof glass panel cannot beopened or closed if the vehicle hasan electrical failure.

Dirt and debris may collect on thesunroof seal or in the track. Thiscould cause an issue with sunroofoperation, noise, or plugging withinthe water drainage system.Periodically open the sunroof andremove any obstacles or loosedebris. Wipe the sunroof seal androof sealing area using a cleancloth, mild soap, and water. Do notremove grease from the sunroof.

Sunshade

The sunshade is manually operated.Close or open the sunshade bysliding. When the sunroof isopened, the sunshade isalways open.



Safety Function

If the sunroof has any resistanceduring automatic closing, it willimmediately stop and reverse.

To override the safety function,press and hold the close sunroofswitch. The sunroof closes withoutthe safety function. To stop themovement, release the switch.

Initializing the Sunroof

If the sunroof cannot be fully closed,or the express open or close featuredoes not function, the sunroof mayneed to be initialized. This canhappen if the battery has beendisconnected or the sunroof hasbeen serviced.

To initialize the sunroof:

1. Press the close sunroof switchto the first detent position. Holdthe switch in this position for10 seconds after the sunroof hasfully closed.

2. Press the open sunroof switch tothe first detent position. Releasethe switch when the sunroof isfully opened.

3. Press the open sunroof switch tothe first detent position and holdfor 10 seconds. The sunroof willautomatically close. The switchcan be released when thesunroof stops.


Seats and Restraints 3-1

Seats andRestraints

Head RestraintsHead Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Front SeatsSeat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Power Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . 3-4Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . 3-5Heated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7

Rear SeatsRear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8

Safety BeltsSafety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12Safety Belt Use DuringPregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17

Safety Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . 3-17

Safety System Check . . . . . . . . 3-17Safety Belt Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18Replacing Safety Belt SystemParts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-18

Airbag SystemAirbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . 3-21When Should an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23

What Makes an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24

How Does an AirbagRestrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24

What Will You See after anAirbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24

Passenger SensingSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26

Servicing the Airbag-EquippedVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30

Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . 3-31

Airbag System Check . . . . . . . . 3-32Replacing Airbag SystemParts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-32

Child RestraintsOlder Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33Infants and YoungChildren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35

Child Restraint Systems . . . . . 3-37Where to Put the Restraint . . . 3-40Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children (LATCHSystem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41

Replacing LATCH SystemParts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-48

Securing Child Restraints(Rear Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48

Securing Child Restraints(Front Passenger Seat) . . . . 3-50


3-2 Seats and Restraints

Head RestraintsThe vehicle's front and rear seatshave adjustable head restraints inthe outboard seating positions.

{ WARNING

With head restraints that are notinstalled and adjusted properly,there is a greater chance thatoccupants will suffer a neck/spinal injury in a crash. Do notdrive until the head restraints forall occupants are installed andadjusted properly.

Adjust the head restraint so that thetop of the restraint is at the sameheight as the top of the occupant'shead. This position reduces thechance of a neck injury in a crash.

The height of the head restraint canbe adjusted. Pull the head restraintup to raise it. Try to move the headrestraint to make sure that it islocked in place.

To lower the head restraint, pressthe button, located on the top of theseatback, and push the headrestraint down. Try to move thehead restraint after the button isreleased to make sure that it islocked in place.



The front seat outboard headrestraints are not designed tobe removed.

If you are installing a child restraintin the rear seat, see “Securing aChild Restraint Designed for theLATCH System” under LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH System) on page 3‑41.

Front Seats

Seat Adjustment

{ WARNING

You can lose control of thevehicle if you try to adjust amanual driver seat while thevehicle is moving. The suddenmovement could startle andconfuse you, or make you push apedal when you do not want to.Adjust the driver seat only whenthe vehicle is not moving.

To adjust a manual seat:

1. Pull the handle at the front ofthe seat.

2. Slide the seat to the desiredposition and release the handle.

3. Try to move the seat back andforth to be sure it is locked inplace.



Seat Height Adjuster

If available, move the lever up ordown to manually raise or lowerthe seat.

Seat Cushion Tilt Feature

Six-Way Manual Seat Shown,Four-Way Similar

If available, move the lever up ordown to raise or lower the front ofthe seat cushion.

Power Seat Adjustment

To adjust the power driver seat,if equipped:. Move the seat forward or

rearward by sliding the controlforward or rearward.

. Raise or lower the front part ofthe seat cushion by moving thefront of the control up or down.

. Raise or lower the entire seat bymoving the rear of the control upor down.



To adjust the seatback, seeReclining Seatbacks on page 3‑5 formore information.

Reclining Seatbacks

{ WARNING

You can lose control of thevehicle if you try to adjust amanual driver seat while thevehicle is moving. The suddenmovement could startle andconfuse you, or make you push apedal when you do not want to.Adjust the driver seat only whenthe vehicle is not moving.

{ WARNING

If either seatback is not locked, itcould move forward in a suddenstop or crash. That could causeinjury to the person sitting there.Always push and pull on theseatbacks to be sure they arelocked.

To recline the seatback:

1. Lift the lever.

If necessary, move the safetybelt out of the way to accessthe lever.

2. Move the seatback to thedesired position, then releasethe lever to lock the seatbackin place.




To return the seatback to an uprightposition:

1. Lift the lever fully withoutapplying pressure to theseatback, and the seatbackreturns to the upright position.


{ WARNING

Sitting in a reclined position whenthe vehicle is in motion can bedangerous. Even when buckledup, the safety belts cannot dotheir job when reclined like this.

The shoulder belt cannot do itsjob because it will not be againstyour body. Instead, it will be infront of you. In a crash, you couldgo into it, receiving neck or otherinjuries.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

The lap belt cannot do its jobeither. In a crash, the belt couldgo up over your abdomen. Thebelt forces would be there, not atyour pelvic bones. This couldcause serious internal injuries.

For proper protection when thevehicle is in motion, have theseatback upright. Then sit wellback in the seat and wear thesafety belt properly.

Do not have a seatback reclined ifthe vehicle is moving.



Heated Front Seats

{ WARNING

If you cannot feel temperaturechange or pain to the skin, theseat heater may cause burnseven at low temperatures. Toreduce the risk of burns, peoplewith such a condition should usecare when using the seat heater,especially for long periods oftime. Do not place anything onthe seat that insulates againstheat, such as a blanket, cushion,cover, or similar item. This maycause the seat heater tooverheat. An overheated seatheater may cause a burn or maydamage the seat.

On vehicles with heated front seats,the controls are on the centerconsole. The engine must berunning to operate the heated seats.

Press L or M to heat the driver orpassenger seat cushion andseatback.

Press the control once for thehighest setting. With each press ofthe control, the heated seat willchange to the next lower setting,and then the off setting. Three lightsindicate the highest setting and onelight the lowest.

The passenger seat may takelonger to heat up.

Remote Start Heated Seats

When it is cold outside, the heatedseats can be turned onautomatically during a remotevehicle start. The heated seats willbe canceled when the ignition isturned on. Press the control to usethe heated seats after the vehicle isstarted.

The heated seat indicator lights onthe control do not turn on during aremote start.

The temperature performance of anunoccupied seat may be reduced.This is normal.

The heated seats will not turn onduring a remote start unless theheated seat feature is enabled inthe vehicle personalization menu.See Remote Vehicle Start onpage 2‑9 and “Remote Start AutoHeat Seats” under VehiclePersonalization on page 5‑34 formore information.



Rear SeatsEither side of the rear seatback canbe folded.

To fold the rear seatbacks:

1. Place the front seatbacks in theupright position. See RecliningSeatbacks on page 3‑5.

Notice: Folding a rear seat withthe safety belts still fastened maycause damage to the seat or thesafety belts. Always unbuckle thesafety belts and return them totheir normal stowed positionbefore folding a rear seat.

2. Unbuckle the rear safety beltsand make sure the safety beltbuckles are stowed in thepockets in the seat cushion.

3. Make sure the safety belt is inthe guide on top of the seatback.

4. Reach under the safety belt andpull the lever to unlock theseatback.

A tab near the seatback leverraises when the seatback isunlocked.

5. Fold the seatback forward.

Repeat Steps 1 through 4 for theother seatback, if desired.



To raise the seatback:

{ WARNING

A safety belt that is improperlyrouted, not properly attached,or twisted will not provide theprotection needed in a crash. Theperson wearing the belt could beseriously injured. After raising therear seatback, always check to besure that the safety belts areproperly routed and attached, andare not twisted.

1. Make sure the safety belt is inthe guide on the top of theseatback.

2. Lift the seatback up and push itrearward until it clicks into place.Keep the safety belts clear of theseatback and untwisted.

A tab near the seatback leverretracts when the seatback islocked in place.

The center rear safety belt maylock when you raise theseatback. If this happens, let thebelt go back all the way andstart again.

{ WARNING

If the seatback is not locked, itcould move forward in a suddenstop or crash. That could causeinjury to the person sitting there.Always pull forward on the top ofthe seatback at the area of thelatch to be sure it is locked.

3. Push and pull on the seatback tomake sure it is locked intoposition.

4. Repeat Steps 1 through 3 for theother seatback, if necessary.

Keep the seat in the upright lockedposition when not in use.



Safety BeltsThis section of the manualdescribes how to use safety beltsproperly. It also describes somethings not to do with safety belts.

{ WARNING

Do not let anyone ride where asafety belt cannot be wornproperly. In a crash, if you or yourpassenger(s) are not wearingsafety belts, injuries can be muchworse than if you are wearingsafety belts. You can be seriouslyinjured or killed by hitting thingsinside the vehicle harder or bybeing ejected from the vehicle.In addition, anyone who is notbuckled up can strike otherpassengers in the vehicle.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

It is extremely dangerous to ridein a cargo area, inside or outsideof a vehicle. In a collision,passengers riding in these areasare more likely to be seriouslyinjured or killed. Do not allowpassengers to ride in any area ofthe vehicle that is not equippedwith seats and safety belts.

Always wear a safety belt, andcheck that all passenger(s) arerestrained properly too.

This vehicle has indicators as areminder to buckle the safety belts.See Safety Belt Reminders onpage 5‑10 for additional information.

Why Safety Belts Work

When riding in a vehicle, you travelas fast as the vehicle does. If thevehicle stops suddenly, you keepgoing until something stops you.It could be the windshield, theinstrument panel, or the safety belts!



When you wear a safety belt, youand the vehicle slow down together.There is more time to stop becauseyou stop over a longer distance and,when worn properly, your strongestbones take the forces from thesafety belts. That is why wearingsafety belts makes such goodsense.

Questions and Answers AboutSafety Belts

Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicleafter a crash if I am wearing asafety belt?

A: You could be — whether you arewearing a safety belt or not.Your chance of being consciousduring and after a crash, so youcan unbuckle and get out, ismuch greater if you are belted.

Q: If my vehicle has airbags, whyshould I have to wear safetybelts?

A: Airbags are supplementalsystems only; so they work withsafety belts — not instead of

them. Whether or not an airbagis provided, all occupants stillhave to buckle up to get themost protection.

Also, in nearly all states and inall Canadian provinces, the lawrequires wearing safety belts.

How to Wear Safety BeltsProperlyThis section is only for people ofadult size.

There are special things to knowabout safety belts and children. Andthere are different rules for smallerchildren and infants. If a child will beriding in the vehicle, see OlderChildren on page 3‑33 or Infantsand Young Children on page 3‑35.Follow those rules for everyone'sprotection.

It is very important for all occupantsto buckle up. Statistics show thatunbelted people are hurt more oftenin crashes than those who arewearing safety belts.

There are important things to knowabout wearing a safety belt properly.

. Sit up straight and always keepyour feet on the floor in frontof you.

. Always use the correct bucklefor your seating position.



. Wear the lap part of the belt lowand snug on the hips, justtouching the thighs. In a crash,this applies force to the strongpelvic bones and you would beless likely to slide under the lapbelt. If you slid under it, the beltwould apply force on yourabdomen. This could causeserious or even fatal injuries.

. Wear the shoulder belt over theshoulder and across the chest.These parts of the body are bestable to take belt restrainingforces. The shoulder belt locks ifthere is a sudden stop or crash.

{ WARNING

You can be seriously injured,or even killed, by not wearingyour safety belt properly.

. Never allow the lap orshoulder belt to becomeloose or twisted.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Never wear the shoulder beltunder both arms or behindyour back.

. Never route the lap orshoulder belt over anarmrest.

Lap-Shoulder BeltAll seating positions in the vehiclehave a lap-shoulder belt.

The following instructions explainhow to wear a lap-shoulder beltproperly.

1. Adjust the seat, if the seat isadjustable, so you can sit upstraight. To see how, see“Seats” in the Index.

2. Pick up the latch plate and pullthe belt across you. Do not let itget twisted.

The lap-shoulder belt may lock ifyou pull the belt across you veryquickly. If this happens, let thebelt go back slightly to unlock it.Then pull the belt across youmore slowly.

If the shoulder portion of apassenger belt is pulled out allthe way, the child restraintlocking feature may be engaged.If this happens, let the belt goback all the way and start again.



3. Push the latch plate into thebuckle until it clicks.

Pull up on the latch plate tomake sure it is secure. If the beltis not long enough, see SafetyBelt Extender on page 3‑17.

Position the release button onthe buckle so that the safety beltcould be quickly unbuckled ifnecessary.

If equipped with a shoulder beltheight adjuster, move it to theheight that is right for you. See“Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster”later in this section forinstructions on use andimportant safety information.

4. To make the lap part tight, pullup on the shoulder belt.

To unlatch the belt, push the buttonon the buckle. The belt shouldreturn to its stowed position.

Before a door is closed, be sure thesafety belt is out of the way. If adoor is slammed against a safetybelt, damage can occur to both thesafety belt and the vehicle.



Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster

The vehicle has a shoulder beltheight adjuster for the driver andright front passenger seatingpositions.

Adjust the guide so the shoulderportion of the belt is on the shoulderand not falling off of it. The beltshould be close to, but notcontacting, the neck. Impropershoulder belt height adjustmentcould reduce the effectiveness ofthe safety belt in a crash. See Howto Wear Safety Belts Properly onpage 3‑11.

Press the release button (A) andmove the height adjuster to thedesired position. The adjuster canbe moved up by pushing the slide/trim up. After the adjuster is set tothe desired position, try to move itdown without pushing the releasebutton to make sure it has lockedinto position.

Safety Belt Pretensioners

This vehicle has safety beltpretensioners for front outboardoccupants. Although the safety beltpretensioners cannot be seen, theyare part of the safety belt assembly.They can help tighten the safetybelts during the early stages of amoderate to severe frontal and nearfrontal crash if the thresholdconditions for pretensioneractivation are met.

Pretensioners work only once. If thepretensioners activate in a crash,they will need to be replaced, andprobably other new parts for thevehicle's safety belt system. SeeReplacing Safety Belt System Partsafter a Crash on page 3‑18.



Rear Safety Belt ComfortGuides

This vehicle may have rear safetybelt comfort guides. If not, they areavailable through the dealer. Theguides may provide added safetybelt comfort for older children whohave outgrown booster seats andfor some adults. When installed andproperly adjusted, the comfort guidepositions the belt away from theneck and head.

There is one guide, if equipped, foreach outboard passenger position inthe rear seat. To install a comfortguide to the safety belt:

1. Remove the guide from itsstorage pocket on the side ofthe seat.

2. Place the guide over the belt,and insert the two edges of thebelt into the slots of the guide.



3. Be sure that the belt is nottwisted and it lies flat. Theelastic cord must be under thebelt and the guide on top.

{ WARNING

A safety belt that is not properlyworn may not provide theprotection needed in a crash.The person wearing the belt couldbe seriously injured. The shoulderbelt should go over the shoulderand across the chest. These partsof the body are best able to takebelt restraining forces.

4. Buckle, position, and releasethe safety belt as describedpreviously in this section. Makesure the shoulder portion of thebelt is on the shoulder and notfalling off of it. The belt shouldbe close to, but not contacting,the neck.

5. To remove and store the comfortguide, squeeze the belt edgestogether so that the safety beltcan be removed from the guide.Store the guide in its storagepocket on the seatback.



Safety Belt Use DuringPregnancySafety belts work for everyone,including pregnant women. Like alloccupants, they are more likely tobe seriously injured if they do notwear safety belts.

A pregnant woman should wear alap-shoulder belt, and the lapportion should be worn as low aspossible, below the rounding,throughout the pregnancy.

The best way to protect the fetus isto protect the mother. When a safetybelt is worn properly, it is more likelythat the fetus will not be hurt in acrash. For pregnant women, as foranyone, the key to making safetybelts effective is wearing themproperly.

Safety Belt ExtenderIf the vehicle's safety belt will fastenaround you, you should use it.

But if a safety belt is not longenough, your dealer will order youan extender. When you go in toorder it, take the heaviest coat youwill wear, so the extender will belong enough for you. To help avoidpersonal injury, do not let someoneelse use it, and use it only for theseat it is made to fit. The extenderhas been designed for adults. Neveruse it for securing child seats. Towear it, attach it to the regular safetybelt. For more information, see theinstruction sheet that comes withthe extender.

Safety System CheckNow and then, check that the safetybelt reminder light, safety belts,buckles, latch plates, retractors, andanchorages are all working properly.Look for any other loose ordamaged safety belt system partsthat might keep a safety belt systemfrom doing its job. See your dealerto have it repaired. Torn or frayedsafety belts may not protect you in acrash. They can rip apart underimpact forces. If a belt is torn orfrayed, get a new one right away.

Make sure the safety belt reminderlight is working. See Safety BeltReminders on page 5‑10 for moreinformation.

Keep safety belts clean and dry.See Safety Belt Care on page 3‑18.



Safety Belt CareKeep belts clean and dry.

{ WARNING

Do not bleach or dye safety belts.It may severely weaken them. Ina crash, they might not be able toprovide adequate protection.Clean safety belts only with mildsoap and lukewarm water.

Replacing Safety BeltSystem Parts after aCrash

{ WARNING

A crash can damage the safetybelt system in the vehicle.A damaged safety belt systemmay not properly protect theperson using it, resulting inserious injury or even death in acrash. To help make sure thesafety belt systems are workingproperly after a crash, have theminspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soon aspossible.

After a minor crash, replacement ofsafety belts may not be necessary.But the safety belt assemblies thatwere used during any crash mayhave been stressed or damaged.See your dealer to have the safetybelt assemblies inspected orreplaced.

New parts and repairs may benecessary even if the safety beltsystem was not being used at thetime of the crash.

Have the safety belt pretensionerschecked if the vehicle has been in acrash, or if the airbag readiness lightstays on after you start the vehicleor while you are driving. See AirbagReadiness Light on page 5‑11.



Airbag SystemThe vehicle has the followingairbags:. A frontal airbag for the driver.. A frontal airbag for the front

outboard passenger.. A knee airbag for the driver.. A knee airbag for the front

outboard passenger.. A seat-mounted side impact

airbag for the driver.. A seat-mounted side impact

airbag for the front outboardpassenger.

. Seat-mounted side impactairbags for the second rowoutboard passengers.

. A roof-rail airbag for the driverand the passenger seateddirectly behind the driver.

. A roof-rail airbag for the frontoutboard passenger and thepassenger seated directlybehind the front outboardpassenger.

All vehicle airbags have the wordAIRBAG on the trim or on a labelnear the deployment opening.

For frontal airbags, the wordAIRBAG is on the center of thesteering wheel for the driver and onthe instrument panel for the frontoutboard passenger.

For knee airbags, the word AIRBAGis on the lower part of theinstrument panel.

For seat-mounted side impactairbags, the word AIRBAG is on theside of the seatback closest tothe door.

For roof-rail airbags, the wordAIRBAG is on the ceiling or trim.

Airbags are designed to supplementthe protection provided by safetybelts. Even though today's airbagsare also designed to help reducethe risk of injury from the force of aninflating bag, all airbags must inflatevery quickly to do their job.



Here are the most important thingsto know about the airbag system:

{ WARNING

You can be severely injured orkilled in a crash if you are notwearing your safety belt, evenwith airbags. Airbags aredesigned to work with safetybelts, not replace them. Also,airbags are not designed to inflatein every crash. In some crashessafety belts are the only restraint.See When Should an AirbagInflate? on page 3‑23.

Wearing your safety belt during acrash helps reduce the chance ofhitting things inside the vehicle orbeing ejected from it. Airbags are“supplemental restraints” to thesafety belts. Everyone in thevehicle should wear a safety beltproperly, whether or not there isan airbag for that person.

{ WARNING

Because airbags inflate with greatforce and faster than the blink ofan eye, anyone who is upagainst, or very close to anyairbag when it inflates can beseriously injured or killed. Do notsit unnecessarily close to anyairbag, as you would be if sittingon the edge of the seat or leaningforward. Safety belts help keepyou in position before and duringa crash. Always wear a safetybelt, even with airbags. The drivershould sit as far back as possiblewhile still maintaining control ofthe vehicle.

Occupants should not lean on orsleep against the door or sidewindows in seating positions withseat-mounted side impact airbagsand/or roof-rail airbags.

{ WARNING

Children who are up against,or very close to, any airbag whenit inflates can be seriously injuredor killed. Airbags pluslap-shoulder belts offer protectionfor adults and older children, butnot for young children and infants.Neither the vehicle's safety beltsystem nor its airbag system isdesigned for them. Youngchildren and infants need theprotection that a child restraintsystem can provide. Alwayssecure children properly in thevehicle. To read how, see OlderChildren on page 3‑33 or Infantsand Young Children onpage 3‑35.



There is an airbag readiness lighton the instrument panel cluster,which shows the airbag symbol. Thesystem checks the airbag electricalsystem for malfunctions. The lighttells you if there is an electricalproblem. See Airbag ReadinessLight on page 5‑11 for moreinformation.

Where Are the Airbags?

The driver frontal airbag is in thecenter of the steering wheel.

The front outboard passengerfrontal airbag is in the passengerside instrument panel.

The driver knee airbag is below thesteering column. The front outboardpassenger knee airbag is below theglove box.



Driver Side Shown, PassengerSide Similar

The seat-mounted side impactairbags for the driver and frontoutboard passenger are in the sideof the seatbacks closest to the door.

The roof-rail airbags for the driver,right front passenger, and secondrow outboard passengers are in theceiling above the side windows.

Rear Seat Driver Side Shown,Passenger Side Similar

On vehicles with second rowseat‐mounted side impact airbags,they are in the sides of the rearseatback closest to the door.

{ WARNING

If something is between anoccupant and an airbag, theairbag might not inflate properlyor it might force the object intothat person causing severe injury

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

or even death. The path of aninflating airbag must be keptclear. Do not put anythingbetween an occupant and anairbag, and do not attach or putanything on the steering wheelhub or on or near any otherairbag covering.

Do not use seat accessories thatblock the inflation path of aseat-mounted side impact airbag.

Never secure anything to the roofof a vehicle with roof-rail airbagsby routing a rope or tie‐downthrough any door or windowopening. If you do, the path of aninflating roof-rail airbag will beblocked.



When Should an AirbagInflate?Frontal airbags are designed toinflate in moderate to severe frontalor near frontal crashes to helpreduce the potential for severeinjuries, mainly to the driver's orfront outboard passenger's headand chest. However, they are onlydesigned to inflate if the impactexceeds a predetermineddeployment threshold. Deploymentthresholds are used to predict howsevere a crash is likely to be in timefor the airbags to inflate and helprestrain the occupants.

Whether the frontal airbags will orshould inflate is not based primarilyon how fast the vehicle is traveling.It depends on what is hit, thedirection of the impact, and howquickly the vehicle slows down.

Frontal airbags may inflate atdifferent crash speeds depending onwhether the vehicle hits an objectstraight on or at an angle, andwhether the object is fixed ormoving, rigid or deformable, narrowor wide.

Thresholds can also vary withspecific vehicle design.

Frontal airbags are not intended toinflate during vehicle rollovers, rearimpacts, or in many side impacts.

In addition, the vehicle hasdual-stage frontal airbags.Dual-stage airbags adjust therestraint according to crash severity.

Frontal knee airbags are designedto inflate in moderate to severefrontal or near frontal impacts thatexceed a predetermineddeployment threshold.

The vehicle has electronic frontalsensors, which help the sensingsystem distinguish between amoderate frontal impact and a moresevere frontal impact. For moderatefrontal impacts, dual-stage airbagsinflate at a level less than fulldeployment. For more severe frontalimpacts, full deployment occurs.

The vehicle has seat-mounted sideimpact airbags and roof-rail airbags.See Airbag System on page 3‑19.Seat-mounted side impact androof-rail airbags are intended toinflate in moderate to severe sidecrashes depending on the locationof the impact. In addition, theseroof‐rail airbags are intended toinflate during a rollover or in asevere frontal impact. Seat-mountedside impact and roof-rail airbags willinflate if the crash severity is abovethe system's designed thresholdlevel. The threshold level can varywith specific vehicle design.



Roof‐rail airbags are not intended toinflate in rear impacts.A seat-mounted side impact airbagis intended to inflate on the side ofthe vehicle that is struck. Both roof‐rail airbags will inflate when eitherside of the vehicle is struck or if thesensing system predicts that thevehicle is about to roll over on itsside, or in a severe frontal impact.

In any particular crash, no one cansay whether an airbag should haveinflated simply because of thevehicle damage or repair costs.

What Makes an AirbagInflate?In a deployment event, the sensingsystem sends an electrical signaltriggering a release of gas from theinflator. Gas from the inflator fills theairbag causing the bag to break outof the cover. The inflator, the airbag,and related hardware are all part ofthe airbag module.

For airbag location, see Where Arethe Airbags? on page 3‑21.

How Does an AirbagRestrain?In moderate to severe frontal ornear frontal collisions, even beltedoccupants can contact the steeringwheel or the instrument panel. Inmoderate to severe side collisions,even belted occupants can contactthe inside of the vehicle.

Airbags supplement the protectionprovided by safety belts bydistributing the force of the impactmore evenly over theoccupant's body.

Rollover capable roof‐rail airbagsare designed to help contain thehead and chest of occupants in theoutboard seating positions in thefirst and second rows. The rollovercapable roof‐rail airbags aredesigned to help reduce the risk offull or partial ejection in rolloverevents, although no system canprevent all such ejections.

But airbags would not help in manytypes of collisions, primarilybecause the occupant's motion isnot toward those airbags. See WhenShould an Airbag Inflate? onpage 3‑23 for more information.

Airbags should never be regardedas anything more than a supplementto safety belts.

What Will You See afteran Airbag Inflates?After the frontal airbags andseat-mounted side impact airbagsinflate, they quickly deflate, soquickly that some people may noteven realize an airbag inflated.Roof-rail airbags may still be at leastpartially inflated for some time afterthey inflate. Some components ofthe airbag module may be hot forseveral minutes. For location of theairbags, see Where Are theAirbags? on page 3‑21.



The parts of the airbag that comeinto contact with you may be warm,but not too hot to touch. There maybe some smoke and dust comingfrom the vents in the deflatedairbags. Airbag inflation does notprevent the driver from seeing out ofthe windshield or being able to steerthe vehicle, nor does it preventpeople from leaving the vehicle.

{ WARNING

When an airbag inflates, theremay be dust in the air. This dustcould cause breathing problemsfor people with a history ofasthma or other breathing trouble.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

To avoid this, everyone in thevehicle should get out as soon asit is safe to do so. If you havebreathing problems but cannotget out of the vehicle after anairbag inflates, then get fresh airby opening a window or a door.If you experience breathingproblems following an airbagdeployment, you should seekmedical attention.

The vehicle has a feature that mayautomatically unlock the doors, turnon the interior lamps, turn on thehazard warning flashers, and shutoff the fuel system after the airbagsinflate. You can lock the doors, turnoff the interior lamps, and turn offthe hazard warning flashers byusing the controls for thosefeatures.

{ WARNING

A crash severe enough to inflatethe airbags may have alsodamaged important functions inthe vehicle, such as the fuelsystem, brake and steeringsystems, etc. Even if the vehicleappears to be drivable after amoderate crash, there may beconcealed damage that couldmake it difficult to safely operatethe vehicle.

Use caution if you should attemptto restart the engine after a crashhas occurred.



In many crashes severe enough toinflate the airbag, windshields arebroken by vehicle deformation.Additional windshield breakage mayalso occur from the front outboardpassenger airbag.. Airbags are designed to inflate

only once. After an airbaginflates, you will need some newparts for the airbag system.If you do not get them, theairbag system will not be thereto help protect you in anothercrash. A new system will includeairbag modules and possiblyother parts. The service manualfor the vehicle covers the needto replace other parts.

. The vehicle has a crash sensingand diagnostic module whichrecords information after acrash. See Vehicle DataRecording and Privacy onpage 13‑14 and Event DataRecorders on page 13‑14.

. Let only qualified technicianswork on the airbag systems.Improper service can mean thatan airbag system will not workproperly. See your dealer forservice.

Passenger SensingSystemThe vehicle has a passengersensing system for the frontoutboard passenger position. Thepassenger airbag status indicatorwill light on the instrument panelwhen the vehicle is started.

United States

Canada

The words ON and OFF, or thesymbol for on and off, will be visibleduring the system check. If you useremote start, if equipped, to start thevehicle, you may not see the systemcheck. When the system check iscomplete, either the word ON orOFF, or the symbol for on or off, willbe visible. See Passenger AirbagStatus Indicator on page 5‑12.

The passenger sensing systemturns off the front outboardpassenger frontal airbag and kneeairbag under certain conditions.No other airbag is affected by thepassenger sensing system.

The passenger sensing systemworks with sensors that are part ofthe front outboard passenger seat.



The sensors are designed to detectthe presence of a properly seatedoccupant and determine if the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbagand knee airbag should be allowedto inflate or not.

According to accident statistics,children are safer when properlysecured in a rear seat in the correctchild restraint for their weightand size.

We recommend that childrenbe secured in a rear seat,including: an infant or a child ridingin a rear-facing child restraint; achild riding in a forward-facing childseat; an older child riding in abooster seat; and children, who arelarge enough, using safety belts.

Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front. This is because the risk tothe rear-facing child is so great,if the airbag inflates.

{ WARNING

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injuredor killed if the passenger frontalairbag inflates. This is becausethe back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close tothe inflating airbag. A child in aforward-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if thepassenger frontal airbag inflatesand the passenger seat is in aforward position.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the frontoutboard passenger airbag(s), nosystem is fail-safe. No one canguarantee that an airbag will notinflate under some unusualcircumstance, even though theairbag(s) are off.

Secure rear-facing child restraintsin a rear seat, even if theairbag(s) are off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe front outboard passengerseat, always move the seat as farback as it will go. It is better tosecure the child restraint in arear seat.



The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn off the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbagand knee airbag if:. The front outboard passenger

seat is unoccupied.. The system determines that an

infant is present in a childrestraint.

. A front outboard passengertakes his/her weight off of theseat for a period of time.

. There is a critical problem withthe airbag system or thepassenger sensing system.

When the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbagand knee airbag, the off indicatorwill light and stay lit as a reminderthat the airbag(s) are off. SeePassenger Airbag Status Indicatoron page 5‑12.

The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn on the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbagand knee airbag anytime the systemsenses that a person of adult size issitting properly in the front outboardpassenger seat. When thepassenger sensing system hasallowed the airbag(s) to be enabled,the on indicator will light and stay litas a reminder that the airbag(s)are active.

For some children, includingchildren in child restraints, and forvery small adults, the passengersensing system may or may not turnoff the front outboard passengerfrontal airbag and knee airbag,depending upon the person'sseating posture and body build.Everyone in the vehicle whohas outgrown child restraintsshould wear a safety beltproperly — whether or not thereis an airbag for that person.

{ WARNING

If the airbag readiness light evercomes on and stays on, it meansthat something may be wrongwith the airbag system. To helpavoid injury to yourself or others,have the vehicle serviced rightaway. See Airbag ReadinessLight on page 5‑11 for moreinformation, including importantsafety information.

If the On Indicator Is Lit for aChild Restraint

If a child restraint has been installedand the on indicator is lit:

1. Turn the vehicle off.

2. Remove the child restraint fromthe vehicle.

3. Remove any additional itemsfrom the seat such as blankets,cushions, seat covers, seatheaters, or seat massagers.



4. Reinstall the child restraintfollowing the directions providedby the child restraintmanufacturer and refer toSecuring Child Restraints (RearSeat) on page 3‑48 or SecuringChild Restraints (FrontPassenger Seat) on page 3‑50.

5. If, after reinstalling the childrestraint and restarting thevehicle, the on indicator is still lit,turn the vehicle off. Then slightlyrecline the vehicle seatback andadjust the seat cushion,if adjustable, to make sure thatthe vehicle seatback is notpushing the child restraint intothe seat cushion. Also makesure the child restraint is nottrapped under the vehicle headrestraint. If this happens, adjustthe head restraint. See HeadRestraints on page 3‑2.

6. Restart the vehicle.

The passenger sensing system mayor may not turn off the airbag(s) fora child in a child restraint depending

upon the child's seating posture andbody build. It is better to secure thechild restraint in a rear seat.

If the Off Indicator Is Lit for anAdult-Size Occupant

If a person of adult size is sitting inthe front outboard passenger seat,but the off indicator is lit, it could bebecause that person is not sittingproperly in the seat.

Use the following steps to allow thesystem to detect that person andenable the front outboard passengerfrontal airbag and knee airbag:

1. Turn the vehicle off.

2. Remove any additional materialfrom the seat, such as blankets,cushions, seat covers, seatheaters, or seat massagers.

3. Place the seatback in the fullyupright position.

4. Have the person sit upright inthe seat, centered on the seatcushion, with legs comfortablyextended.

5. Restart the vehicle and have theperson remain in this position forone minute after the on indicatoris lit.



Additional Factors AffectingSystem Operation

Safety belts help keep thepassenger in position on the seatduring vehicle maneuvers andbraking, which helps the passengersensing system maintain thepassenger airbag status. See“Safety Belts” and “Child Restraints”in the Index for additionalinformation about the importance ofproper restraint use.

A thick layer of additional material,such as a blanket or cushion,or aftermarket equipment such asseat covers, seat heaters, and seatmassagers can affect how well thepassenger sensing systemoperates. We recommend that younot use seat covers or otheraftermarket equipment except whenapproved by GM for your specificvehicle. See Adding Equipment tothe Airbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 3‑31 for more informationabout modifications that can affecthow the system operates.

A wet seat can affect theperformance of the passengersensing system. Here is how:. The passenger sensing system

may turn off the passengerairbag when liquid is soaked intothe seat. If this happens, the offindicator will be lit, and theairbag readiness light on theinstrument panel will also be lit.

. Liquid pooled on the seat thathas not soaked in may make itmore likely that the passengersensing system will turn on thepassenger airbag while a childrestraint or child occupant is onthe seat. If the passenger airbagis turned on, the on indicator willbe lit.

If the passenger seat gets wet, drythe seat immediately. If the airbagreadiness light is lit, do not install achild restraint or allow anyone tooccupy the seat. See AirbagReadiness Light on page 5‑11 forimportant safety information.

{ WARNING

Stowing of articles under thepassenger seat or between thepassenger seat cushion andseatback may interfere with theproper operation of the passengersensing system.

Servicing theAirbag-Equipped VehicleAirbags affect how the vehicleshould be serviced. There are partsof the airbag system in severalplaces around the vehicle. Yourdealer and the service manual haveinformation about servicing thevehicle and the airbag system. Topurchase a service manual, seeService Publications OrderingInformation on page 13‑12.



{ WARNING

For up to 10 seconds after thevehicle is turned off and thebattery is disconnected, an airbagcan still inflate during improperservice. You can be injured if youare close to an airbag when itinflates. Avoid yellow connectors.They are probably part of theairbag system. Be sure to followproper service procedures, andmake sure the person performingwork for you is qualified to do so.

Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped VehicleAdding accessories that change thevehicle's frame, bumper system,height, front end or side sheetmetal, may keep the airbag systemfrom working properly. Theoperation of the airbag system canalso be affected by changing ormoving any parts of the front seats,safety belts, the airbag sensing and

diagnostic module, steering wheel,instrument panel, roof-rail airbagmodules, ceiling headliner or pillargarnish trim, front sensors, sideimpact sensors, or airbag wiring.

Your dealer and the service manualhave information about the locationof the airbag sensors, sensing anddiagnostic module, and airbagwiring.

In addition, the vehicle has apassenger sensing system for thefront outboard passenger position,which includes sensors that arepart of the passenger seat. Thepassenger sensing system may notoperate properly if the original seattrim is replaced with non-GMcovers, upholstery or trim, or withGM covers, upholstery or trimdesigned for a different vehicle.Any object, such as an aftermarketseat heater or a comfort enhancingpad or device, installed under or ontop of the seat fabric, could alsointerfere with the operation of thepassenger sensing system.

This could either prevent properdeployment of the passengerairbag(s) or prevent the passengersensing system from properlyturning off the passenger airbag(s).See Passenger Sensing System onpage 3‑26.

If the vehicle has rollover roof‐railairbags, see Different Size Tiresand Wheels on page 10‑59 foradditional important information.

If you have to modify your vehiclebecause you have a disability andhave questions about whether themodifications will affect the vehicle'sairbag system, or if you havequestions about whether the airbagsystem will be affected if the vehicleis modified for any other reason, callCustomer Assistance. SeeCustomer Assistance Offices onpage 13‑3.



Airbag System CheckThe airbag system does not needregularly scheduled maintenanceor replacement. Make sure theairbag readiness light is working.See Airbag Readiness Light onpage 5‑11 for more information.

Notice: If an airbag covering isdamaged, opened, or broken, theairbag may not work properly.Do not open or break the airbagcoverings. If there are anyopened or broken airbag covers,have the airbag covering and/orairbag module replaced. For thelocation of the airbags, seeWhere Are the Airbags? onpage 3‑21. See your dealer forservice.

Replacing Airbag SystemParts after a Crash

{ WARNING

A crash can damage theairbag systems in the vehicle.A damaged airbag system maynot work properly and maynot protect you and yourpassenger(s) in a crash, resultingin serious injury or even death.To help make sure the airbagsystems are working properlyafter a crash, have theminspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soonas possible.

If an airbag inflates, you will needto replace airbag system parts.See your dealer for service.

If the airbag readiness light stays onafter the vehicle is started or comeson when you are driving, the airbagsystem may not work properly.Have the vehicle serviced rightaway. See Airbag Readiness Lighton page 5‑11 for more information.



Child Restraints

Older Children

Older children who have outgrownbooster seats should wear thevehicle safety belts.

The manufacturer's instructions thatcome with the booster seat state theweight and height limitations for thatbooster. Use a booster seat with alap-shoulder belt until the childpasses the fit test below:. Sit all the way back on the seat.

Do the knees bend at the seatedge? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

. Buckle the lap-shoulder belt.Does the shoulder belt rest onthe shoulder? If yes, continue.If no, try using the rear safetybelt comfort guide. See “RearSafety Belt Comfort Guides”under Lap-Shoulder Belt onpage 3‑12 for more information.If the shoulder belt still does notrest on the shoulder, then returnto the booster seat.

. Does the lap belt fit low andsnug on the hips, touching thethighs? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

. Can proper safety belt fit bemaintained for the length of thetrip? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

Q: What is the proper way towear safety belts?

A: An older child should wear alap-shoulder belt and get theadditional restraint a shoulderbelt can provide. The shoulderbelt should not cross the face orneck. The lap belt should fitsnugly below the hips, justtouching the top of the thighs.This applies belt force to thechild's pelvic bones in a crash.It should never be worn over theabdomen, which could causesevere or even fatal internalinjuries in a crash.

Also see “Rear Safety Belt ComfortGuides” under Lap-Shoulder Belt onpage 3‑12.



According to accident statistics,children and infants are safer whenproperly restrained in a childrestraint system or infant restraintsystem secured in a rear seatingposition.

In a crash, children who are notbuckled up can strike other peoplewho are buckled up, or can bethrown out of the vehicle. Olderchildren need to use safety beltsproperly.

{ WARNING

Never do this.

Never allow two children to wearthe same safety belt. The safetybelt cannot properly spread theimpact forces. In a crash, the twochildren can be crushed togetherand seriously injured. A safetybelt must be used by only oneperson at a time.

{ WARNING

Never do this.

Never allow a child to wear thesafety belt with the shoulder beltbehind their back. A child can beseriously injured by not wearingthe lap-shoulder belt properly. In acrash, the child would not berestrained by the shoulder belt.The child could move too farforward increasing the chance ofhead and neck injury.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

The child might also slide underthe lap belt. The belt force wouldthen be applied right on theabdomen. That could causeserious or fatal injuries. Theshoulder belt should go over theshoulder and across the chest.



Infants and YoungChildrenEveryone in a vehicle needsprotection! This includes infants andall other children. Neither thedistance traveled nor the age andsize of the traveler changes theneed, for everyone, to use safetyrestraints. In fact, the law in everystate in the United States and inevery Canadian province sayschildren up to some age must berestrained while in a vehicle.

{ WARNING

Children can be seriously injuredor strangled if a shoulder belt iswrapped around their neck andthe safety belt continues totighten. Never leave childrenunattended in a vehicle and neverallow children to play with thesafety belts.

Airbags plus lap‐shoulder belts offerprotection for adults and olderchildren, but not for young childrenand infants. Neither the vehicle'ssafety belt system nor its airbagsystem is designed for them. Everytime infants and young children ridein vehicles, they should have theprotection provided by appropriatechild restraints.

Children who are not restrainedproperly can strike other people,or can be thrown out of the vehicle.

{ WARNING

Never do this.

Never hold an infant or a childwhile riding in a vehicle. Due tocrash forces, an infant or a childwill become so heavy it is notpossible to hold it during a crash.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

For example, in a crash at only40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb)infant will suddenly become a110 kg (240 lb) force on aperson's arms. An infant shouldbe secured in an appropriaterestraint.



{ WARNING

Never do this.

Children who are up against,or very close to, any airbag whenit inflates can be seriously injuredor killed. Never put a rear-facingchild restraint in the right frontseat. Secure a rear-facing childrestraint in a rear seat. It is alsobetter to secure a forward-facingchild restraint in a rear seat. If youmust secure a forward-facingchild restraint in the right frontseat, always move the frontpassenger seat as far back as itwill go.

Q: What are the different types ofadd-on child restraints?

A: Add-on child restraints, whichare purchased by the vehicleowner, are available in four basictypes. Selection of a particularrestraint should take intoconsideration not only the child'sweight, height, and age but alsowhether or not the restraint willbe compatible with the motorvehicle in which it will be used.

For most basic types of childrestraints, there are manydifferent models available. Whenpurchasing a child restraint, be

sure it is designed to be used ina motor vehicle. If it is, therestraint will have a label sayingthat it meets federal motorvehicle safety standards.

The restraint manufacturer'sinstructions that come with therestraint state the weight andheight limitations for a particularchild restraint. In addition, thereare many kinds of restraintsavailable for children withspecial needs.

{ WARNING

To reduce the risk of neck andhead injury during a crash, infantsneed complete support. This isbecause an infant's neck is notfully developed and its headweighs so much compared withthe rest of its body. In a crash, aninfant in a rear-facing childrestraint settles into the restraint,so the crash forces can be

(Continued)



WARNING (Continued)

distributed across the strongestpart of an infant's body, the backand shoulders. Infants shouldalways be secured in rear-facingchild restraints.

{ WARNING

A young child's hip bones are stillso small that the vehicle's regularsafety belt may not remain low onthe hip bones, as it should.Instead, it may settle up aroundthe child's abdomen. In a crash,the belt would apply force on abody area that is unprotected byany bony structure. This alonecould cause serious or fatalinjuries. To reduce the risk ofserious or fatal injuries during acrash, young children shouldalways be secured in appropriatechild restraints.

Child Restraint Systems

(A) Rear‐Facing Infant Seat

A rear-facing infant seat (A)provides restraint with the seatingsurface against the back of theinfant.

The harness system holds the infantin place and, in a crash, acts tokeep the infant positioned in therestraint.

(B) Forward-Facing Child Seat

A forward-facing child seat (B)provides restraint for the child'sbody with the harness.



(C) Booster Seats

A booster seat (C) is a child restraintdesigned to improve the fit of thevehicle's safety belt system.A booster seat can also help a childto see out the window.

Securing an Add-On ChildRestraint in the Vehicle

{ WARNING

A child can be seriously injured orkilled in a crash if the childrestraint is not properly secured inthe vehicle. Secure the childrestraint properly in the vehicleusing the vehicle safety belt orLATCH system, following theinstructions that came with thatchild restraint and the instructionsin this manual.

To help reduce the chance of injury,the child restraint must be securedin the vehicle. Child restraintsystems must be secured in vehicleseats by lap belts or the lap beltportion of a lap-shoulder belt, or bythe LATCH system. See LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH System) on page 3‑41 formore information.Children can be endangered in acrash if the child restraint is notproperly secured in the vehicle.



When securing an add-on childrestraint, refer to the instructionsthat come with the restraint whichmay be on the restraint itself or in abooklet, or both, and to this manual.The child restraint instructions areimportant, so if they are notavailable, obtain a replacementcopy from the manufacturer.

Keep in mind that an unsecuredchild restraint can move around in acollision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure toproperly secure any child restraint inthe vehicle — even when no childis in it.

In some areas, Certified ChildPassenger Safety Technicians(CPSTs) are available to inspectand demonstrate how to correctlyuse and install child restraints.In the U.S., refer to theNational Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration (NHTSA) website tolocate the nearest child safety seatinspection station. For CPSTavailability in Canada, check withTransport Canada or the ProvincialMinistry of Transportation office.

Securing the Child within theChild Restraint

{ WARNING

A child can be seriously injured orkilled in a crash if the child is notproperly secured in the childrestraint. Secure the childproperly following the instructionsthat came with that child restraint.



Where to Put theRestraintAccording to accident statistics,children and infants are safer whenproperly restrained in a childrestraint system or infant restraintsystem secured in a rear seatingposition.

We recommend that children andchild restraints be secured in a rearseat, including: an infant or a childriding in a rear-facing child restraint;a child riding in a forward-facingchild seat; an older child riding in abooster seat; and children, who arelarge enough, using safety belts.

A label on the sun visor says,“Never put a rear-facing childrestraint in the front.” This isbecause the risk to the rear-facingchild is so great if the airbagdeploys.

{ WARNING

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injuredor killed if the right frontpassenger airbag inflates. This isbecause the back of therear-facing child restraint wouldbe very close to the inflatingairbag. A child in a forward-facingchild restraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the right frontpassenger airbag inflates and thepassenger seat is in a forwardposition.

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the rightfront passenger frontal airbag, nosystem is fail-safe. No one canguarantee that an airbag will notdeploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though it isturned off.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

Secure rear-facing child restraintsin a rear seat, even if the airbagis off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe right front seat, always movethe front passenger seat as farback as it will go. It is better tosecure the child restraint in arear seat.

See Passenger Sensing Systemon page 3‑26 for additionalinformation.

When securing a child restraint in arear seating position, study theinstructions that came with the childrestraint to make sure it iscompatible with this vehicle.

Child restraints and booster seatsvary considerably in size, and somemay fit in certain seating positionsbetter than others. Always makesure the child restraint is properlysecured.



Depending on where you place thechild restraint and the size of thechild restraint you may not be ableto access adjacent safety beltassemblies or LATCH anchors foradditional passengers or childrestraints. Adjacent seatingpositions should not be used if thechild restraint prevents access to orinterferes with the routing of thesafety belt.

Wherever a child restraint isinstalled, be sure to secure the childrestraint properly.

Keep in mind that an unsecuredchild restraint can move around in acollision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure toproperly secure any child restraint inthe vehicle — even when no child isin it.

Lower Anchors andTethers for Children(LATCH System)The LATCH system holds a childrestraint during driving or in a crash.This system is designed to makeinstallation of a child restraint easier.The LATCH system uses anchors inthe vehicle and attachments on thechild restraint that are made for usewith the LATCH system.

Make sure that a LATCH-compatiblechild restraint is properly installedusing the anchors, or use thevehicle's safety belts to secure therestraint, following the instructionsthat came with that restraint, andalso the instructions in this manual.

When installing a child restraint witha top tether, you must also useeither the lower anchors or thesafety belts to properly secure thechild restraint. A child restraint mustnever be installed using only the toptether anchor.

In order to use the LATCH system inthe vehicle, you need a childrestraint that has LATCHattachments. The child restraintmanufacturer will provide you withinstructions on how to use the childrestraint and its attachments. Thefollowing explains how to attach achild restraint with theseattachments in the vehicle.

Not all vehicle seating positions orchild restraints have lower anchorsand attachments or top tetheranchors and attachments.



Lower Anchors

Lower anchors (A) are metal barsbuilt into the vehicle. There aretwo lower anchors for eachLATCH seating position that willaccommodate a child restraint withlower attachments (B).

Top Tether Anchor

A top tether (A, C) anchors the topof the child restraint to the vehicle.A top tether anchor is built into thevehicle. The top tetherattachment (B) on the child restraintconnects to the top tether anchor inthe vehicle in order to reduce theforward movement and rotation ofthe child restraint during driving orin a crash.

The child restraint may have asingle tether (A) or a dual tether (C).Either will have a singleattachment (B) to secure thetop tether to the anchor.

Some child restraints that have atop tether are designed for use withor without the top tether beingattached. Others require the toptether always to be attached. InCanada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached. Be sure to read and followthe instructions for the childrestraint.



Lower Anchor and Top TetherAnchor Locations

Rear Seat

I (Top Tether Anchor): Seatingpositions with top tether anchors.

H (Lower Anchor): Seatingpositions with two lower anchors.

To assist in locating the loweranchors, each rear anchor positionhas a label, near the creasebetween the seatback and the seatcushion.

To assist in locating the top tetheranchors, the top tether anchorsymbol is on the cover.

The top tether anchors are underthe covers, behind the rear seat, onthe filler panel. Be sure to use ananchor on the same side of thevehicle as the seating positionwhere the child restraint will beplaced.

Do not secure a child restraint in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be attached, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top tethermust be attached.



According to accident statistics,children and infants are safer whenproperly restrained in a childrestraint system or infant restraintsystem secured in a rear seatingposition. See Where to Put theRestraint on page 3‑40 foradditional information.

Securing a Child RestraintDesigned for the LATCHSystem

{ WARNING

If a LATCH-type child restraint isnot attached to anchors, the childrestraint will not be able to protectthe child correctly. In a crash, thechild could be seriously injured orkilled. Install a LATCH-type childrestraint properly using theanchors, or use the vehicle safetybelts to secure the restraint,following the instructions thatcame with the child restraint andthe instructions in this manual.

{ WARNING

Do not attach more than one childrestraint to a single anchor.Attaching more than one childrestraint to a single anchor couldcause the anchor or attachmentto come loose or even breakduring a crash. A child or otherscould be injured. To reduce therisk of serious or fatal injuriesduring a crash, attach only onechild restraint per anchor.

{ WARNING

Children can be seriously injuredor strangled if a shoulder belt iswrapped around their neck andthe safety belt continues totighten. Buckle any unused safetybelts behind the child restraint sochildren cannot reach them. Pullthe shoulder belt all the way out

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

of the retractor to set the lock,if the vehicle has one, after thechild restraint has been installed.

Notice: Do not let the LATCHattachments rub against thevehicle’s safety belts. This maydamage these parts. If necessary,move buckled safety belts toavoid rubbing the LATCHattachments.

Do not fold the empty rear seatwith a safety belt buckled. Thiscould damage the safety belt orthe seat. Unbuckle and return thesafety belt to its stowed position,before folding the seat.

If you need to secure more than onechild restraint in the rear seat, seeWhere to Put the Restraint onpage 3‑40 for additional information.

Make sure to attach the childrestraint at the proper anchorlocation.



This system is designed to makeinstallation of child restraints easier.When using lower anchors, do notuse the vehicle's safety belts.Instead use the vehicle's anchorsand child restraint attachments tosecure the restraints. Somerestraints also use another vehicleanchor to secure a top tether.

1. Attach and tighten the lowerattachments to the loweranchors. If the child restraintdoes not have lowerattachments or the desiredseating position does not havelower anchors, secure the childrestraint with the top tether andthe safety belts. Refer to thechild restraint manufacturerinstructions and the instructionsin this manual.

1.1. Find the lower anchors forthe desired rear outboardseating position.

1.2. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

For outboard rear seatingpositions, if the headrestraint interferes with theproper installation of thechild restraint, the headrestraint may be removed.See “Head RestraintRemoval andReinstallation” at the end ofthis section.

1.3. Attach and tighten the lowerattachments on the childrestraint to the loweranchors.

2. If the child restraint manufacturerrecommends that the top tetherbe attached, attach and tightenthe top tether to the top tetheranchor. Refer to the childrestraint instructions and thefollowing steps:

2.1. Find the top tether anchor.

Open the cover to exposethe anchor.

2.2. Route, attach, and tightenthe top tether according tothe child restraintinstructions and thefollowing instructions:

. If you are using a singletether in a rear outboardseating position with anadjustable head restraint,route the single tetherunder the head restraint.See Head Restraints onpage 3‑2 for additionalinformation.



. If you are using a dualtether in a rear outboardseating position with anadjustable head restraint,route the dual tether aroundthe head restraint. SeeHead Restraints onpage 3‑2 for additionalinformation.

. If you are using a singletether in the center seatingposition, or the rearoutboard head restraint hasbeen removed, route thesingle tether over theseatback.

. If you are using a dualtether in the center seatingposition, or the rearoutboard head restraint hasbeen removed, route thedual tether over theseatback.

3. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. To check,grasp the child restraint at theLATCH path and attempt tomove it side‐to‐side and back‐and‐forth. There should be nomore than 2.5 cm (1 in) ofmovement, for properinstallation.



Head Restraint Removal andReinstallation

The rear outboard head restraintscan be removed if they interfere withthe proper installation of the childrestraint.

To remove the head restraint:

1. Partially fold the seatbackforward. See Rear Seats onpage 3‑8 for additionalinformation.

2. Press both buttons on the headrestraint posts at the same time,and pull up on the headrestraint.

3. Store the head restraint in thetrunk of the vehicle.

4. When the child restraint isremoved, reinstall the headrestraint before the seatingposition is used.

{ WARNING

With head restraints that are notinstalled and adjusted properly,there is a greater chance thatoccupants will suffer a neck/spinal injury in a crash. Do notdrive until the head restraints forall occupants are installed andadjusted properly.



To reinstall the head restraint:

1. Insert the head restraint postsinto the holes in the top of theseatback. The notches (A) onthe posts must face the driverside of the vehicle.

2. Push the head restraint down.

If necessary, press the heightadjustment release button tofurther lower the head restraint.See Head Restraints onpage 3‑2.

3. Try to move the head restraint tomake sure that it is locked inplace.

Replacing LATCH SystemParts After a Crash

{ WARNING

A crash can damage the LATCHsystem in the vehicle. A damagedLATCH system may not properlysecure the child restraint,resulting in serious injury or evendeath in a crash. To help makesure the LATCH system isworking properly after a crash,see your dealer to have thesystem inspected and anynecessary replacements made assoon as possible.

If the vehicle has the LATCH systemand it was being used during acrash, new LATCH system partsmay be needed.

New parts and repairs may benecessary even if the LATCHsystem was not being used at thetime of the crash.

Securing Child Restraints(Rear Seat)When securing a child restraint in arear seating position, study theinstructions that came with the childrestraint to make sure it iscompatible with this vehicle.

If the child restraint has the LATCHsystem, see Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 3‑41 for how andwhere to install the child restraintusing LATCH. If a child restraint issecured in the vehicle using asafety belt and it uses a top tether,see Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) onpage 3‑41 for top tether anchorlocations.

Do not secure a child seat in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be anchored, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top strapmust be anchored.



In Canada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached.

If the child restraint does not havethe LATCH system, you will beusing the safety belt to secure thechild restraint in this position. Besure to follow the instructions thatcame with the child restraint. Securethe child in the child restraint whenand as the instructions say.

If more than one child restraintneeds to be installed in the rearseat, be sure to read Where to Putthe Restraint on page 3‑40.

1. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

If the head restraint interfereswith the proper installation of thechild restraint, the head restraintmay be removed. See “HeadRestraint Removal andReinstallation” under LowerAnchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) onpage 3‑41.

2. Pick up the latch plate, and runthe lap and shoulder portions ofthe vehicle's safety belt throughor around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will showyou how.

3. Push the latch plate into thebuckle until it clicks. If the latchplate will not go fully into thebuckle, check if the correctbuckle is being used.

Position the release button onthe buckle so that the safety beltcould be quickly unbuckled ifnecessary.

4. Pull the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set thelock. When the retractor lock isset, the belt can be tightened butnot pulled out of the retractor.



5. To tighten the belt, push downon the child restraint, pull theshoulder portion of the belt totighten the lap portion of the belt,and feed the shoulder belt backinto the retractor. When installinga forward-facing child restraint, itmay be helpful to use your kneeto push down on the childrestraint as you tighten the belt.

Try to pull the belt out of theretractor to make sure theretractor is locked. If theretractor is not locked, repeatSteps 4 and 5.

6. If the child restraint has a toptether, follow the child restraintmanufacturer's instructionsregarding the use of the toptether. See Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 3‑41 for moreinformation.

7. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. To check,grasp the child restraint at thesafety belt path and attempt tomove it side to side and backand forth. When the childrestraint is properly installed,there should be no more than2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.

To remove the child restraint,unbuckle the vehicle safety belt andlet it return to the stowed position.If the top tether is attached to atop tether anchor, disconnect it.If the head restraint was removed,reinstall it before the seatingposition is used.

See “Head Restraint Removal andReinstallation” under Lower Anchorsand Tethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 3‑41 for additionalinformation on installing the headrestraint properly.

Securing Child Restraints(Front Passenger Seat)This vehicle has airbags. A rearseat is a safer place to secure aforward-facing child restraint. SeeWhere to Put the Restraint onpage 3‑40.

In addition, the vehicle has apassenger sensing system which isdesigned to turn off the right frontpassenger frontal airbag andpassenger knee airbag undercertain conditions. See PassengerSensing System on page 3‑26 andPassenger Airbag Status Indicatoron page 5‑12 for more information,including important safetyinformation.



A label on the sun visor says,“Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front.” This is because the risk tothe rear-facing child is so great,if the airbag deploys.

{ WARNING

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injuredor killed if the right frontpassenger airbag inflates.This is because the back of therear-facing child restraint wouldbe very close to the inflatingairbag. A child in a forward-facingchild restraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the right frontpassenger airbag inflates andthe passenger seat is in aforward position.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the rightfront passenger frontal airbag, nosystem is fail-safe. No one canguarantee that an airbag will notdeploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though it isturned off.

Secure rear-facing child restraintsin a rear seat, even if the airbagis off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe right front seat, always movethe front passenger seat as farback as it will go. It is better tosecure the child restraint in arear seat.

See Passenger Sensing Systemon page 3‑26 for additionalinformation.

If the child restraint has the LATCHsystem, see Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 3‑41 for how andwhere to install the child restraintusing LATCH. If a child restraint issecured using a safety belt and ituses a top tether, see LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH System) on page 3‑41 fortop tether anchor locations.

Do not secure a child seat in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be anchored, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top strapmust be anchored.

In Canada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached.



You will be using the lap-shoulderbelt to secure the child restraint inthis position. Follow the instructionsthat came with the child restraint.

1. Move the seat as far back as itwill go before securing theforward-facing child restraint.

When the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the rightfront passenger frontal airbagand passenger knee airbag, theoff indicator on the passengerairbag status indicator shouldlight and stay lit when you startthe vehicle. See PassengerAirbag Status Indicator onpage 5‑12.

2. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

3. Pick up the latch plate, and runthe lap and shoulder portions ofthe vehicle's safety belt throughor around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will showyou how.

4. Push the latch plate into thebuckle until it clicks.

Position the release button onthe buckle, so that the safetybelt could be quickly unbuckledif necessary.

5. Pull the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set thelock. When the retractor lock isset, the belt can be tightened butnot pulled out of the retractor.



6. To tighten the belt, push downon the child restraint, pull theshoulder portion of the belt totighten the lap portion of the belt,and feed the shoulder belt backinto the retractor. When installinga forward-facing child restraint, itmay be helpful to use your kneeto push down on the childrestraint as you tighten the belt.

Try to pull the belt out of theretractor to make sure theretractor is locked. If theretractor is not locked, repeatSteps 5 and 6.

7. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. To check,grasp the child restraint at thesafety belt path and attempt tomove it side‐to‐side and back‐and‐forth. When the childrestraint is properly installed,there should be no more than2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.

If the airbags are off, the offindicator in the passenger airbagstatus indicator will come on andstay on when the vehicle is started.

If a child restraint has been installedand the on indicator is lit, see “If theOn Indicator Is Lit for a ChildRestraint” under Passenger SensingSystem on page 3‑26 for moreinformation.

To remove the child restraint,unbuckle the vehicle safety belt andlet it return to the stowed position.



2 NOTES


Storage 4-1

Storage

Storage CompartmentsInstrument Panel Storage . . . . . 4-1Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Center Console Storage . . . . . . 4-2

Additional Storage FeaturesCargo Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

StorageCompartments

Instrument Panel Storage

There may be a storagecompartment on the instrumentpanel. Pull the handle to open.

Glove BoxOpen the glove box by lifting up onthe lever.

CupholdersCupholders are in the centerconsole.

Cupholders may be located in thesecond row seat armrest. Toaccess, pull the armrest down.


4-2 Storage

Center Console Storage

The center console storage has astorage area under the armrest.Pull up on the latch (A) to access.

Pull up on the latch (A) and slide thecenter console armrest to adjust theposition. Return the armrest to therear position to access thestorage area.

There may be an auxiliary jackoutlet and a USB port located in thecenter console.

See Auxiliary Devices on page 7‑20.

Additional StorageFeatures

Cargo Tie-Downs

On the driver side in the rearcompartment is a retainer to hanglight items on.


Instruments and Controls 5-1

Instruments andControls

ControlsSteering Wheel Adjustment . . . 5-2Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . 5-2Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . 5-3Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5Cigarette Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6Ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7

Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicatorsWarning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7

Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Fuel Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Engine Coolant TemperatureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10

Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . 5-10

Airbag Readiness Light . . . . . . 5-11Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12

Charging System Light . . . . . . 5-13MalfunctionIndicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13

Service Vehicle SoonLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16

Brake System WarningLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16

Antilock Brake System (ABS)Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17

Up-Shift Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17Power Steering WarningLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17

Traction Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18StabiliTrak® OFF Light . . . . . . . 5-18Traction Control System(TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light . . . . 5-18

Tire Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-19Engine Oil Pressure Light . . . . 5-20Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . 5-20Security Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21Reduced Engine PowerLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21

High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . 5-21Daytime Running Lamps(DRL) Indicator Light . . . . . . . 5-22

Front Fog Lamp Light . . . . . . . . 5-22

Lamps On Reminder . . . . . . . . . 5-22Cruise Control Light . . . . . . . . . 5-23Door Ajar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23

Information DisplaysDriver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23

Vehicle MessagesVehicle Messages (CanadaBase Level) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28

Vehicle Messages (CanadaUplevel and UnitedStates) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28

Battery Voltage and ChargingMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28

Brake System Messages . . . . 5-29Compass Messages . . . . . . . . . 5-29Cruise Control Messages . . . . 5-29Door Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . 5-29Engine Cooling SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30

Engine Oil Messages . . . . . . . . 5-30Engine Power Messages . . . . 5-30Fuel System Messages . . . . . . 5-31Key and Lock Messages . . . . . 5-31Lamp Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31Object Detection SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32


5-2 Instruments and Controls

Ride Control SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32

Airbag System Messages . . . . 5-32Security Messages . . . . . . . . . . 5-32Service Vehicle Messages . . . 5-32Starting the VehicleMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33

Tire Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33Transmission Messages . . . . . 5-33Vehicle ReminderMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34

Vehicle PersonalizationVehicle Personalization . . . . . . 5-34

Controls

Steering WheelAdjustment

To adjust the steering wheel:

1. Pull the lever (A) down.

2. Move the steering wheel upor down.

3. Pull or push the steering wheelcloser or away from you.

4. Push the lever (A) up to lock thesteering wheel in place.

Do not adjust the steering wheelwhile driving.


For vehicles with audio steeringwheel controls, some audio controlscan be adjusted at the steeringwheel.



b / g (Push to Talk): For vehicleswith a Bluetooth, OnStar,or navigation system, press tointeract with those systems. SeeBluetooth (Overview) on page 7‑23or Bluetooth (Infotainment Controls)on page 7‑25 or Bluetooth (VoiceRecognition) on page 7‑29, theOnStar Owner's Guide, or theseparate navigation manual formore information.

$ /i (Mute/End Call): Press tosilence the vehicle speakers only.Press again to turn the sound on.For vehicles with OnStar orBluetooth systems, press to rejectan incoming call, or end acurrent call.

_ SRC ^ (Rotary Control):Turn to select an audio source.

Turn _ or ^ to select the next orprevious favorite radio station, CD,or MP3 track.

+ x − (Volume): Press + toincrease the volume. Press − todecrease the volume.

Horn

Pressa on the steering wheelpad to sound the horn.

Windshield Wiper/Washer

The windshield wiper lever is onthe side of the steering column.With the ignition in ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN, movethe windshield wiper lever to selectthe wiper speed.

2: Use for fast wipes.

1: Use for slow wipes.

3 (Adjustable Interval Wipes):Turn the band up for more frequentwipes or down for less frequentwipes.

9 (Off): Use to turn the windshieldwipers off.

3 (Mist): For a single wipe,briefly move the wiper lever down.For several wipes, hold the wiperlever down.

Clear ice and snow from the wiperblades before using them. If theyare frozen to the windshield,carefully loosen or thaw them.Damaged wiper blades should bereplaced. See Wiper BladeReplacement on page 10‑28.

Heavy snow or ice can overload thewipers. A circuit breaker stops themuntil the motor cools.



Wipe Parking

If the ignition is turned to LOCK/OFF while the wipers are on 1, 2,or3, they will immediately stop.

If the windshield wiper lever is thenmoved to9 before the driver dooris opened, or within 10 minutes, thewipers will restart and move to thebase of the windshield.

If the ignition is turned to LOCK/OFF during a windshield wash, thewipers will stop when they reach thebase of the windshield.

Windshield Washer

Pull the windshield wiper levertoward you to spray windshieldwasher fluid and activate the wipers.

The wipers will continue until thelever is released or the maximumwash time is reached.

When the windshield wiper lever isreleased, additional wipes mayoccur depending on how long thewindshield washer had beenactivated. See Washer Fluid onpage 10‑22 for information on fillingthe windshield washer fluidreservoir.

{ WARNING

In freezing weather, do not usethe washer until the windshield iswarmed. Otherwise the washerfluid can form ice on thewindshield, blocking your vision.

CompassThe vehicle may have a compassdisplay in the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). The compass receivesits heading and other informationfrom the Global PositioningSystem (GPS) antenna, StabiliTrak,and vehicle speed information.

Avoid covering the GPS antenna,located on the roof, for long periodsof time with objects that mayinterfere with the antenna's ability toreceive a satellite signal. Thecompass system is designed tooperate for a certain number ofmiles or degrees of turn beforeneeding a signal from the GPSsatellites. When the compassdisplay shows CAL, drive thevehicle for a short distance in anopen area where it can receive aGPS signal. The compass systemwill automatically determine whenthe GPS signal is restored andprovide a heading again.



See Compass Messages onpage 5‑29 for more information onthe messages that may bedisplayed for the compass.

ClockThe infotainment system controlsare used to access the time anddate settings through the menusystem. The clock menu can beonly be used with the radio on whilein ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY.See Operation on page 7‑6 forinformation about how to use themenu system. For vehicles with anavigation system, see the separatenavigation manual.

Setting the Time


2. Select Set Time.

3. Turn the MENU or MENU/SELknob to adjust the highlightednumber.

4. Press the MENU or MENU/SELknob to select the next number.

5. To save the time and return tothe Time Settings menu, pressthe BACK button at any time orpress the MENU or MENU/SELknob after adjusting the minutes.

Setting the 12/24 Hour Format


2. Highlight 12/24 Hour Format.

3. Press the MENU or MENU/SELknob to select the 12 hour or24 hour display format.

Power OutletsThe accessory power outlets can beused to plug in electrical equipment,such as a cell phone or MP3 player.

There is one accessory power outletlocated on the center floor consoleand one on the rear of the centerfloor console. These outlets arepowered when the key is in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY, or untilthe driver door is opened within10 minutes of turning off the vehicle.See Retained Accessory Power(RAP) on page 9‑23.



Remove the cover to access andreplace when not in use.

Notice: Leaving electricalequipment plugged in for anextended period of time whilethe vehicle is off will drain thebattery. Always unplug electricalequipment when not in use anddo not plug in equipment thatexceeds the maximum 20 ampererating.

Certain electrical accessories maynot be compatible with theaccessory power outlet and couldoverload vehicle or adapter fuses.If a problem is experienced, seeyour dealer.

When adding electrical equipment,be sure to follow the installationinstructions included with theequipment. See Add-On ElectricalEquipment on page 9‑55.

Notice: Hanging heavyequipment from the power outletcan cause damage not coveredby the vehicle warranty. Thepower outlets are designed foraccessory power plugs only, suchas cell phone charge cords.

Cigarette LighterFor vehicles with a cigarette lighter,it is located on the front floorconsole.

To activate the cigarette lighter,push it into the heating element andlet go. When the lighter is ready itwill pop back out.

Notice: Holding a cigarette lighterin while it is heating does not letthe lighter back away from theheating element when it is hot.Damage from overheating canoccur to the lighter or heatingelement, or a fuse could beblown. Do not hold a cigarettelighter in while it is heating.



AshtraysFor vehicles with a removableashtray, the ashtray can be placedinto the front console cupholders.

To open the ashtray, lift the lid of theashtray. After using, close the lid.

To empty the ashtray for cleaning,slightly turn the upper part of theashtray counterclockwise andremove it.

Notice: If papers, pins, or otherflammable items are put in theashtray, hot cigarettes or othersmoking materials could ignitethem and possibly damage thevehicle. Never put flammableitems in the ashtray.

Warning Lights,Gauges, andIndicatorsWarning lights and gauges cansignal that something is wrongbefore it becomes serious enoughto cause an expensive repair orreplacement. Paying attention to thewarning lights and gauges couldprevent injury.

Warning lights come on when therecould be a problem with a vehiclefunction. Some warning lights comeon briefly when the engine is startedto indicate they are working.

Gauges can indicate when therecould be a problem with a vehiclefunction. Often gauges and warninglights work together to indicate aproblem with the vehicle.

When one of the warning lightscomes on and stays on whiledriving, or when one of the gaugesshows there may be a problem,check the section that explains whatto do. Follow this manual's advice.Waiting to do repairs can be costlyand even dangerous.



Instrument Cluster

English Automatic Transmission Cluster Shown, Metric Similar



SpeedometerThe speedometer shows thevehicle's speed in either kilometersper hour (km/h) or miles perhour (mph).

OdometerThe odometer shows how far thevehicle has been driven, in eitherkilometers or miles.

This vehicle has a tamper‐resistantodometer. The digital odometer willread 999,999 if it is turned back.

If the vehicle needs a new odometerinstalled, it must be set to themileage total of the old odometer.If that is not possible, then it mustbe set at zero and a label must beput on the driver door to show theold mileage reading when the newodometer was installed.

Trip OdometerThe trip odometer can show how farthe vehicle has been driven sincethe trip odometer was last reset.

The trip odometer is accessed andreset through the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). See DriverInformation Center (DIC) onpage 5‑23 for more information.

TachometerThe tachometer displays the enginespeed in revolutions perminute (rpm).

Notice: If the engine is operatedwith the tachometer in the shadedwarning area, the vehicle couldbe damaged, and the damageswould not be covered by thevehicle warranty. Do not operatethe engine with the tachometer inthe shaded warning area.

Fuel Gauge

When the ignition is on, the fuelgauge indicates about how muchfuel is left in the tank.

An arrow on the fuel gaugeindicates the side of the vehicle thefuel door is on.

A FUEL LEVEL LOW message mayappear in the Driver InformationCenter (DIC) and a single chimesounds. See Fuel SystemMessages on page 5‑31 formore information.



Here are four things that someowners ask about. None of theseshow a problem with the fuel gauge:. At the service station, the fuel

pump shuts off before the gaugereads full.

. It takes a little more or less fuelto fill up than the gaugeindicated. For example, thegauge may have indicated thetank was half full, but it actuallytook a little more or less thanhalf the tank's capacity to fillthe tank.

. The gauge moves a little whileturning a corner or speeding up.

. The gauge takes a few secondsto stabilize after the ignition isturned on, and will go back toempty when the ignition isturned off.

Engine CoolantTemperature Gauge

This gauge shows the enginecoolant temperature.

If the indicator needle moves tothe hot side of the gauge towardthe H or shaded area, the engine istoo hot.

If the vehicle has been operatedunder normal driving conditions, pulloff the road, stop the vehicle, andturn off the engine as soon aspossible.

Safety Belt Reminders

Driver Safety Belt ReminderLight

There is a driver safety beltreminder light on the instrumentpanel cluster.

When the vehicle is started, thislight flashes and a chime may comeon to remind the driver to fastentheir safety belt. Then the light stayson solid until the belt is buckled.

This cycle may continue severaltimes if the driver remains orbecomes unbuckled while thevehicle is moving.

If the driver safety belt is buckled,neither the light nor the chimecomes on.



Passenger Safety BeltReminder Light

When the vehicle is started, thislight flashes and a chime may comeon to remind front passengers tofasten their safety belt. Then thelight stays on solid until the belt isbuckled.

This cycle continues several times ifthe front passenger remains orbecomes unbuckled while thevehicle is moving.

If the front passenger safety belt isbuckled, neither the chime nor thelight comes on.

The front passenger safety beltreminder light and chime may turnon if an object is put on the seatsuch as a briefcase, handbag,grocery bag, laptop, or otherelectronic device. To turn off thereminder light and/or chime, removethe object from the seat or bucklethe safety belt.

Airbag Readiness LightThis light shows if there is anelectrical problem. The systemcheck includes the airbag sensor(s),passenger sensing system, thepretensioners, the airbag modules,the wiring, and the crash sensingand diagnostic module. For moreinformation on the airbag system,see Airbag System on page 3‑19.

The airbag readiness light comes onand stays on for several secondswhen the vehicle is started. Thenthe light goes out.

{ WARNING

If the airbag readiness light stayson after the vehicle is started orcomes on while driving, it meansthe airbag system might not beworking properly. The airbags inthe vehicle might not inflate in acrash, or they could even inflatewithout a crash. To help avoidinjury, have the vehicle servicedright away.



Passenger Airbag StatusIndicatorThe vehicle has a passengersensing system. See PassengerSensing System on page 3‑26 forimportant safety information. Theinstrument panel has a passengerairbag status indicator.

United States

Canada

When the vehicle is started, thepassenger airbag status indicatorwill light ON and OFF, or the symbolfor on and off, for several seconds

as a system check. If you useremote start, if equipped, to start thevehicle, you may not see the systemcheck. Then, after several seconds,the status indicator will light eitherON or OFF, or the on or off symbolto let you know the status of thefront outboard passenger frontalairbag and knee airbag.

If the word ON or the on symbol islit on the passenger airbag statusindicator, it means that the frontoutboard passenger frontal airbagand knee airbag are allowed toinflate.

If the word OFF or the off symbol islit on the passenger airbag statusindicator, it means that thepassenger sensing system hasturned off the front outboardpassenger frontal airbag andpassenger knee airbag.

If, after several seconds, both statusindicator lights remain on, or if thereare no lights at all, there may be aproblem with the lights or thepassenger sensing system. Seeyour dealer for service.

{ WARNING

If the airbag readiness light evercomes on and stays on, it meansthat something may be wrongwith the airbag system. To helpavoid injury to yourself or others,have the vehicle serviced rightaway. See Airbag ReadinessLight on page 5‑11 for moreinformation, including importantsafety information.



Charging System Light

The charging system light comes onbriefly when the ignition is turnedon, but the engine is not running, asa check to show the light is working.The light turns off when the engineis started. If it does not, have thevehicle serviced by your dealer.

If the light stays on, or comes onwhile driving, there could be aproblem with the electrical chargingsystem. Have it checked by yourdealer. Driving while this light is oncould drain the battery.

If a short distance must be drivenwith the light on, be sure to turn offall accessories, such as the radioand air conditioner.

MalfunctionIndicator LampA computer system called OBD II(On-Board Diagnostics-SecondGeneration) monitors the operationof the vehicle to ensure emissionsare at acceptable levels, to producea cleaner environment. This lightcomes on when the vehicle isplaced in ON/RUN for key access orService Only Mode for keylessaccess, as a check to show it isworking. If it does not, have thevehicle serviced by your dealer.See Ignition Positions (Key Access)on page 9‑15 or Ignition Positions(Keyless Access) on page 9‑18 formore information.

This light should come on when theignition is on, but the engine is notrunning, as a check to show it isworking. If it does not, have thevehicle serviced by your dealer.

If the malfunction indicator lampcomes on and stays on while theengine is running, this indicates thatthere is an OBD II problem andservice is required.



Malfunctions often are indicated bythe system before any problem isapparent. Being aware of the lightcan prevent more serious damageto the vehicle. This system assiststhe dealer technician in correctlydiagnosing any malfunction.

Notice: If the vehicle iscontinually driven with this lighton, the emission controls mightnot work as well, the vehicle fueleconomy might not be as good,and the engine might not run assmoothly. This could lead tocostly repairs that might not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Notice: Modifications made to theengine, transmission, exhaust,intake, or fuel system of thevehicle or the replacement of theoriginal tires with other thanthose of the same TirePerformance Criteria (TPC) canaffect the vehicle's emissioncontrols and can cause thislight to come on.

Modifications to these systemscould lead to costly repairs notcovered by the vehicle warranty.This could also result in a failureto pass a required EmissionInspection/Maintenance test. SeeAccessories and Modifications onpage 10‑3.

This light comes on during amalfunction in one of two ways:

Light Flashing: A misfire conditionhas been detected. A misfireincreases vehicle emissions andcould damage the emission controlsystem on the vehicle. Diagnosisand service might be required.

To prevent more serious damage tothe vehicle:. Reduce vehicle speed.. Avoid hard accelerations.. Avoid steep uphill grades.. If towing a trailer, reduce the

amount of cargo being hauled assoon as it is possible.

If the light continues to flash, whenit is safe to do so, stop the vehicle.Find a safe place to park. Turn thevehicle off, wait at least 10 seconds,and restart the engine. If the light isstill flashing, follow the previoussteps and see your dealer forservice as soon as possible.

Light On Steady: An emissioncontrol system malfunction hasbeen detected on the vehicle.Diagnosis and service might berequired.

The following may correct anemissions system malfunction:. Check that the fuel cap is fully

installed. See Filling the Tank onpage 9‑46. The diagnosticsystem can determine if the fuelcap has been left off orimproperly installed. A loose ormissing fuel cap allows fuel toevaporate into the atmosphere.A few driving trips with the capproperly installed should turnthe light off.



. Check that good quality fuel isused. Poor fuel quality causesthe engine not to run asefficiently as designed and maycause stalling after start-up,stalling when the vehicle ischanged into gear, misfiring,hesitation on acceleration,or stumbling on acceleration.These conditions might go awayonce the engine is warmed up.

If one or more of these conditionsoccurs, change the fuel brand used.It will require at least one full tank ofthe proper fuel to turn the light off.

See Recommended Fuel onpage 9‑44.

If none of the above have made thelight turn off, your dealer can checkthe vehicle. The dealer has theproper test equipment anddiagnostic tools to fix anymechanical or electrical problemsthat might have developed.

Emissions Inspection andMaintenance Programs

Some local governments may haveprograms to inspect the on-vehicleemission control equipment. For theinspection, the emission system testequipment is connected to thevehicle’s Data LinkConnector (DLC).

The DLC is under the instrumentpanel to the left of the steeringwheel. See your dealer if assistanceis needed.

The vehicle may not passinspection if:. The malfunction indicator lamp is

on with the engine running, or ifthe light does not come on whenthe ignition is turned to ON/RUNwhile the engine is off.

. The OBD II (On-BoardDiagnostics) system determinesthat critical emission controlsystems have not beencompletely diagnosed. Thevehicle would be considered notready for inspection. This canhappen if the 12-volt battery hasrecently been replaced or rundown. The diagnostic system isdesigned to evaluate criticalemission control systems duringnormal driving. This can takeseveral days of routine driving.If this has been done and thevehicle still does not pass theinspection for lack of OBD IIsystem readiness, your dealercan prepare the vehicle forinspection.



Service Vehicle SoonLight

For vehicles with this light, it comeson if a condition exists that mayrequire the vehicle to be taken infor service.

Vehicles not equipped with a lightdisplay a SERVICE VEHICLESOON message.

See Service Vehicle Messages onpage 5‑32 for more information.

If the light comes on, take thevehicle to your dealer for service assoon as possible.

For vehicles with an uplevel cluster,this light comes on in the DriverInformation Center (DIC).

Brake System WarningLightThe vehicle brake system consistsof two hydraulic circuits. If onecircuit is not working, the remainingcircuit can still work to stop thevehicle. For normal brakingperformance, both circuits need tobe working.

If the warning light comes on, thereis a brake problem. Have the brakesystem inspected right away.

Metric English

The brake indicator light shouldcome on briefly as the engine isstarted. If it does not come on havethe vehicle serviced by your dealer.

{ WARNING

The brake system might not beworking properly if the brakesystem warning light is on.Driving with the brake systemwarning light on can lead to acrash. If the light is still on afterthe vehicle has been pulled offthe road and carefully stopped,have the vehicle towed forservice.

If the light comes on while driving, achime sounds. Pull off the road andstop. The pedal might be harder topush or go closer to the floor.It might also take longer to stop.If the light is still on, have thevehicle towed for service. SeeTowing the Vehicle on page 10‑83.



Antilock Brake System(ABS) Warning Light

The Antilock Brake System (ABS)light comes on briefly when theengine is started.

If the light does not come on, have itfixed so it will be ready to warn ifthere is a problem.

If the ABS light comes on and stayson while driving, stop as soon aspossible and turn the ignition off.Start the engine again to reset thesystem. If the light stays on afterdriving at a speed above 20 km/h(13 mph), see your dealer forservice. A chime may also soundwhen the light comes on steady.

If the regular brake system warninglight is not on, the vehicle still hasbrakes, but not antilock brakes.If the regular brake system warninglight is also on, the vehicle does nothave antilock brakes and there is aproblem with the regular brakes.See Brake System Warning Light onpage 5‑16.

See Brake System Messages onpage 5‑29 for all brake‐related DICmessages.

Up-Shift Light

The vehicle may have an up-shiftlight. It shows when to shift to thenext higher gear for best fueleconomy.

See Manual Transmission onpage 9‑33 for more information.

Power Steering WarningLight

This light comes on briefly when theignition is turned to ON/RUN as acheck to show it is working.

If it does not come on have thevehicle serviced by your dealer.

If this light stays on, or comes onwhile driving, the system may not beworking. If this happens, see yourdealer for service.



Traction Off Light

This light comes on briefly whilestarting the engine. If it does not,have the vehicle serviced by yourdealer. If the system is workingnormally, the indicator light thenturns off.

The traction off light comes on whenthe Traction Control System (TCS)has been turned off by pressing andreleasing the TCS/StabiliTrakbutton.

This light and the StabiliTrak OFFlight come on when StabiliTrak isturned off.

If the TCS is off, wheel spin is notlimited. Adjust driving accordingly.

See Traction Control System (TCS)on page 9‑37 and StabiliTrak®

System on page 9‑38 for moreinformation.

StabiliTrak® OFF Light

This light comes on briefly whilestarting the engine. If it does not,have the vehicle serviced by yourdealer.

This light comes on when theStabiliTrak system is turned off.If StabiliTrak is off, the TractionControl System (TCS) is also off.

If the TCS is off, the system doesnot assist in controlling the vehicle.Turn on the TCS and the StabiliTraksystems and the warning lightturns off.

See Traction Control System (TCS)on page 9‑37 and StabiliTrak®

System on page 9‑38 for moreinformation

Traction Control System(TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light

The StabiliTrak system or theTraction Control System (TCS)indicator/warning light comes onbriefly when the engine is started.

If the light does not come on, havethe vehicle serviced by the dealer.If the system is working normally,the indicator light turns off.



If the light is on and not flashing, theTCS, and potentially the StabiliTraksystem have been disabled. A DICmessage may display. Check theDIC messages to determine whichfeature(s) is no longer functioningand whether the vehicle requiresservice.

If the indicator/warning light is onand flashing, the TCS and/or theStabiliTrak system is activelyworking.

See StabiliTrak® System onpage 9‑38 and Traction ControlSystem (TCS) on page 9‑37 formore information.

Tire Pressure Light

For vehicles with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), this lightcomes on briefly when the engine isstarted. It provides informationabout tire pressures and the TPMS.

When the Light Is On Steady

This indicates that one or more ofthe tires are significantlyunderinflated.

A Driver Information Center (DIC)tire pressure message may alsodisplay. See Vehicle Messages(Canada Base Level) on page 5‑28or Vehicle Messages (CanadaUplevel and United States) onpage 5‑28 for more information.

Stop as soon as possible, andinflate the tires to the pressure valueshown on the Tire and LoadingInformation label. See Tire Pressureon page 10‑49 for more information.

When the Light Flashes First andThen Is On Steady

If the light flashes for about a minuteand then stays on, there may be aproblem with the TPMS. If theproblem is not corrected, the lightwill come on at every ignition cycle.See Tire Pressure MonitorOperation on page 10‑52 for moreinformation.



Engine Oil Pressure Light

{ WARNING

Do not keep driving if the oilpressure is low. The engine canbecome so hot that it catches fire.Someone could be burned. Checkthe oil as soon as possible andhave the vehicle serviced.

Notice: Lack of proper engine oilmaintenance can damage theengine. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Always follow the maintenanceschedule for changing engine oil.

The oil pressure light should comeon briefly as the engine is started.If it does not come on, have thevehicle serviced by your dealer.

If the light comes on and stays on, itmeans that oil is not flowing throughthe engine properly. The vehiclecould be low on oil and might havesome other system problem. Seeyour dealer.

Low Fuel Warning Light

This light comes on for a fewseconds when the ignition is turnedon as a check to indicate it isworking. If it does not come on,have it fixed.

The low fuel warning light (A) comeson and a chime sounds when thevehicle is low on fuel. The light turnsoff when fuel is added to thefuel tank.



For vehicles with a DriverInformation Center (DIC), see DriverInformation Center (DIC) onpage 5‑23 for more information.

Security Light

The immobilizer light should comeon briefly as the engine is started.If it does not come on, have thevehicle serviced by your dealer.If the system is working normally,the indicator light turns off.

If the light stays on and the enginedoes not start, there could be aproblem with the theft-deterrentsystem. See Immobilizer Operationon page 2‑14 for more information.

Reduced Engine PowerLight

The reduced engine power lightshould come on briefly as theengine is started. If it does not comeon have the vehicle serviced byyour dealer.

This light, along with the serviceengine soon light, displays when anoticeable reduction in the vehicle'sperformance occurs. Stop thevehicle and turn off the ignition.Wait for 10 seconds and restart thevehicle. This might correct thecondition.

The vehicle can be driven at areduced speed when the reducedengine power light is on butacceleration and speed might bereduced. The performance could bereduced until the next time thevehicle is driven. If this light stayson, see your dealer as soon aspossible for diagnosis and repair.

High-Beam On Light

The high‐beam on light comes onwhen the high-beam headlamps arein use.

See Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger on page 6‑2 for moreinformation.



Daytime Running Lamps(DRL) Indicator Light

This light turns on whenever theDaytime Running Lamps are in use.

See Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)on page 6‑2 for more information.

Front Fog Lamp Light

For vehicles with front fog lamps,this light comes on when the frontfog lamps are in use.

The light goes out when the frontfog lamps are turned off. See FrontFog Lamps on page 6‑4 for moreinformation.

Lamps On Reminder

The lamps on reminder light comeson when the lights are in use.



Cruise Control Light

The cruise control light is whitewhenever the cruise control is set,and turns green when the cruisecontrol is active.

The light turns off when the cruisecontrol is turned off. See CruiseControl on page 9‑40 for moreinformation.

Door Ajar Light

For vehicles equipped with this light,it comes on when a door is open ornot securely latched. Before driving,check that all doors are properlyclosed. See Door Ajar Messages onpage 5‑29 for more information.

For vehicles with an uplevel cluster,this light comes on in the DriverInformation Center (DIC).

Information Displays

Driver InformationCenter (DIC)The vehicle may have a DriverInformation Center (DIC). The DICdisplays information about yourvehicle. It also displays warningmessages if a system problem isdetected. See Vehicle Messages(Canada Base Level) on page 5‑28or Vehicle Messages (CanadaUplevel and United States) onpage 5‑28 for more information. Allmessages appear in the DIC displaylocated in the center of theinstrument panel cluster.

DIC Operation and Displays

The DIC has different displayswhich can be accessed by using theDIC buttons on the turn signal leverlocated on the left side of thesteering wheel. The DIC displaystrip, fuel, and warning messages if asystem problem is detected.



DIC Buttons

A. SET/CLR: Press to set or clearthe menu item displayed.

B. wx (Thumbwheel): Use toscroll through the menus.

C. MENU: Press to display theTrip/Fuel menu and the VehicleInformation menu. This button isalso used to return to or exit thelast screen displayed onthe DIC.

Trip/Fuel Menu Items

Press MENU on the turn signallever until Trip/Fuel Informationmenu displays. Usewx to scrollthrough the menu items. Not allitems are available on every vehicle.

The following is a list of all possiblemenu items:. Trip 1 or Trip 2, Average Fuel

Economy, Average VehicleSpeed

. Speed, Fuel Range, AverageFuel Economy

. Instantaneous Fuel Economy

. Best Average Fuel Economy

. Fuel Used

. Timer

. Digital Speed

. Navigation

Trip 1 or Trip 2, Average FuelEconomy, Average Vehicle Speed

This displays the current distancetraveled, in either kilometers (km) ormiles (mi), from the last reset for thetrip odometer. The trip odometer canbe reset to zero by pressing andholding the SET/CLR button whilethe trip odometer display isshowing.

The Average Fuel Economy displayshows the approximate averageliters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km)or miles per gallon (mpg).This number is based on thenumber of L/100 km (mpg)recorded since the last time thismenu item was reset. This displayis shown as . c L/100 km (mpg).Reset the average consumption bypressing SET/CLR when it isdisplayed.

This screen also displays theaverage vehicle speed of thevehicle in kilometers per hour (km/h)or miles per hour (mph). Thisaverage is based on the variousvehicle speeds recorded since thelast reset. This display is shownas c km/h (mph). Reset theaverage speed by pressingSET/CLR when it is displayed.



Speed, Fuel Range, Average FuelEconomy

The top of this display includesa digital speedometer. Thespeedometer shows how fastthe vehicle is moving in eitherkilometers per hour (km/h) or milesper hour (mph). The speedometercannot be reset.

In the center of the page is thefuel range display. This shows theapproximate distance the vehiclecan be driven without refueling.The fuel range estimate is based onan average of the vehicle's fueleconomy over recent driving historyand the amount of fuel remaining inthe fuel tank. This display is shownas l . km (mi). Fuel range cannotbe reset.

Also included on this page is aninstantaneous fuel economy display.The instantaneous fuel economydisplay shows the current fueleconomy in liters per 100 kilometers(L/100 km) or miles pergallon (mpg).

This number reflects only thefuel economy that the vehiclehas right now and changesfrequently as driving conditionschange. This display is shownas . L/100 km (mpg). This displaycannot be reset.

Instantaneous Fuel Economy

The instantaneous fuel economydisplay shows the current fueleconomy in liters per 100 kilometers(L/100 km) or miles per gallon(mpg). This number reflects only thefuel economy that the vehicle hasright now and changes frequently asdriving conditions change. Unlikeaverage economy, this displaycannot be reset.

Best Average Fuel Economy

The right hand side displays thebest average fuel economy (AFE)that is achieved for a selecteddistance. The left hand side displaysa running average of fuel economyfor the most recently traveledselected distance.

The center bar graph displays theinstantaneous fuel economy.Quickly press the SET/CLR buttonto display a page for selecting oneof the distance options. Move theup/down arrow to choose theselection, and SET/CLR to changethe setting.

When viewing best AFE, a severalsecond press and hold of SET/CLRwill reset the best value. The bestvalue will show “- - -” until theselected distance has beentraveled.

The display provides feedback onhow current driving behavior in thebar graph affects the runningaverage in the left display and howwell recent driving compares to thebest that has been achieved.

Fuel Used

This display shows the approximateliters (L) or gallons (gal) of fuel thathave been used since last reset.The fuel used can be reset bypressing the SET/CLR button whilethe Fuel Used display is showing.



Timer

This display can be used as a timer.To start the timer, press SET/CLRwhile Timer is displayed. Thedisplay will show the amount of timethat has passed since the timer waslast reset, not including time theignition is off. Time will continue tobe counted as long as the ignition ison, even if another display is beingshown on the DIC. The timer willrecord up to 99 hours, 59 minutes,and 59 seconds (99:59:59) afterwhich the display will return to zero.To stop the timer, press SET/CLRbriefly while Timer is displayed. Toreset the timer to zero, press andhold SET/CLR.

Digital Speed

The speedometer shows how fastthe vehicle is moving in eitherkilometers per hour (km/h) or milesper hour (mph). The speedometercannot be reset.

Navigation

This display is used for the OnStaror navigation system Turn-by-Turnguidance. See the OnStar Owner'sGuide or the navigation manual,if the vehicle has navigation, formore information.

Vehicle Information MenuItems

Press MENU on the turn signallever until Vehicle Information menuis displayed. Usewx to scrollthrough the menu items. Not allitems are available on every vehicle.The following is a list of all possiblemenu items:. Units. Tire Pressure. Remaining Oil Life. Coolant Temperature. Battery Voltage. Blank Display

Units

Movewx to change betweenMetric or US when the Unit displayis active. Press SET/CLR to confirmthe setting. On some models, youwill have to select 1, 2, or 3 for theUnit display. 1 is Imperial units, 2 isUS units, and 3 is metric units. Thiswill change the displays on thecluster and DIC to the type ofmeasurements you select.

Tire Pressure

The display may show a vehiclewith the approximate pressures ofall four tires. Tire pressure isdisplayed in either kilopascal (kPa)or in pounds per square inch (psi).On some models, this display onlyallows for matching of the TPMSsensors. In this case, the displaywill show TIRE LEARN. See TirePressure Monitor System onpage 10‑50 and Tire PressureMonitor Operation on page 10‑52 formore information.



Remaining Oil Life

This display shows an estimate ofthe oil's remaining useful life.If REMAINING OIL LIFE 99% isdisplayed, that means 99% of thecurrent oil life remains. This displaymay be shown as: %.

When the remaining oil life is low,the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage, or Code 82, will appearon the display. See Engine OilMessages on page 5‑30 and“Vehicle Messages (Canadian BaseLevel)” following. The oil should bechanged as soon as possible. SeeEngine Oil on page 10‑9. In additionto the engine oil life systemmonitoring the oil life, additionalmaintenance is recommended in theMaintenance Schedule in thismanual. See Maintenance Scheduleon page 11‑3 for more information.

Remember, the Oil Life display mustbe reset after each oil change. It willnot reset itself. Also, be careful notto reset the Oil Life displayaccidentally at any time other thanwhen the oil has just been changed.It cannot be reset accurately untilthe next oil change. To reset theengine oil life system press theSET/CLR button while the Oil Lifedisplay is active. See Engine OilLife System on page 10‑12.

Coolant Temperature

This display, available on somevehicles, shows the temperature ofthe engine cooling system fluid ineither degrees Celsius (°C) ordegrees Fahrenheit (°F).

Battery Voltage

This display, available on somevehicles, shows the current batteryvoltage. If the voltage is in thenormal range, the value will display.For example, the display may readBattery Voltage 15.0 Volts.

The vehicle's charging systemregulates voltage based on the stateof the battery. The battery voltagecan fluctuate while viewing thisinformation on the DIC. This isnormal. See Charging System Lighton page 5‑13 for more information.If there is a problem with the batterycharging system, the DIC willdisplay a message. See BatteryVoltage and Charging Messages onpage 5‑28.

Blank Display

This display shows no information.



Vehicle Messages

Vehicle Messages(Canada Base Level)DIC messages display when thestatus of the vehicle has changedand action may be needed tocorrect the condition. Multiplemessages appear one after another.

Press any of the DIC buttons on theturn signal lever to acknowledgeand clear them from the display.More urgent messages cannot becleared from the DIC display.All messages should be takenseriously. Clearing messages willnot correct the problem.

On the Canadian base level cluster,vehicle messages appear as codenumbers.

25: Left front turn indicator failure

26: Left rear turn indicator failure

27: Right front turn indicator failure

28: Right rear turn indicator failure

35: Replace battery in radio remotecontrol

53: Tighten gas cap

68: Service power steering

75: Service air conditioner

82: Change engine oil soon

84: Engine power is reduced

95: Service airbag

Vehicle Messages(Canada Uplevel andUnited States)DIC messages display when thestatus of the vehicle has changedand action may be needed tocorrect the condition. Multiplemessages appear one after another.

Press any of the DIC buttons on theturn signal lever to acknowledgeand clear them from the display.More urgent messages cannot becleared from the DIC display.

All messages should be takenseriously. Clearing messages willnot correct the problem.

On the Canadian uplevel clusterand on vehicles sold in the UnitedStates, vehicle messages aredisplayed as text. The messagesand information about them follow.

Battery Voltage andCharging Messages

BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE

This message displays when thevehicle has detected that the batteryvoltage is dropping beyond areasonable point. The battery saversystem starts reducing certainfeatures of the vehicle that you maybe able to notice. At the point thatfeatures are disabled, this messageis displayed. It means that thevehicle is trying to save the chargein the battery. Turn off unnecessaryaccessories to allow the battery torecharge.



LOW BATTERY

This message is displayed when thebattery voltage is low. See Batteryon page 10‑25 for more information.

SERVICE BATTERYCHARGING SYSTEM

This message is displayed whenthere is a fault in the batterycharging system. Take the vehicleto your dealer for service.

Brake System Messages

BRAKE FLUID LOW

This message is displayed when thebrake fluid level is low. See BrakeFluid on page 10‑23.

RELEASE PARKING BRAKE

This message is displayed as areminder that the parking brake ison. Release it before you attemptto drive.

Compass Messages

CAL

This message is displayed when thecompass needs to be calibrated.See Compass on page 5‑4.

– –

Two dashes will be displayed if thecompass needs service. See yourdealer for service.

Cruise Control Messages

APPLY BRAKE BEFORECRUISE

If this message displays whenattempting to activate cruise control,apply the brake pedal and try again.

CRUISE SET TO XXX

This message displays when thecruise control is set and shows thespeed it was set to. See CruiseControl on page 9‑40 for moreinformation.

Door Ajar Messages

DOOR(S) OPEN

A vehicle symbol will be displayedon the DIC showing which door isopen along with this message.Close the door completely.

HOOD OPEN

This message will display when thehood is open. Close the hoodcompletely.

TRUNK OPEN

This message will display when thetrunk is open. Close the trunkcompletely.



Engine Cooling SystemMessages

A/C OFF DUE TO HIGHENGINE TEMP

This message displays when theengine coolant becomes hotter thanthe normal operating temperature.To avoid added strain on a hotengine, the air conditioningcompressor automatically turns off.When the coolant temperaturereturns to normal, the airconditioning compressor turns backon. You can continue to drive thevehicle.

If this message continues to appear,have the system repaired by yourdealer as soon as possible to avoiddamage to the engine.

ENGINE OVERHEATED —IDLE ENGINE

This message displays when theengine coolant temperature is toohot. Stop and allow the vehicle toidle until it cools down.

ENGINE OVERHEATED —STOP ENGINE

This message displays and acontinuous chime sounds if theengine cooling system reachesunsafe temperatures for operation.Stop and turn off the vehicle assoon as it is safe to do so to avoidsevere damage. This messageclears when the engine has cooledto a safe operating temperature.

HIGH COOLANTTEMPERATURE

This message displays if the coolanttemperature is hot. See EngineOverheating on page 10‑19.

Engine Oil Messages

CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON

This message displays when theengine oil needs to be changed.When you change the engine oil, besure to reset the Oil Life System.See Engine Oil Life System onpage 10‑12 and Driver Information

Center (DIC) on page 5‑23 forinformation on how to reset thesystem. See Engine Oil onpage 10‑9 and MaintenanceSchedule on page 11‑3 for moreinformation.

OIL PRESSURE LOW — STOPENGINE

This message displays if low oilpressure levels occur. Stop thevehicle as soon as safely possibleand do not operate it until the causeof the low oil pressure has beencorrected. Check the oil as soon aspossible and have the vehicleserviced by your dealer.

Engine Power Messages

ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED

This message displays when thevehicle's engine power is reduced.Reduced engine power can affectthe vehicle's ability to accelerate.If this message is on, but there is noreduction in performance, proceedto your destination.



The performance may be reducedthe next time the vehicle is driven.The vehicle may be driven at areduced speed while this messageis on, but maximum accelerationand speed may be reduced.Anytime this message stays on,the vehicle should be taken to yourdealer for service as soon aspossible.

Fuel System Messages

FUEL LEVEL LOW

This message displays when thevehicle is low on fuel. Refuel assoon as possible.

TIGHTEN GAS CAP

This message displays when thefuel cap is not on tight. Tighten thefuel cap.

Key and Lock Messages

NO REMOTE DETECTED

This message displays when thetransmitter battery is weak onvehicles with keyless access. See“Starting the Vehicle with a LowTransmitter Battery” under RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 2‑3 for moreinformation.

REPLACE BATTERY INREMOTE KEY

This message displays when thebattery in the Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) transmitter needs to bereplaced.

Lamp Messages

AUTOMATIC LIGHTCONTROL ON

This message is displayed when theautomatic light control has beenturned on. See Automatic HeadlampSystem on page 6‑3.

AUTOMATIC LIGHTCONTROL OFF

This message is displayed when theautomatic light control has beenturned off. See Automatic HeadlampSystem on page 6‑3.

XXX TURN INDICATORFAILURE

When one of the turn signals is out,this message displays to showwhich bulb needs to be replaced.See Bulb Replacement onpage 10‑29 and Replacement Bulbson page 10‑34 for more informationon turn signal bulb replacement.

TURN SIGNAL ON

This message is displayed if theturn signal has been left on. Turn offthe turn signal.



Object Detection SystemMessages

PARK ASSIST OFF

This message displays when thepark assist system has been turnedoff or when there is a temporarycondition causing the system to bedisabled. See Ultrasonic ParkingAssist on page 9‑42.

SERVICE PARK ASSIST

This message displays if there is aproblem with the Ultrasonic RearParking Assist (URPA) system. Donot use this system to help youpark. See Ultrasonic Parking Assiston page 9‑42 for more information.See your dealer for service.

Ride Control SystemMessages

SERVICE TRACTIONCONTROL

This message displays when thereis a problem with the TractionControl System (TCS). See TractionControl System (TCS) onpage 9‑37.

SERVICE STABILITRAK

This message displays if there is aproblem with the StabiliTrak system.See StabiliTrak® System onpage 9‑38.

Airbag System Messages

SERVICE AIRBAG

This message displays if there is aproblem with the airbag system.Take the vehicle to your dealer forservice.

Security Messages

THEFT ATTEMPTED

This message displays if the vehicledetects a tamper condition.

Service Vehicle Messages

SERVICE AC SYSTEM

This message displays if there is aproblem with the air conditioningsystem. Take the vehicle to yourdealer for service.

SERVICE POWER STEERING

This message displays if there is aproblem with the power steeringsystem. Take the vehicle to yourdealer for service.

SERVICE STEERINGCOLUMN LOCK

This message displays if there is aproblem with the steering columnlock. Take the vehicle to your dealerfor service.



SERVICE VEHICLE SOON

This message displays if there is aproblem with the vehicle. Take thevehicle to your dealer for service.

Starting the VehicleMessages

TURN STEERING WHEELTURN KEY OFF THEN ON

This message displays when thesteering column is locked. Tryturning the steering wheel whileturning the vehicle off and then backon to unlock the steering column.

TURN STEERING WHEELSTART VEHICLE AGAIN

This message displays when thesteering column is locked. Tryturning the steering wheel whilestarting the vehicle to unlock thesteering column.

Tire Messages

SERVICE TIRE MONITORSYSTEM

This message displays if there is aproblem with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS). See TirePressure Monitor Operation onpage 10‑52 for more information.

TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE

This message displays when thesystem is learning new tires. SeeTire Pressure Monitor Operation onpage 10‑52 for more information.

TIRE PRESSURE LOW ADDAIR TO TIRE

On vehicles with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), thismessage displays when thepressure in one or more of thevehicle's tires is low.

There is also an icon with thewarning that will indicate thelocation of the low tire.

The low tire pressure warning lightwill also come on. See TirePressure Light on page 5‑19.

If a tire pressure message appearson the DIC, stop as soon as youcan. Inflate the tires by adding airuntil the tire pressure is equal to thevalues shown on the Tire andLoading Information label. See Tireson page 10‑42, Vehicle Load Limitson page 9‑10, and Tire Pressure onpage 10‑49.

You can receive more than one tirepressure message at a time. Toread the other messages that mayhave been sent at the same time,press the SET/CLR button. The DICalso shows the tire pressure values.See Driver Information Center (DIC)on page 5‑23.

Transmission Messages

SERVICE TRANSMISSION

This message displays if there is aproblem with the transmission.See your dealer.



TRANSMISSION HOT — IDLEENGINE

This message displays and a chimesounds if the transmission fluid inthe vehicle gets hot. Driving with thetransmission fluid temperature highcan cause damage to the vehicle.Stop the vehicle and let it idle toallow the transmission to cool. Thismessage clears when the fluidtemperature reaches a safe level.

Vehicle ReminderMessages

ICE POSSIBLE DRIVEWITH CARE

This message displays when iceconditions are possible.

STEERING COLUMN ISLOCKED

This message displays when thesteering column is locked.

VehiclePersonalizationThe audio system controls are usedto access the personalizationmenus for customizing vehiclefeatures.

CONFIG (Configuration): Press toaccess the ConfigurationSettings menu.

MENU or MENU/SEL: Press thecenter of this knob to enter themenus and select menu items. Turnthe knob to scroll through themenus.

BACK: Press to exit or movebackward in a menu.

Entering the PersonalizationMenus

1. Press CONFIG to access theConfiguration Settings menu.

2. Turn the MENU or MENU/SELknob to highlight VehicleSettings. Press the CONFIG

button until Vehicle is highlightedon vehicles with a navigationsystem only.

3. Press the center of the MENU orMENU/SEL knob to select theVehicle Settings menu. The keymust be in the run position.

The following list of menu items maybe available:. Climate and Air Quality. Comfort and Convenience. Collision/Detection Systems. Languages. Lighting. Power Door Locks. Remote Locking, Unlocking,

Starting. Return to Factory Settings

Turn the MENU or MENU/SEL knobto highlight the menu. Press theknob to select it. Each of the menusis detailed in the followinginformation.



Vehicles with a navigation systemwill display a checkmark to indicatethis feature is on.

Climate and Air Quality

If equipped, select the Climate andAir Quality menu and the followingwill be displayed:. Auto Fan Speed. Air Quality Sensor. Remote Start Auto Heat Seats. Auto Defog. Auto Rear Defog

Auto Fan Speed

This will allow you to select theautomatic fan speed. This featuresets the climate control fan speed tomaintain the interior temperature.

Press the MENU or MENU/SELknob when Auto Fan Speed ishighlighted to open the menu. Turnthe knob to highlight High, Medium,or Low. Press the BACK button toconfirm the selection and moveback to the last menu.

Air Quality Sensor

This will allow you to select whetherthe system will operate at high orlow sensitivity. Only vehicles withthe automatic climate control willhave this option.

Press the MENU or MENU/SELknob when Air Quality Sensor ishighlighted to open the menu. Turnthe knob to highlight High Sensitivityor Low Sensitivity. Press the BACKbutton to confirm the selection andmove back to the last menu.

Remote Start Auto Heat Seats

On vehicles with remote start andheated seats, the heated seats canbe set to on or off.

Press the MENU or MENU/SELknob when Remote Start Auto HeatSeats is highlighted to open themenu. Turn the knob to highlightOn or Off. Press the BACK button toconfirm the selection and moveback to the last menu.

Auto Defog

When turned on and high humidityis detected, the climate controlsystem may adjust to outside airsupply and turn on the airconditioner or the heater. The fanspeed may slightly increase to helpprevent fogging. When highhumidity is no longer detected, thesystem will return to its prioroperation.

Press the MENU or MENU/SELknob when Auto Defog ishighlighted to open the menu. Turnthe knob to highlight On or Off.Press the BACK button to confirmthe selection and move back to thelast menu.

Auto Rear Defog

When on, this feature turns on therear defogger at vehicle start whenthe interior temperature is cold andfog is likely. The auto rear defogfunction can be disabled bypressing1. When off, the feature

can be turned on by pressing1.



See “Rear Window Defogger” underClimate Control Systems onpage 8‑1 for more information.

Press the MENU or MENU/SELknob when Auto Rear Defog ishighlighted to open the menu.Turn the knob to highlight On or Off.Press the knob to confirm theselection and move back to thelast menu.

Comfort and Convenience

Select the Comfort andConvenience menu and ChimeVolume will be displayed.

Chime Volume

This allows the selection of thechime volume level.

Press the MENU or MENU/SELknob when Chime Volume ishighlighted. Turn the knob to selectNormal or High. Press the BACKbutton to confirm and go back to thelast menu.

Collision/Detection Systems

If equipped, select the Collision/Detection Systems menu andPark Assist will be displayed.

Park Assist

This allows the Ultrasonic ParkingAssist feature, audible only, to beturned on or off.

Press the MENU or MENU/SELknob when Park Assist ishighlighted. Turn the knob to selectOn or Off. Press the knob to confirmand go back to the last menu.

Languages

Select the Language menu and thefollowing will be displayed:. English. Francais. Espanol

Turn the MENU or MENU/SEL knobto select the language. Press BACKto return to the last menu.

Lighting

Select the Lighting menu and thefollowing will be displayed:. Exit Lighting. Vehicle Locator Lights

Exit Lighting

This allows the selection of howlong the exterior lamps stay onwhen leaving the vehicle when it isdark outside.

Press the MENU or MENU/SELknob when Exit Lighting ishighlighted. Turn the knob to selectOff, 30 Seconds, 1 Minute,or 2 Minutes. Press the BACKbutton to confirm and go back to thelast menu.

Vehicle Locator Lights

This allows the vehicle locator lightsto be turned on or off. When on, theheadlamps and back‐up lamps willflash when K is pressed.



Press the MENU or MENU/SELknob when Vehicle Locator Lights ishighlighted to open the menu. Turnthe MENU or MENU/SEL knob tohighlight On or Off. Press MENU orMENU/SEL to select On or Off.Press the BACK button to confirmthe selection and move back to thelast menu.

Power Door Locks

Select Power Door Locks and thefollowing will be displayed:. Auto Door Unlock. Delayed Door Lock. Unlocked Door Anti Lock Out. Auto Door Lock

Auto Door Unlock

This allows selection of which of thedoors will automatically unlock whenthe vehicle is shifted into P (Park).

Press the MENU or MENU/SELknob when Auto Door Unlock ishighlighted. Turn the knob to select

All Doors, Driver Door, or Off. Pressthe knob to confirm and go back tothe last menu.

Delayed Door Lock

When on, this feature will delay thelocking of the doors untilfive seconds after the last door isclosed. You will hear three chimesto signal delayed locking is in use.Press either the power lock buttonor Q on the RKE transmitter twice tooverride the delayed locking featureand immediately lock all of thedoors.

Press the MENU or MENU/SELknob when Delayed Door Lock ishighlighted to select On or Off.Press BACK to return to thelast menu.

Unlocked Door Anti Lock Out

When on, all doors will lock. Thedriver door will then unlock if doorlocking is requested while the driverdoor is open, and disable theDelayed Door Lock feature.

Even when this feature is off, thedriver is protected from accidentallockouts when the key is in theignition.

If Off is selected, the Unlocked DoorAnti Lock Out feature may beenabled through an additional menuselection.

Press the MENU or MENU/SELknob when Unlocked Door Anti LockOut is highlighted to select On orOff. Press BACK to return to thelast menu.

Auto Door Lock

This allows selection of which of thedoors will automatically lock whenthe vehicle is shifted into P (Park).

Press the MENU or MENU/SELknob when Auto Door Lock ishighlighted. Turn the knob to selectOn or Off. Press the knob to confirmand go back to the last menu.



Remote Locking, Unlocking,Starting

Select Remote Locking, Unlocking,Starting and the following will bedisplayed (depending on thesystem):. Remote Lock Feedback. Door Unlock or Remote Door

Unlock. Remote Unlock Light Feedback. Remote Start

Remote Lock Feedback

This allows selection of what type offeedback is given when locking thevehicle with the RKE transmitter.

Press the MENU or MENU/SELknob when Remote Lock Feedbackis highlighted. Turn the knob toselect Lights and Horn, Lights Only,Horn Only, or Off. Press the knob toconfirm and go back to thelast menu.

Door Unlock or Remote DoorUnlock

This allows selection of which doorswill unlock when pressing K on theRKE transmitter.

Press the MENU or MENU/SELknob when Door Unlock ishighlighted. Turn the knob to selectAll Doors or Driver Door Only. Whenset to Driver Door Only, the driverdoor will unlock the first time K ispressed and all doors will unlockwhen K is pressed a second time.When set to All Doors, all of thedoors will unlock at the first press ofK. Press the knob to confirm andgo back to the last menu.

Remote Unlock Light Feedback

If equipped, this allows selection ofwhat type of feedback is given whenunlocking the vehicle with the RKEtransmitter.

Press the MENU or MENU/SELknob when Remote Unlock LightFeedback is highlighted.

Turn the knob to select On or Off.Press the knob to confirm and goback to the last menu.

Remote Start

If equipped, this allows selection toturn on or off Remote Start.

Press the MENU or MENU/SELknob when Remote Start ishighlighted. Turn the knob to selectOn or Off. Press the knob to confirmand go back to the last menu.

Return to Factory Settings

Select Return to Factory Settings toreturn all vehicle personalization tothe default settings. Turn the knobto select Yes or No. Press the knobto confirm and go back to thelast menu.


Lighting 6-1

Lighting

Exterior LightingExterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . 6-1Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Automatic HeadlampSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . 6-3Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Front Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Interior LightingInstrument Panel IlluminationControl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Courtesy Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Lighting FeaturesEntry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Battery Power Protection . . . . . . 6-6

Exterior Lighting

Exterior Lamp Controls

The exterior lamp control is locatedon the instrument panel to theoutboard side of the steeringcolumn.

It controls the following systems:. Headlamps. Taillamps. Parking Lamps. License Plate Lamps. Instrument Panel Lights. Fog Lamps

The exterior lamp control hasfour positions:

O (Off): Briefly turn to this positionto turn the automatic light control offor on again.

AUTO (Automatic): Turns theheadlamps on automatically atnormal brightness, together withthe following:. Parking Lamps. Taillamps. License Plate Lamps. Instrument Panel Lights. Sidemarker Lamps

; (Parking Lamps): Turns theparking lamps on together with thefollowing:. Taillamps. License Plate Lamps. Instrument Panel Lights. Sidemarker Lamps


6-2 Lighting

5 (Headlamps): Turns theheadlamps on together with thelamps listed below. A warning chimesounds if the driver door is openedwhen the ignition switch is off andthe headlamps are on.. Parking Lamps. Taillamps. License Plate Lamps. Instrument Panel Lights. Sidemarker Lamps

# (Front Fog Lamps): Forvehicles with fog lamps, press toturn the lamps on or off.

See Front Fog Lamps on page 6‑4.

When the lights are on,; will belit. See Lamps On Reminder onpage 5‑22.

Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer

23 Headlamp High/Low‐BeamChanger: Push the turn signal/lanechange lever away from you to turnthe high beams on.

Pull the lever toward you to return tolow beams.

This indicator light turns on in theinstrument panel cluster when thehigh‐beam headlamps are on.

Flash-to-PassTo flash the high beams, pull theturn signal/lane change lever all theway toward you. Then release it.

Daytime RunningLamps (DRL)Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) canmake it easier for others to see thefront of your vehicle during the day.Fully functional daytime runninglamps are required on all vehiclesfirst sold in Canada.

This indicator light turns on in theinstrument panel cluster when theDRL are on.

A light sensor on top of theinstrument panel makes the DRLwork, so be sure it is not covered.


Lighting 6-3

The DRL system makes thelow‐beam headlamps come on ata reduced brightness when thefollowing conditions are met:. The ignition is in the ON/

RUN mode.. The exterior lamps control is

in AUTO.. The engine is running.

When the DRL are on, only thelow‐beam headlamps, at a reducedlevel of brightness, will be on. Thetaillamps, sidemarker, instrumentpanel, and other lamps will notbe on.

The headlamps automaticallychange from DRL to the regularheadlamps depending on thedarkness of the surroundings. Theother lamps that come on with theheadlamps will also come on.

When it is bright enough outside,the headlamps go off and the DRLcome on.

To turn the DRL off or on again, turnthe exterior lamps control to the offposition and then release. Forvehicles first sold in Canada, theDRL cannot be turned off.

Automatic HeadlampSystemWhen it is dark enough outside andthe exterior lamps control is in theautomatic position, the headlampscome on automatically. See ExteriorLamp Controls on page 6‑1.

The vehicle has a light sensorlocated on top of the instrumentpanel. Make sure it is not covered,

or the headlamps will be on whenthey are not needed.

The system may also turn on theheadlamps when driving through aparking garage or tunnel.

Hazard Warning Flashers

| (Hazard Warning Flasher):Press and momentarily hold thisbutton located on the instrumentpanel above the climate controlsystem, to make the front and rearturn signal lamps flash on and off.


6-4 Lighting

This warns others that you arehaving trouble. Press andmomentarily hold again to turn theflashers off.

Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals

An arrow on the instrument panelcluster will flash in the direction ofthe turn or lane change.

Move the lever all the way up ordown to signal a turn.

Raise or lower the lever until thearrow starts to flash to signal a lanechange. The turn signal flashesthree times.

The lever returns to its startingposition when it is released.

If after signaling a turn or lanechange the arrow flashes rapidly ordoes not come on, a signal bulbmay be burned out. Have the bulbsreplaced. If the bulb is not burnedout, check the fuse. See Fuses andCircuit Breakers on page 10‑35 formore information.

Front Fog Lamps

For vehicles with front fog lamps,the button is located on theoutboard side of the instrumentpanel.

The ignition must be on to turn onthe fog lamps.

# : Press to turn the fog lamps onor off. An indicator light on theinstrument panel cluster comes onwhen the fog lamps are on.

The fog lamps come on togetherwith the parking lamps.

If the high‐beam headlamps areturned on, the fog lamps will turn off.If the high‐beam headlamps areturned off, the fog lamps will turnback on again.

Some localities have laws thatrequire the headlamps to be onalong with the fog lamps.


Lighting 6-5

Interior Lighting

Instrument PanelIllumination Control

This feature controls the brightnessof the instrument panel controls andinfotainment display screen. Thethumbwheel is located to the left ofthe steering column on theinstrument panel.

D (Instrument PanelBrightness): Move thethumbwheel up or down and hold, tobrighten or dim the instrument panelcontrols and infotainment displayscreen.

Courtesy LampsThe courtesy lamps come onautomatically when any door isopened and the dome lamp is inthe door position.

Dome Lamps

The dome lamp controls are locatedin the headliner.

( (Dome Lamp Override): Pressto turn the lamps off, even when adoor is open.

H (Door): Press to turn the lampson automatically when a door isopened.

' (On): Press to turn on thedome lamps.

Reading Lamps

The reading lamps are located inthe overhead console.

# or$ : Press the button neareach lamp to turn it on or off.


6-6 Lighting

Lighting Features

Entry LightingThe headlamps, parking lamps,taillamps, and most of the interiorlights turn on briefly, when theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE) K ispressed. After about 30 seconds theexterior lamps turn off, and then thedome and remaining interior lightswill dim to off. Entry lighting can bedisabled manually by changing theignition out of the OFF position,or by pressing the RKE Q button.

This feature can be changed.See Vehicle Personalization onpage 5‑34.

Exit LightingThe headlamps, taillamps, parkinglamps, back‐up lamps, and licenseplate lamps come on at night, or inareas with limited lighting, when thekey is removed from the ignition.The dome lamps also come onwhen the key is removed from theignition. The exterior lamps anddome lamps remain on after thedoor is closed for a set amount oftime, then automatically turn off.

The exterior lamps turn offimmediately by turning the exteriorlamps control off.

The exit lighting feature canbe changed. See VehiclePersonalization on page 5‑34.

Battery Power ProtectionThe battery saver feature isdesigned to protect the vehicle'sbattery.

If some interior lights are left onand the ignition is turned off, thebattery rundown protection systemautomatically turns the lamp off aftersome time.


Infotainment System 7-1

InfotainmentSystem

IntroductionInfotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . 7-2Overview (Base Radio) . . . . . . . 7-3Overview (Up-Level Radio) . . . 7-5Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6

RadioAM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17Satellite Radio Antenna . . . . . . 7-18Multi-Band Antenna . . . . . . . . . . 7-18

Audio PlayersCD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18Auxiliary Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20

PhoneBluetooth (Overview) . . . . . . . . 7-23Bluetooth (InfotainmentControls) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25

Bluetooth (VoiceRecognition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29

Trademarks and LicenseAgreementsTrademarks and LicenseAgreements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35


7-2 Infotainment System

Introduction

InfotainmentRead the following pages tobecome familiar with the audiosystem's features.

{ WARNING

Taking your eyes off the road forextended periods could cause acrash resulting in injury or deathto you or others. Do not giveextended attention toentertainment tasks while driving.

This system provides access tomany audio and non‐audio listings.

To minimize taking your eyes off theroad while driving, do the followingwhile the vehicle is parked:. Become familiar with the

operation and controls of theaudio system.

. Set up the tone, speakeradjustments, and preset radiostations.

For more information, see DefensiveDriving on page 9‑3.

The vehicle has RetainedAccessory Power (RAP). With RAP,the audio system can be playedeven after the ignition is turned off.See Retained Accessory Power(RAP) on page 9‑23 for moreinformation.

Navigation/Radio System

For vehicles with a navigation radiosystem, see the separate navigationmanual.

Theft-Deterrent FeatureThe theft-deterrent feature works bylearning a portion of the VehicleIdentification Number (VIN) to theinfotainment system. Theinfotainment system does notoperate if it is stolen or moved toa different vehicle.



Overview (Base Radio)

A. O. Turns the system on or off

and adjusts the volume.

B. Buttons 1 to 6. Radio: Saves and selects

favorite stations.

C. g. Radio: Seeks the previous

station.. CD: Selects the previous

track or rewinds withina track.

D. T. CD: Moves up one folder

level while playing an MP3.

E. k. CD: Pauses playback, and

stops playback.

F. U. CD: Moves back one folder

level while playing an MP3.

G. l. Radio: Seeks the next

station.. CD: Selects the next track

or fast forwards within atrack.

H. CLOCK. Opens the clock menu.



I. INFO. Radio: Shows available

information about thecurrent station.

. CD: Shows availableinformation about thecurrent track.

J. TONE. Opens the tone menu.

K. AS. Radio: Opens the

autostore stations list.

L. BAND. Changes the band while

listening to the radio.. Selects the radio when

listening to a differentaudio source.

M. CD/AUX. Selects the CD player or

an external audio source.

N. CD Slot. Insert a CD.

O. CONFIG. Opens the settings menu.

P. 5 \ >. Opens the phone

main menu.. Mutes the audio system.

Q. FAV. Radio: Opens the

favorites list.

R. BACK. Menu: Moves one

level back.. Character Input: Deletes

the last character.

S. MENU or MENU/SEL. Turn to open menus,

highlight menu items,or set numeric valueswhile in a menu.

. Press to select menuitems.

. Radio: Manually selectsradio stations.

. CD: Selects tracks.

T. Y. Removes a disc from

the CD slot.



Overview (Up-Level Radio)

A. O. Turns the system on or off

and adjusts the volume.

B. Buttons 1 to 6. Radio: Saves and selects

favorite stations.

C. g. Radio: Seeks the previous

station.. CD: Selects the previous

track or rewinds withina track.

D. k. CD: Pauses playback, and

stops playback.

E. l. Radio: Seeks the next

station.. CD: Selects the next track

or fast forwards within atrack.

F. CLOCK. Opens the clock menu.

G. INFO. Radio: Shows available

information about thecurrent station.

. CD: Shows availableinformation about thecurrent track.

H. TONE. Opens the tone menu.



I. AS. Radio: Opens the

autostore stations list.

J. BAND. Changes the band while

listening to the radio.. Selects the radio when

listening to a differentaudio source.

K. CD/AUX. Selects the CD player or

an external audio source.

L. CD Slot. Insert a CD.

M. CONFIG. Opens the settings menu.

N. 5 \ >. Opens the phone

main menu.. Mutes the audio system.

O. FAV. Radio: Opens the

favorites list.

P. BACK. Menu: Moves one

level back.. Character Input: Deletes

the last character.

Q. MENU or MENU/SEL. Turn to open menus,

highlight menu items,or set numeric valueswhile in a menu.

. Press to select menuitems.

. Radio: Manually selectsradio stations.

. CD: Selects tracks.

R. Y. Removes a disc from the

CD slot.

Operation

Controls

The infotainment system isoperated by using the pushbuttons,multifunction knobs, menus shownon the display, and steering wheelcontrols, if equipped.

Turning the System On or Off

O (Volume/Power): Press to turnthe system on and off.

Automatic Switch‐Off

If the infotainment system has beenturned on after the ignition is turnedoff, the system will turn offautomatically after 10 minutes.

Volume Control

O (Volume/Power): Turn to adjustthe volume.

5 / > (Phone/Mute): Press 5 / >to mute the infotainment system.Press 5 / > again, or turn theO knob to cancel mute.



MENU System (Base Level)

The menu system for the base levelinfotainment system appears on thetop half of the display screen.

Menu Icons

The menu icons indicate thefollowing:

A. The up and down arrowsindicate that the main menuis active.

B. The angled arrow indicates thata submenu with more options isavailable.

C. A single right arrow indicatesthat the first submenu level isactive. Two right arrows indicatethat the second submenu levelis active.

D. The down arrow indicates thatthat more options are availablein the current menu.

Controls

The MENU or MENU/SEL knob andthe BACK button are used tonavigate the menu system.

MENU or MENU/SEL Knob:Press to:. Enter the menu system.. Select or activate the menu

option.. Confirm a set value.. Turn a system setting on or off.

Turn to:. Select a menu, or a menu

option.. Select a value.

BACK: Press to:. Exit a menu.. Return from a submenu screen

to the previous menu screen.. Delete the last character in a

sequence.

Selecting a Menu Option

1. Turn the MENU or MENU/SELknob to scroll through availablemenu options.

2. Press the MENU or MENU/SELknob to select the option.

Submenus

A single right arrow indicates that asubmenu with other options isavailable.

A double right arrow indicates that asecond submenu with other optionsis available.



Activating a Setting

1. Press the MENU or MENU/SELknob to enter thedisplayed menu.

2. Turn the MENU or MENU/SELknob to display the setting.

3. Press the MENU or MENU/SELknob to activate the setting.

Setting a Value


2. Turn the MENU or MENU/SELknob to change the current valueof the setting.

3. Press the MENU or MENU/SELknob to confirm the setting.

Turning a Function On or Off


2. Turn the MENU or MENU/SELknob to turn the function onor off.


Entering a Character Sequence


2. Turn the MENU or MENU/SELknob to adjust the highlightedcharacter.

3. Press the MENU or MENU/SELknob to select the character.

Press the BACK button to delete thelast character in the sequence orpress and hold to delete the entirecharacter sequence.



Menu System (Uplevel)

The menu system for the uplevelinfotainment system appears onthe display screen.

Controls

The MENU or MENU/SEL knob andthe BACK button are used tonavigate the menu system.

MENU or MENU/SEL Knob:Press to:. Enter the menu system.. Select or activate the highlighted

menu option.. Confirm a set value.. Turn a system setting on or off.

Turn to:. Highlight a menu option.. Select a value.

BACK: Press to:. Exit a menu.. Return from a submenu screen

to the previous menu screen.. Delete the last character in a

sequence.

Selecting a Menu Option

1. Turn the MENU or MENU/SELknob to move thehighlighted bar.

2. Press the MENU or MENU/SELknob to select the highlightedoption.

Submenus

An arrow on the right‐hand edge ofthe menu indicates that it has asubmenu with other options.

Activating a Setting

1. Turn the MENU or MENU/SELknob to highlight the setting.

2. Press the MENU or MENU/SELknob to activate the setting.



Setting a Value

1. Turn the MENU or MENU/SELknob to change the current valueof the setting.


Turning a Function On or Off

1. Turn the MENU or MENU/SELknob to highlight the function.

2. Press the MENU or MENU/SELknob to turn the function onor off.

Entering a Character Sequence

1. Turn the MENU or MENU/SELknob to highlight the character.

2. Press the MENU or MENU/SELknob to select the character.

Press the BACK button to delete thelast character in the sequence orpress and hold to delete the entirecharacter sequence.

Audio Settings

The audio settings can be set foreach radio band and each audioplayer source.

To quickly reset an audio settingvalue to 0:

1. Press the TONE button.

2. Select the audio setting.

3. Press and hold the MENU orMENU/SEL button until the valuechanges to 0.

Press the BACK button to go backto the Tone Settings menu.

Adjusting the Treble, Midrange,and Bass


2. Select Treble, Midrange,or Bass.

3. Select the value.


Adjusting the Fader and Balance


2. Select Fader or Balance.

3. Select the value.




Adjusting the EQ (Equalizer)

For vehicles that have an equalizer:


2. Select EQ presets.

3. Select the setting.


System Settings

Configuring the Number ofFavorite Pages

To configure the number of availablefavorite pages:

1. Press the CONFIG button.

2. Select Radio Settings.

3. Select Radio Favorites.

4. Select the number of availablefavorite pages.

5. Press the BACK button to goback to the SystemConfiguration menu.

Auto Volume

The auto volume featureautomatically adjusts the radiovolume to compensate for road andwind noise as the vehicle speeds upor slows down, so that the volumelevel is consistent.

The level of volume compensationcan be selected, or the auto volumefeature can be turned off.



3. Select Auto Volume.


5. Press the BACK button togo back to the SystemConfiguration menu.

Maximum Startup Volume

The maximum volume played whenthe radio is first turned on canbe set.



3. Select Maximum StartupVolume.


5. Press the BACK button togo back to the SystemConfiguration menu.



Radio

AM-FM Radio

Control Buttons

The buttons used to control theradio are:

BAND: Press to turn the radio onand choose between AM, FM, andXM™, if equipped.

MENU or MENU/SEL: Turn tonavigate the available menus and tosearch for stations.

INFO: Press to display additionalinformation that may be available forthe current song.

g orl : Press to search forstations.

FAV: Press to open the favoriteslist and select the favorites page.

1 to 6: Press to select presetstations.

AS (Autostore): Press to open theautostore list.

RDS (Radio Data System)

The radio may have RDS. The RDSfeature is available for use only onFM stations that broadcast RDSinformation. This feature only workswhen the information from the radiostation is available. In rare cases, aradio station could broadcastincorrect information that causes theradio features to work improperly.If this happens, contact the radiostation.

While the radio is tuned to anFM-RDS station, the station nameor call letters display.

Radio Menus

Radio menus are available for AMand FM.

Turn the MENU or MENU/SEL knobto open the main radio menu forthat band.

Selecting a Band

Press the BAND button to chooseAM, FM, or XM, if equipped. Thelast station that was playing startsplaying again.

Selecting a Station

Seek Tuning

If the radio station is not known:

Briefly pressg orl toautomatically search for the nextavailable station. If a station is notfound, the radio switches to a moresensitive search level. If a stationstill is not found, the frequency thatwas last active begins to play.

If the radio station is known:

Press and holdg orl until thestation on the display is reached,then release the button.

Manual Tuning

Turn the MENU or MENU/SEL knobto select the frequency on thedisplay.



Favorites List

1. Turn the MENU or MENU/SEL knob.

2. Select Favorites List.

3. Select the station.

Station Lists


2. Select AM or FM Station List. Allreceivable stations in the currentreception area are displayed. If astation list has not been created,an automatic station searchis done.


Category Lists

Most stations that broadcast anRDS program type code specify thetype of programming transmitted.Some stations change the programtype code depending on thecontent. The system stores theRDS stations sorted by programtype in the FM category list.

To search for a programming typedetermined by station:


2. Select FM category list. A list ofall programming types availabledisplays.

3. Select the programming type.A list of stations that transmitprogramming of the selectedtype displays.


The category lists are updated whenthe station lists are updated.

Updating Station & Category Lists

If stations stored in the station listcan no longer be received:


2. Select Update AM or FM StationList, if the stations stored in thestation list are no longerreceived. A station search will becompleted and the first station inthe updated list will play.

To cancel the station search, pressthe MENU or MENU/SEL knob.

Storing a Station as a Favorite

Stations from all bands can bestored in any order in the favoritepages.

Up to six stations can be stored ineach favorite page and the numberof available favorite pages canbe set.

Storing Stations

To store the station to a position inthe list, press the correspondingbutton 1 to 6 until a beep is heard.

Retrieving Stations

Press the FAV button to open afavorite page or to switch to anotherfavorite page. Briefly press one ofthe 1 to 6 buttons to retrieve thestation.



Autostore Stations

AS (Autostore): Autostoresearches and stores six FM andsix AM stations with the strongestsignal. To use autostore:

1. Press BAND to select FM or AM.

2. Press AS for at leasttwo seconds until a beepsounds. SEARCH displays onthe radio, followed by thenumber of stations found.

3. The radio will automatically storethe six strongest stations foundas autostore presets.

Press the AS button to alternatebetween the autostore stations andfavorites.

AS displays on the radio when usingautostore presets.

Autostore does not deletepreviously stored favorite stations.

Autostore does not function withXM radio stations.

Satellite RadioVehicles with an XM Satellite Radiotuner and a valid XM Satellite Radiosubscription can receive XMprogramming.

XM Satellite Radio Service

XM is a satellite radio service basedin the 48 contiguous United Statesand 10 Canadian provinces. XMSatellite Radio has a wide variety ofprogramming and commercial-freemusic, coast to coast, and indigital-quality sound. A service feeis required to receive the XMservice. If XM Service needs to bereactivated, the radio will display"No Subscription Please Renew" onchannel XM1. For more information,contact XM at www.xmradio.com or1-800-929-2100 in the U.S., andwww.xmradio.ca or1-877-438-9677 in Canada.

Control Buttons

The buttons used to control theXM radio are:

BAND: Press to turn the radio onand choose between AM, FM,and XM.

g orl : Press to go to theprevious or next channel.

FAV: Press to open thefavorites list.

1 to 6: Press to select a favorite.

MENU or MENU/SEL: Turn toselect a channel.

INFO: Press to display additionalinformation that may be availableabout the current song.

k (Play/Pause): Press to pausetime shifted content, if equipped.



Selecting the XM Band

Press the BAND button to choosebetween the AM, FM, and XMbands. The last channel played inthat band begins to play when thatband is selected.

XM Categories

XM channels are organized incategories.

Removing or Adding Categories

Channels in a category that havebeen removed can still be accessedby usingg orl, or the MENU orMENU/SEL knob.

To add or remove categories:



3. Select XM Categories.

4. Turn the MENU or MENU/SELknob to highlight the category.

5. Press the MENU or MENU/SELknob to remove or add thecategory.

Selecting an XM Channel

XM channels can be selected byusingg,l, the MENU or MENU/SEL knob, or the Menu system.

Selecting a Channel Usinggorl. Press and releaseg orl to

go to the previous or nextchannel.

. Press and holdg orl toscroll through the previous ornext channel until the channel isreached.

Selecting a Channel Using theMENU or MENU/SEL Knob

To select an XM channel using theMENU or MENU/SEL knob:

Turn the MENU or MENU/SEL knobto highlight an XM channel. Thechannel is selected after a shortdelay.

To select a channel using the MENUor MENU/SEL knob:

1. Turn the MENU or MENU/SELknob and select Channel List.

2. Select the desired channel.

Selecting a Channel Using theMenu System


2. Select XM Category List.

3. Select the category.

4. Select the channel.

Storing an XM Channel as aFavorite

Channels from all bands can bestored in any order in the favoritepages.

Up to six channels can be stored ineach favorite page and the numberof available favorite pages canbe set.



Storing a Channel as a Favorite

To store the channel to a positionin the list, press and hold thecorresponding 1 to 6 button untilthe channel can be heard again.

Retrieving Channels

Press the FAV button to open afavorite page or to change toanother favorite page. Briefly pressone of the 1 to 6 buttons to retrievethe channel.

XM Messages

XL (Explicit LanguageChannels): These channels, orany others, can be blockedby request, by calling1-800-929-2100 in the U.S., and1-877-438-9677 in Canada.

XM Updating: The encryption codein the receiver is being updated.No action is required. This processshould take no longer than30 seconds.

Loading XM: The audio system isacquiring and processing audio andtext data. No action is needed. Thismessage should disappear shortly.

Channel Off Air: This channel isnot currently in service. Tune in toanother channel.

Channel Unauth: This channel isblocked or cannot be received withyour XM Subscription package.

Channel Unavailable: Thispreviously assigned channel is nolonger assigned. Tune to anotherstation.

No Artist Info: The system isworking properly. No artistinformation is available at this timeon this channel.

No Title Info: The system isworking properly. No song titleinformation is available at this timeon this channel.

No CAT Info: The system isworking properly. No categoryinformation is available at this timeon this channel.

No Information: The system isworking properly. No text orinformational messages areavailable at this time on thischannel.

No Subscription Please Renew:XM subscription needs to bereactivated. Contact XM atwww.xmradio.com or1-800-929-2100 in the U.S., andwww.xmradio.ca or1-877-438-9677 in Canada.

No XM Signal: The system isworking properly. The vehicle maybe in a location where the XM signalis being blocked. When the vehicleis moved into an open area, thesignal should return.

CAT Not Found: The system isworking properly. There are nochannels available for the selectedcategory.

XM Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0,this message alternates with theXM Radio eight‐digit radio ID label.This label is needed to activatethe service.



Unknown: If this message isreceived when tuned to channel 0,there could be a receiver fault.Consult with your dealer.

Check Antenna: If this messagedoes not clear within a short periodof time, the receiver could have afault. Consult with your dealer.

XM Not Available: If this messagedoes not clear within a short periodof time, the receiver could have afault. Consult with your dealer.

Radio ReceptionFrequency interference and staticcan occur during normal radioreception if items such as cell phonechargers, vehicle convenienceaccessories, and external electronicdevices are plugged into theaccessory power outlet. If there isinterference or static, unplug theitem from the accessory poweroutlet.

FM

FM signals only reach about 16 to65 km (10 to 40 mi). Although theradio has a built-in electronic circuitthat automatically works to reduceinterference, some static can occur,especially around tall buildings orhills, causing the sound to fade inand out.

AM

The range for most AM stations isgreater than for FM, especially atnight. The longer range can causestation frequencies to interfere witheach other. For better radioreception, most AM radio stationsboost the power levels during theday, and then reduce these levelsduring the night. Static can alsooccur when things like storms andpower lines interfere with radioreception. When this happens, tryreducing the treble on the radio.

XM™ Satellite Radio Service

XM Satellite Radio Service givesdigital radio reception from coast tocoast in the 48 contiguous UnitedStates, and in Canada. Just as withFM, tall buildings or hills caninterfere with satellite radio signals,causing the sound to fade in andout. In addition, traveling or standingunder heavy foliage, bridges,garages, or tunnels may cause lossof the XM signal for a period of time.

Cellular Phone Usage

Cellular phone usage may causeinterference with the vehicle's radio.This interference may occur whenmaking or receiving phone calls,charging the phone's battery,or simply having the phone on. Thisinterference can cause an increasedlevel of static while listening to theradio. If static is received whilelistening to the radio, unplug thecellular phone and turn it off.



Satellite Radio AntennaThe XM Satellite Radio antenna islocated on the roof of the vehicle.Keep the antenna clear ofobstructions for clear radioreception.

If the vehicle has a sunroof, theperformance of the XM system maybe affected if the sunroof is open.

Multi-Band AntennaThe multi-band antenna is on theroof of the vehicle. The antenna isused for the AM‐FM radio, OnStar,the XM Satellite Radio ServiceSystem, and GPS (GlobalPositioning System), if the vehiclehas these features. Keep theantenna clear of obstructions forclear reception.

Audio Players

CD PlayerThe CD player can play audio CDsand MP3 CDs.

The CD player will not play8 cm (3 in) CDs.

Care of CDs

Sound quality can be reduced dueto disc quality, recording method,quality of the music recorded, andhow the disc has been handled.Handle discs carefully and storethem in their original cases or otherprotective cases away from directsunlight and dust. If the bottomsurface of a disc is damaged, thedisc may not play properly or at all.Do not touch the bottom surface ofa disc while handling it; this coulddamage the surface. Pick up discsby grasping the outer edges or theedge of the hole and the outer edge.

If the bottom surface of a disc isdirty, take a soft lint‐free cloth,or dampen a clean soft cloth in a

mild neutral detergent solutionmixed with water, and clean it.Wipe the disc from the center tothe outer edge.

Care of the CD Player

Do not add a label to a disc, as itcould get caught in the CD player.If a label is needed, label the top ofthe recorded disc with amarking pen.

Do not use disc lens cleanersbecause they could contaminate thelens of the disc optics and damagethe CD player.

Notice: If a label is added to aCD, more than one CD is insertedinto the slot at a time, or anattempt is made to play scratchedor damaged CDs, the CD playercould be damaged. While usingthe CD player, use only CDs ingood condition without any label,load one CD at a time, and keepthe CD player and the loading slotfree of foreign materials, liquids,and debris.



Control Buttons

The buttons used to control theCD player are:

CD/AUX: Press to use theCD player.

l org : Press to select tracks orto fast forward or rewind within atrack.

INFO: Press to display additionalinformation about the current trackthat may be available.

TUNE: Turn to select tracks.

MENU or MENU/SEL: Turn toenter the menu.

SELECT: Press to select an item.

Y : Press to eject the disc.

Inserting a CD

With the printed side facing up,insert a disc into the CD slot until itis drawn in.

Removing a CD

PressY.

The disc is pushed out of theCD slot.

If the disc is not removed after it isejected, it is pulled back in after afew seconds.

Playing a CD or MP3 CD

Press the CD/AUX button if there isa disc in the player; it beginsplaying.

Information about the disc andcurrent track is shown on thedisplay depending on thedata stored.

Selecting a CD Track

Using the control buttons:

. Pressg orl to select theprevious or next track.

. Turn the TUNE knob.

Using the CD Menu:


2. Select Tracks list.

3. Select the track.

Playing Tracks in Random Order

Turn the MENU or MENU/SEL knoband then set Shuffle Songs to On.

Fast Forward and Rewind

Press and holdl org to fastforward or rewind within thecurrent track.



Selecting an MP3 Track

Using the control buttons:

. Pressg orl to select theprevious or next track.

. Turn the TUNE knob.

Using the CD Menu:


2. Select Playlists/Folders.

3. Select the playlist or folder.


Searching for MP3 Tracks

The search feature may take sometime to display the information afterreading the disc due to the amountof information stored on the disc.FM automatically plays while thedisc is being read.

Tracks can be searched by:. Playlists. Artists. Albums

. Song Titles

. Genres

. Folder View

To search for tracks:


2. Select Search.

3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums,Song Titles, Genres,or Folder View.


Auxiliary DevicesThe optional AUX input allowsportable devices to connect to thevehicle using the 3.5 mm (1/8 in)auxiliary jack or USB port.

THe SD Slot allows SD cards to beinserted and used with the audiosystem.

Portable devices are controlled byusing the menu system described inOperation on page 7‑6.

A. 3.5 mm (1/8 in) AuxiliaryInput Jack

B. SD Card Slot

C. USB Port

3.5mm Jack

Connect a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) cable tothe auxiliary input jack to use aportable audio player.

Playback of an audio device that isconnected to the 3.5 mm jack canonly be controlled using the controlson the device.



Adjusting the Volume

Turn the O knob to adjust thevolume of the infotainment systemafter the volume level has been seton the portable audio device.

USB Port

For vehicles with a USB port, thefollowing devices may be connectedand controlled by the infotainmentsystem.. iPods. PlaysForSure Devices (PFDs). USB Drives. Zunes®

Not all iPods, PFDs, USB drives,and Zunes are compatible with theinfotainment system. Devices arealso charged while plugged into theUSB port.

Connecting and Controllingan iPod™

Not all iPods can be controlled bythe infotainment system.

Connecting an iPod

Connect the iPod to the USB port.

Searching for a Track

Tracks that are found can besearched for by:. Playlists. Artists. Albums. Song Titles. Podcasts. Genres. Audio Books. Composers



2. Select Search.

3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums,Song Titles, Podcasts, Genres,Audio Books, or Composers.


Shuffle

Turn the MENU or MENU/SEL knoband set Shuffle Songs (Random) toOn or Off, then press the BACKbutton to return to the main screen.

On: Plays tracks in the currentfolder in random order.

Off: Plays tracks in the currentfolder in sequential order.

Repeat

Turn the MENU or MENU/SEL knoband set Repeat to On or Off, thenpress the BACK button to return tothe main screen.

On: Repeats the current track.

Off: Starts playback from thebeginning of the current track afterthe last track finishes.



Connecting and Controlling aPlaysForSure Device (PFD)or Zune

Connecting a PFD or Zune

Connect the PFD or Zune to theUSB port.


Tracks can be searched for by:. Playlists. Artists. Albums. Song Titles. Podcasts. Genres



2. Select Search.

3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums,Song Titles, Podcasts,or Genres.


Shuffle Functionality

Turn the MENU or MENU/SEL knoband set Shuffle Songs (Random) toOn or Off.

On: Plays current tracks in randomorder.

Off: Plays current tracks insequential order.

Repeat Functionality

Turn the MENU or MENU/SEL knoband set Repeat to On or Off.

Repeat On: Repeats the currenttrack.

Repeat Off: Starts playback fromthe beginning of the current trackafter the last track finishes.

Connecting and Controlling aUSB Drive

The infotainment system can onlyplay back .mp3 and .wma files froma USB drive.

Only the first 10,000 songs arerecognized on the device.

When a device is not supported, themessage “No supported data found.You can safely disconnect thedevice” appears.

Connecting a USB Drive

Connect the USB drive to theUSB port.


It is normal for the search featureto take some time to display theinformation after reading the devicedue to the amount of informationstored.



Files that do not have any metadata stored in the ID3 tag displayas Unknown.

Tracks can be searched for by:. Playlists*. Artists. Albums. Song Titles. Genres. Folder View

*This only displays if a playlist isfound on the device.



2. Select Search.

3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums,Song Titles, Genres,or Folder View.


Shuffle Functionality

Turn the MENU or MENU/SEL knoband set Shuffle Songs (Random) toOn or Off.

On: Plays current tracks in randomorder.

Off: Plays current tracks insequential order.

Repeat Functionality

Turn the MENU or MENU/SEL knoband set Repeat to On or Off.

Repeat On: Repeats the currenttrack.

Repeat Off: Starts playback fromthe beginning of the current trackafter the last track finishes.

Phone

Bluetooth (Overview)For vehicles equipped withBluetooth capability, the system caninteract with many cell phones,allowing:. Placement and receipt of calls in

a hands-free mode.. Sharing of the cell phone’s

address book or contact list withthe vehicle.

To minimize driver distraction,before driving, and with the vehicleparked:. Become familiar with the

features of the cell phone.Organize the phone book andcontact lists clearly and deleteduplicate or rarely used entries.If possible, program speed dialor other shortcuts.

. Review the controls andoperation of the infotainmentsystem.



. Pair cell phone(s) to the vehicle.The system may not work withall cell phones. See “Pairing” inthis section for more information.

. If the cell phone has voicedialing capability, learn to usethat feature to access theaddress book or contact list. See“Voice Pass-Thru” in this sectionfor more information.

. See “Storing and Deleting PhoneNumbers” in this section formore information.

{ WARNING

When using a cell phone, it canbe distracting to look too long ortoo often at the screen of thephone or the infotainment(navigation) system. Taking youreyes off the road too long or toooften could cause a crashresulting in injury or death.Focus your attention on driving.

Vehicles with a Bluetooth systemcan use a Bluetooth‐capable cellphone with a Hands‐Free Profile tomake and receive phone calls. Theinfotainment system and voicerecognition are used to control thesystem. The system can be usedwhile in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY. The range of theBluetooth system can be up to9.1 m (30 ft). Not all phones supportall functions and not all phones workwith the Bluetooth system. Seewww.gm.com/bluetooth for moreinformation about compatiblephones.

Bluetooth Controls

Use the buttons located on theinfotainment system and thesteering wheel to operate theBluetooth system.


b / g (Push To Talk) : Press toanswer incoming calls, confirmsystem information, and start voicerecognition.

$ /i (End Call/Mute): Press toend a call, reject a call, or cancel anoperation.

Infotainment System Controls

If equipped, the infotainment systemallows certain controls to beselected on the infotainment display.See the OnStar Owner’s manualunder "OnStar Screen UserInterface" for more information.

For information about how tonavigate the menu system using theinfotainment controls, see Operationon page 7‑6.

5 \ > (PHONE/MUTE): Press toenter the Phone main menu. Pressto mute the audio system.

Voice Recognition

The voice recognition system usescommands to control the systemand dial phone numbers.

Noise: The system may notrecognize voice commands if thereis too much background noise.



When to Speak: A tone sounds toindicate that the system is ready fora voice command. Wait for the toneand then speak.

How to Speak: Speak clearly in acalm and natural voice.

Audio System

When using the Bluetooth system,sound comes through the vehicle'sfront audio system speakers andoverrides the audio system. Use theVOL/ O knob during a call tochange the volume level. Theadjusted volume level remains inmemory for later calls. The systemmaintains a minimum volume level.

Other Information

The Bluetooth® word mark andlogos are owned by the Bluetooth®

SIG, Inc. and any use of such marksby General Motors is under license.Other trademarks and trade namesare those of their respective owners.

See Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13‑16 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and Industry CanadaStandards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.

Bluetooth (InfotainmentControls)For information about how tonavigate the menu system using theinfotainment controls, see Operationon page 7‑6.

Pairing

A Bluetooth‐enabled cell phonemust be paired to the Bluetoothsystem and then connected to thevehicle before it can be used. Seeyour cell phone manufacturer's userguide for Bluetooth functions beforepairing the cell phone. If a Bluetoothphone is not connected, calls will bemade using OnStar Hands‐FreeCalling, if available. Refer to theOnStar Owner's Guide for moreinformation.

Pairing Information. A Bluetooth phone with MP3

capability cannot be paired tothe vehicle as a phone and anMP3 player at the same time.

. Up to five cell phones can bepaired to the Bluetooth system.

. The pairing process is disabledwhen the vehicle is moving.

. Pairing only needs to becompleted once, unless thepairing information on the cellphone changes or the cell phoneis deleted from the system.

. Only one paired cell phone canbe connected to the Bluetoothsystem at a time.

. If multiple paired cell phones arewithin range of the system, thesystem connects to the firstavailable paired cell phone in theorder that they were first pairedto the system. To link to adifferent paired phone, see“Linking to a Different Phone”later in this section.



Pairing a Phone


2. Select Phone Settings.

3. Select Bluetooth.

4. Select Pair Device (Phone).A four‐digit PersonalIdentification Number (PIN)appears on the display.The PIN is used in Step 6.

5. Start the pairing process on thecell phone to be paired to thevehicle. See the cell phonemanufacturer's user guide forinformation on this process.

6. Locate the device named“Your Vehicle” in the list onthe cell phone. Follow theinstructions on the cell phone toenter the PIN provided in Step 4.After the PIN is successfullyentered, the system prompts youto provide a name for the pairedcell phone. This name will beused to indicate which phonesare paired and connected tothe vehicle.

The system responds with“<Phone name> has beensuccessfully paired” after thepairing process is complete.

7. Repeat Steps 1 through 6 to pairadditional phones.

Listing All Paired and ConnectedPhones




4. Select Device List.

Deleting a Paired Phone





5. Select the phone to delete andfollow the on screen prompts.

Linking to a Different Phone

To link to a different phone, the newphone must be in the vehicle andavailable to be connected to theBluetooth system before theprocess is started.





5. Select the new phone tolink to and follow the onscreen prompts.

If delete is selected, thehighlighted phone willbe deleted.



Making a Call UsingPhone Book

For cell phones that support thephone book feature, the Bluetoothsystem can use the contacts storedon your cell phone to make calls.See your cell phone phonemanufacturer's user guide orcontact your wireless provider tofind out if this feature is supportedby your phone.

When a cell phone supports thephone book feature, the PhoneBook and Call Lists menus areautomatically available.

The Phone Book menu allows youto access the phone book stored inthe cell phone to make a call.

The Call Lists menu allows you toaccess the phone numbers from theIncoming Calls, Outgoing Calls, andMissed Calls menus on your cellphone to make a call.

To make a call using the PhoneBook menu:

1. Press 5 \ > once or twice(depending on the radio).

2. Select Phone Book.

3. Search through the list byselecting the letter group thephone book entry begins with,or press the MENU or MENU/SEL button to scroll through theentire list of names/numbers inthe phone book.

4. Select the name or number youwant to call.

To make a call using the CallLists menu:


2. Select Call Lists.

3. Select the Incoming Calls,Outgoing Calls, or MissedCalls list.

4. Select the name or number youwant to call.

Making a Call

To make a call:


2. Enter the character sequence.See “Entering a CharacterSequence” in Operation onpage 7‑6 for more information.

3. Select Call to start dialing thenumber.

Accepting or Declining a Call

When an incoming call is received,the infotainment system mutes anda ring tone is heard in the vehicle.

Accepting a Call

Turn the MENU or MENU/SEL knobto “Answer” and press the MENU orMENU/SEL knob to accept the call.

Declining a Call

Turn the MENU or MENU/SEL knobto “Decline” and press the MENU orMENU/SEL knob to decline the call.



Call Waiting

Call waiting must be supported onthe Bluetooth phone and enabled bythe wireless service carrier to work.

Accepting a Call

Turn the MENU or MENU/SEL knobto “Answer” and press the MENU orMENU/SEL knob to accept the call.

Declining a Call

Turn the MENU or MENU/SEL knobto “Decline” and press the MENU orMENU/SEL knob to decline the call.

Switching Between Calls(Call Waiting Calls Only)

To switch between calls:

1. Turn or press the MENU orMENU/SEL knob.

2. Select Switch Call fromthe menu.

Conference Calling

Conference calling and three‐waycalling must be supported on theBluetooth phone and enabled by thewireless service carrier to work.

To start a conference while in acurrent call:

1. Turn or press the MENU orMENU/SEL knob.

2. Select Enter Number.

3. Enter the character sequencethen select Call. See “Entering aCharacter Sequence” inOperation on page 7‑6 for moreinformation.

4. After the call has been placed,turn or press the MENU orMENU/SEL knob and chooseMerge Calls.

5. To add more callers to theconference call, repeat Steps 1through 4. The number of callersthat can be added is limited byyour wireless service carrier.

Ending a Call

Turn or press the MENU or MENU/SEL knob and select Hang Up.

Muting a Call

To Mute a Call

Turn or press the MENU or MENU/SEL knob and select Mute Call.

To Cancel Mute

Turn or press the MENU or MENU/SEL knob and select Mute Call.

Dual Tone Multi-Frequency(DTMF) Tones

The in‐vehicle Bluetooth system cansend numbers during a call. This isused when calling a menu‐drivenphone system.

1. Turn or press the MENU orMENU/SEL knob and selectEnter Number.

2. Enter the character sequence.See “Entering a CharacterSequence” in Operation onpage 7‑6 for more information.



Bluetooth(Voice Recognition)

Using Voice Recognition

To use voice recognition, pressthe b / g button located on thesteering wheel. Use the commandsbelow for the various voice features.For additional information, say“Help” while you are in a voicerecognition menu.

Pairing

A Bluetooth‐enabled cell phonemust be paired to the Bluetoothsystem and then connected to thevehicle before it can be used. Seeyour cell phone manufacturer's userguide for Bluetooth functions beforepairing the cell phone. If a Bluetoothphone is not connected, calls will bemade using OnStar Hands‐FreeCalling, if available. Refer to theOnStar Owner's Guide for moreinformation.

Pairing Information. A Bluetooth phone with MP3

capability cannot be paired tothe vehicle as a phone and anMP3 player at the same time.

. Up to five cell phones can bepaired to the Bluetooth system.

. The pairing process is disabledwhen the vehicle is moving.

. Pairing only needs to becompleted once, unless thepairing information on the cellphone changes or the cell phoneis deleted from the system.

. Only one paired cell phone canbe connected to the Bluetoothsystem at a time.

. If multiple paired cell phones arewithin range of the system, thesystem connects to the firstavailable paired cell phone in theorder that they were first pairedto the system. To link to adifferent paired phone, see“Linking to a Different Phone”later in this section.

Pairing a Phone

1. Press b / g. The systemresponds “Ready,” followedby a tone.

2. Say “Bluetooth.” This commandcan be skipped.

3. Say “Pair.” The system respondswith instructions and a four‐digitPersonal Identification Number(PIN). The PIN is used in Step 5.

4. Start the pairing process on thecell phone that you want to pair.For help with this process, seeyour cell phone manufacturer'suser guide.

5. Locate the device named “YourVehicle” in the list on the cellphone. Follow the instructionson the cell phone to enter thePIN provided in Step 3. After thePIN is successfully entered, thesystem prompts you to provide aname for the paired cell phone.



This name will be used toindicate which phones arepaired and connected to thevehicle. The system respondswith “<Phone name> has beensuccessfully paired” after thepairing process is complete.

6. Repeat Steps 1 through 5 to pairadditional phones.

Listing All Paired and ConnectedPhones

The system can list all cell phonespaired to it. If a paired cell phone isalso connected to the vehicle, thesystem responds with “is connected”after that phone name.

1. Press b / g. The systemresponds “Ready,” followed bya tone.

2. Say “Bluetooth.”

3. Say “List.”

Deleting a Paired Phone

If the phone name you want todelete is unknown, see “Listing AllPaired and Connected Phones.”



3. Say “Delete.” The system asksfor which phone to delete.

4. Say the name of the phone youwant to delete.

Connecting to a Different Phone

To connect to a different cell phone,the Bluetooth system looks for thenext available cell phone in theorder in which all available cellphones were paired. Depending onwhich cell phone you want toconnect to, you may have to usethis command several times.



3. Say “Change phone.”. If another cell phone is

found, the response will be“<Phone name> is nowconnected.”

. If another cell phone is notfound, the original phoneremains connected.

Storing and Deleting PhoneNumbers

The system can store up to30 phone numbers as name tagsin the Hands‐Free Directory that isshared between the Bluetooth andOnStar systems.

The following commands are usedto delete and store phone numbers.

Store: This command will store aphone number, or a group ofnumbers as a name tag.

Digit Store: This command allowsa phone number to be stored as aname tag by entering the digitsone at a time.



Delete: This command is used todelete individual name tags.

Delete All Name Tags: Thiscommand deletes all stored nametags in the Hands‐Free CallingDirectory and the DestinationsDirectory.

Using the “Store” Command


2. Say “Store.”

3. Say the phone number or groupof numbers you want to store allat once with no pauses, thenfollow the directions given by thesystem to save a name tag forthis number.

Using the “Digit Store” Command

If an unwanted number isrecognized by the system,say “Clear” at any time to clearthe last number.

To hear all of the numbersrecognized by the system, say“Verify” at any time.


2. Say “Digit Store.”

3. Say each digit, one at a time,that you want to store. Aftereach digit is entered, the systemrepeats back the digit it heardfollowed by a tone. After the lastdigit has been entered, say“Store,” and then follow thedirections given by the system tosave a name tag for this number.

Using the “Delete” Command


2. Say “Delete.”

3. Say the name tag you wantto delete.

Using the “Delete All Name Tags”Command

This command deletes all storedname tags in the Hands FreeCalling Directory and theDestinations Directory.

To delete all name tags:


2. Say “Delete all name tags.”

Listing Stored Numbers

The list command will list all storednumbers and name tags.

Using the “List” Command


2. Say “Directory.”

3. Say “Hands Free Calling.”

4. Say “List.”



Making a Call

Calls can be made using thefollowing commands.

Dial or Call: The dial or callcommand can be usedinterchangeably to dial a phonenumber or a stored name tag.

Digit Dial: This command allows aphone number to be dialed byentering the digits one at a time.

Re‐dial: This command is usedto dial the last number used on thecell phone.

Using the “Dial” or “Call”Command


2. Say “Dial” or “Call.”

3. Say the entire number withoutpausing or say the name tag.

Once connected, the person calledwill be heard through the audiospeakers.

Using the “Digit Dial” Command

The digit dial command allows aphone number to be dialed byentering the digits one at a time.After each digit is entered, thesystem repeats back the digit itheard followed by a tone.

If an unwanted number isrecognized by the system, say“Clear” at any time to clear thelast number.

To hear all of the numbersrecognized by the system, say“Verify” at any time.


2. Say “Digit Dial.”

3. Say each digit, one at a time,that you want to dial. After eachdigit is entered, the systemrepeats back the digit it heardfollowed by a tone. After thelast digit has been entered,say “Dial.”


Using the “Re‐dial” Command


2. After the tone, say “Re‐dial.”The system dials the lastnumber called from theconnected cell phone.


Receiving a Call

When an incoming call is received,the audio system mutes and a ringtone is heard in the vehicle.

. Press b / g to answer the call.

. Press $ /i to ignore a call.



Call Waiting

Call waiting must be supported onthe cell phone and enabled by thewireless service carrier.

. Press b / g to answer anincoming call when another callis active. The original call isplaced on hold.

. Press b / g again to return tothe original call.

. To ignore the incoming call, noaction is required.

. Press $ /i to disconnect thecurrent call and switch to thecall on hold.

Three‐Way Calling

Three‐way calling must besupported on the cell phone andenabled by the wireless servicecarrier.

1. While on a call, press b / g.2. Say “Three‐way call.”

3. Use the dial or call command todial the number of the third partyto be called.

4. Once the call is connected,press b / g to link allcallers together.

Ending a Call

Press $ /i to end a call.

Muting a Call

During a call, all sounds from insidethe vehicle can be muted so that theperson on the other end of the callcannot hear them.

To mute a call, press b / g, andthen say “Mute Call.”

To cancel mute, press b / g, andthen say “Un‐mute Call.”

Transferring a Call

Audio can be transferred betweenthe Bluetooth system and thecell phone.

The cell phone must be paired andconnected with the Bluetoothsystem before a call can betransferred. The connection processcan take up to two minutes after theignition is turned to ON/RUN.

To Transfer Audio from theBluetooth System to a Cell Phone

During a call with the audio in thevehicle:

1. Press b / g.2. Say “Transfer Call.”

To Transfer Audio to the BluetoothSystem from a Cell Phone

During a call with the audio on thecell phone, press b / g. The audiotransfers to the vehicle. If the audiodoes not transfer to the vehicle, usethe audio transfer feature on thecell phone. See your cell phonemanufacturer's user guide formore information.



Voice Pass-Thru

Voice pass‐thru allows access to thevoice recognition commands on thecell phone. See your cell phonemanufacturer's user guide to see ifthe cell phone supports this feature.

To access contacts stored in thecell phone:


2. Say “Bluetooth.” This commandcan be skipped.

3. Say “Voice.” The systemresponds “OK, accessing<phone name>.”

The cell phone's normal promptmessages will go through their cycleaccording to the phone's operatinginstructions.

Dual Tone Multi-Frequency(DTMF) Tones

The Bluetooth system can sendnumbers and the numbers stored asname tags during a call. You canuse this feature when calling amenu‐driven phone system.Account numbers can also bestored for use.

Sending a Number or Name TagDuring a Call


2. Say “Dial.”

3. Say the number or name tagto send.

Clearing the System

Unless information is deleted out ofthe in‐vehicle Bluetooth system, itwill be retained indefinitely. Thisincludes all saved name tags in thephone book and phone pairinginformation. For information on howto delete this information, see theprevious sections on “Deleting aPaired Phone” and “DeletingName Tags.”



Trademarks andLicense Agreements

Manufactured under license underU.S. Patent #'s: 5,451,942;5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762;6,487,535 & other U.S. andworldwide patents issued &pending. DTS and the Symbol areregistered trademarks and DTSDigital Surround and the DTS logosare trademarks of DTS Inc.All Rights Reserved.

Manufactured under license fromDolby Laboratories. Dolby and thedouble-D symbol are trademarks ofDolby Laboratories.

“Made for iPod and iPhone” meansthat an electronic accessory hasbeen designed to connectspecifically to iPod and has beencertified by the developer to meetApple performance standards.

iPod is a trademark of AppleComputer, Inc., registered in theU.S. and other countries.

Fees and Taxes — Subscription fee,taxes, one time activation fee, andother fees may apply. Subscriptionfee is consumer only. All fees andprogramming subject to change.Subscriptions subject to CustomerAgreement available atwww.xmradio.com. XM™ serviceonly available in the 48 contiguousUnited States and Canada*.

*Canada — Some deterioration ofservice may occur in extremenorthern latitudes. This is beyondthe control of XM™ Satellite Radio.Explicit Language Notice —Channels with frequent explicitlanguage are indicated with an“XL” preceding the channel name.



Channel blocking is available forXM Satellite Radio receivers bynotifying XM at:. USA Customers — Visit

www.xmradio.com or call1-800-929-2100.

. Canadian Customers — Visitwww.xmradio.ca or call1-877-438-9677.

It is prohibited to copy, decompile,disassemble, reverse engineer,hack, manipulate, or otherwisemake available any technology orsoftware incorporated in receiverscompatible with the XM™ SatelliteRadio System or that support theXM website, the Online Service orany of its content. Furthermore, theAMBER voice compression softwareincluded in this product is protectedby intellectual property rightsincluding patent rights, copyrights,and trade secrets of Digital VoiceSystems, Inc.

General Requirements:

1. A License Agreement from XM™is required for any product thatincorporates XM Technologyand/or for use of any of theXM marks to be manufactured,distributed or marketed in theXM Service Area.

2. For products to be distributed,marketed and/or sold in Canada,a separate agreement isrequired with Canadian SatelliteRadio Inc. (operating asXM Canada).

Music and video recognitiontechnology and related data areprovided by Gracenote®. Gracenoteis the industry standard in musicrecognition technology and

related content delivery.For more information, visitwww.gracenote.com.

CD, DVD, Blu-ray Disc, and musicand video-related data fromGracenote, Inc., copyright © 2000 topresent Gracenote. One or morepatents owned by Gracenote applyto this product and service. Seethe Gracenote website for anon-exhaustive list of applicableGracenote patents. Gracenote andCDDB, MusicID, Media VOCS, theGracenote logo and logotype, andthe “Powered by Gracenote” logoare either registered trademarks ortrademarks of Gracenote in theUnited States and/or othercountries.

If you require more informationregarding the use of theGracenote Service, visit:www.gracenote.com/corporate.

For the data provided byGracenote® Music RecognitionService, the content is notnecessarily guaranteed 100%.



Regarding the use of GracenoteMusic Recognition Service, whenthis product is used, it is necessaryto agree to the following articles.

Gracenote® End User License

This application or device containssoftware from Gracenote, Inc. ofEmeryville, California (“Gracenote”).The software from Gracenote (the“Gracenote Software”) enables thisapplication to perform disc and/orfile identification and obtainmusic-related information, includingname, artist, track, and titleinformation (“Gracenote Data”)from online servers or embeddeddatabases (collectively, “GracenoteServers”) and to perform otherfunctions. You may use GracenoteData only by means of the intendedEnd-User functions of thisapplication or device. You agreethat you will use Gracenote Data,the Gracenote Software, andGracenote Servers for your ownpersonal non-commercial use only.

You agree not to assign, copy,transfer or transmit the GracenoteSoftware or any Gracenote Data toany third party.

YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OREXPLOIT GRACENOTE DATA, THEGRACENOTE SOFTWARE, ORGRACENOTE SERVERS, EXCEPTAS EXPRESSLY PERMITTEDHEREIN. You agree that yournon-exclusive license to use theGracenote Data, the GracenoteSoftware, and Gracenote Serverswill terminate if you violate theserestrictions. If your licenseterminates, you agree to cease anyand all use of the Gracenote Data,the Gracenote Software, andGracenote Servers.

Gracenote reserves all rightsin Gracenote Data, theGracenote Software, and theGracenote Servers, including allownership rights.

Under no circumstances willGracenote become liable for anypayment to you for any informationthat you provide. You agree thatGracenote, Inc. may enforce itsrights under this Agreement againstyou directly in its own name.

The Gracenote service uses aunique identifier to track queries forstatistical purposes.

The purpose of a randomlyassigned numeric identifier is toallow the Gracenote service tocount queries without knowinganything about who you are. Formore information, see the web pagefor the Gracenote Privacy Policy forthe Gracenote service.

The Gracenote Software and eachitem of Gracenote Data are licensedto you “AS IS.” Gracenote makes norepresentations or warranties,express or implied, regarding theaccuracy of any Gracenote Datafrom in the Gracenote Servers.



Gracenote reserves the right todelete data from the GracenoteServers or to change datacategories for any cause thatGracenote deems sufficient.

No warranty is made that theGracenote Software or GracenoteServers are error-free or thatfunctioning of Gracenote Softwareor Gracenote Servers will beuninterrupted.

Gracenote is not obligated toprovide you with new enhanced oradditional data types or categoriesthat Gracenote may provide in thefuture and is free to discontinue itsservices at any time.

Gracenote disclaims all warrantiesexpress or implied, including, butnot limited to, implied warranties ofmerchantability, fitness for aparticular purpose, title, andnon-infringement. Gracenote doesnot warrant the results that will beobtained by your use of theGracenote software or anyGracenote server. In no case willGracenote be liable for anyconsequential or incidentaldamages or for any lost profits orlost revenues.


Climate Controls 8-1

Climate Controls

Climate Control SystemsClimate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1Automatic Climate ControlSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3

Air VentsAir Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6

Climate ControlSystemsThe heating, cooling, defrosting, andventilation for the vehicle can becontrolled with these systems.

Vehicles without Air Conditioning



C. Floor Air Mode

D. Vent Air Mode

E. Fan Control



H. Defog

I. Defrost

Vehicles with Air Conditioning



C. Floor Air Mode

D. Vent Air Mode

E. Fan Control


8-2 Climate Controls



H. Recirculation

I. Defog

J. Air Conditioning

K. Defrost

9 (Fan Control): Turn to increaseor decrease the fan speed.

Temperature Control: Turn toincrease or decrease thetemperature.

Air Delivery Mode Control:To change the current mode, pressone of the following:

F (Vent): Air is directed to theinstrument panel outlets.

* (Bi-level): Air is directed to theinstrument panel outlets and thefloor outlets.

7 (Floor): Air is directed to thefloor outlets.

W (Defog): Clears the windows offog or moisture. Air is directed to thewindshield and floor outlets.

0 (Defrost): Clears thewindshield of fog or frost morequickly. Air is directed to thewindshield and side window outlets.

For best results, clear all snow andice from the windshield beforedefrosting.

Do not drive the vehicle until allwindows are clear.

Air Conditioning

# (Air Conditioning, IfEquipped): Press to turn theair conditioning on or off. If thefan is turned off or the outsidetemperature falls below freezing,the air conditioning compressorwill not work.

h (Recirculation, If Equipped):Press to turn on the recirculation.An indicator light comes on. Air isrecirculated inside the vehicle.It helps to quickly cool the air insidethe vehicle or prevent outside airand odors from entering.

To improve fuel efficiency and tocool the vehicle faster, recirculationmay be automatically selected inwarm weather. The recirculationlight will not come on. Pressh toselect recirculation; press it again toselect outside air.

Rear Window Defogger

1 (Rear Defogger): Press to turnthe rear window defogger on or off.The rear window defogger turns offafter about 10 minutes. It can alsobe turned off by turning the ignitionto ACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFF. If turned on again it runs forabout five minutes beforeturning off.

Do not drive the vehicle until allwindows are clear.



Notice: Do not use a razor bladeor sharp object to clear the insiderear window. Do not adhereanything to the defogger gridlines in the rear glass. Theseactions may damage the reardefogger. Repairs would not becovered by your warranty.

Heated Seats (If Equipped): Pressto turn the heated seats on or off.See Heated Front Seats onpage 3‑7

Automatic ClimateControl SystemThe heating, cooling, and ventilationfor the vehicle can be controlledwith this system.


B. Rear Window Defogger

C. AUTO (Automatic Operation)

D. Defrost

E. Fan Control

F. Driver and Passenger HeatedSeats

G. Power

H. Recirculation

I. MODE (Air Delivery Mode)

J. AQS (Air Quality Sensor)

K. Air Conditioning

Automatic Operation

The system automatically controlsthe fan speed, air delivery, airconditioning, and recirculation inorder to heat or cool the vehicle tothe desired temperature.

When the indicator light is on, thesystem is in full automatic operation.If the air delivery mode or fansetting is manually adjusted, theauto indicator turns off and displayswill show the selected settings.



To place the system in automaticmode do the following:

1. Press AUTO.

2. Set the temperature. Allow thesystem time to stabilize. Thenadjust the temperature asneeded for best comfort.

To improve fuel efficiency and tocool the vehicle faster, recirculationmay be automatically selected inwarm weather. The recirculationlight will not come on. Pressh toselect recirculation; press it again toselect outside air.

English units can be changed tometric units through the DriverInformation Center (DIC). SeeVehicle Personalization onpage 5‑34.

Manual Operation

O (Power): Press to turn theclimate control system on or off.

Fan Control: Turn the knobclockwise or counterclockwise toincrease or decrease the fan speed.The selected fan speed is indicatedby a number on the display screen.Press AUTO to return to automaticoperation.

MODE (Air Delivery Mode): Pressto change the direction of theairflow. The current mode appearsin the display screen. Automaticoperation is canceled and manualmode is initiated. Press AUTO toreturn to automatic operation.

To change the current mode, selectone of the following:

Y (Vent): Air is directed to theinstrument panel outlets.

\ (Bi-level): Air is dividedbetween the instrument paneloutlets and the floor outlets.

C (Tri‐Level): Air is dividedbetween the windshield, instrumentpanel, and floor outlets.

[ (Floor): Air is directed to thefloor outlets.

- (Defog): Clears the windows offog or moisture. Air is directed to thewindshield and floor outlets.

0 (Defrost): Clears thewindshield of fog or frost morequickly. Air is directed to thewindshield.

# (Air Conditioning): Press toturn the automatic air conditioningon or off. If the fan is turned off orthe outside temperature falls belowfreezing, the air conditioningcompressor will not run.

Press AUTO to return to automaticoperation and the air conditionerruns as needed. When the indicatorlight is on, the air conditioner runsautomatically to cool the air insidethe vehicle or to dry the air neededto defog the windshield faster.



h (Recirculation): Press to turnon recirculation. An indicator lightcomes on. Air is recirculated toquickly cool the inside of the vehicleor prevent outside air and odorsfrom entering.

Automatic Air Recirculation:When the AUTO indicator light ison, the air is automaticallyrecirculated as needed to helpquickly cool the inside of thevehicle.

AQS (Air Quality Sensor): Forvehicles with an air quality sensor,the climate control system adjusts tolimit some exhaust fumes frombeing pulled inside your vehicle.

Press the AQS button on theclimate control to activate the airquality sensor. The air qualitysensor will not maintain recirculation

for an extended period to preventthe air inside the vehicle frombecoming too dry or stuffy. To adjustthe sensitivity of the Air QualityControl, see “Climate and AirQuality” under VehiclePersonalization on page 5‑34.

Auto Defog: The climate controlsystem may have a sensor toautomatically detect high humidityinside the vehicle. When highhumidity is detected, the climatecontrol system may adjust tooutside air supply and turn on theair conditioner. If the climate controlsystem does not detect possiblewindow fogging, it returns to normaloperation. To turn Auto Defog off oron, see “Climate and Air Quality”under Vehicle Personalization onpage 5‑34.

Rear Window Defogger

= (Rear Window Defogger):Press to turn the rear windowdefogger on or off.

The rear window defogger turnsoff automatically after about10 minutes. If turned on again itruns for about five minutes beforeturning off.

The rear window defogger can beset to automatic operation. See“Climate and Air Quality” underVehicle Personalization onpage 5‑34. When Auto Rear Defogis selected, the rear windowdefogger turns on automaticallywhen the interior temperature is coldand the outside temperature isabout 40°F and below. The autorear defogger turns off automaticallyafter about 10 minutes. At higherspeeds, the rear window defoggermay stay on continuously.



For vehicles with heated outsiderearview mirrors, they turn on whenthe rear window defogger button ison and help to clear fog or frost fromthe surface of the mirrors. SeeHeated Mirrors on page 2‑16.

Notice: Do not try to clear frostor other material from the insideof the front windshield and rearwindow with a razor blade oranything else that is sharp. Thismay damage the rear windowdefogger grid and affect yourradio's ability to pick up stationsclearly. The repairs would not becovered by your warranty.

Heated Seats (If Equipped): Pressto turn the heated seats on or off.See Heated Front Seats onpage 3‑7.

Remote Start Climate ControlOperation: For vehicles with theremote vehicle start feature, theclimate control system may runwhen the vehicle is started remotely.

The system will default to a heatingor cooling mode depending on theoutside temperature and then goback to the previous settings. SeeRemote Vehicle Start on page 2‑9.

The rear window defogger turns onif it is cold outside.

Sensors

The solar sensor, located on top ofthe instrument panel near thewindshield, monitors the solar heat.

The climate control system uses thesensor information to adjust thetemperature, fan speed,recirculation, and air delivery modefor best comfort.

If the sensor is covered, theautomatic climate control systemmay not work properly.

Air VentsAdjustable air vents are in thecenter and on the side of theinstrument panel.

Move the slats (A) to change thedirection of the airflow.



Use the thumbwheels (B) near theair vents to open or close off theairflow.

Additional air vents are locatedbeneath the windshield, driver andpassenger side door windows, andin the footwells. These are fixed andcannot be adjusted.

Operation Tips. Clear away any ice, snow,

or leaves from air inlets at thebase of the windshield that couldblock the flow of air into thevehicle.

. Keep the path under the frontseats clear of objects to helpcirculate the air inside of thevehicle more effectively.

. Use of non‐GM approved hooddeflectors can adversely affectthe performance of the system.Check with your dealer beforeadding equipment to the outsideof the vehicle.



2 NOTES


Driving and Operating 9-1

Driving andOperating

Driving InformationDistracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Drunk Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Driving on Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . 9-6Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . 9-7Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8If the Vehicle Is Stuck . . . . . . . . 9-10Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . 9-10

Starting and OperatingNew Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . 9-15Ignition Positions(Key Access) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15

Ignition Positions(Keyless Access) . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18

Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . 9-20Engine Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23

Shifting Into Park (AutomaticTransmission) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24

Shifting out of Park . . . . . . . . . . 9-25Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27Parking over ThingsThat Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27

Engine ExhaustEngine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27Running the Vehicle WhileParked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28

Automatic TransmissionAutomatic Transmission . . . . . 9-29Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31

Manual TransmissionManual Transmission . . . . . . . . 9-33

BrakesAntilock BrakeSystem (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35

Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-36Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-36

Ride Control SystemsTraction ControlSystem (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37

StabiliTrak® System . . . . . . . . . 9-38

Cruise ControlCruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40

Object Detection SystemsUltrasonic Parking Assist . . . . 9-42

FuelFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-44Recommended Fuel . . . . . . . . . 9-44Gasoline Specifications (U.S.and Canada Only) . . . . . . . . . . 9-44

California FuelRequirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-45

Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . 9-45Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-45Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-46Filling a Portable FuelContainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-48


9-2 Driving and Operating

TowingGeneral TowingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-48

Driving Characteristics andTowing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-49

Trailer Towing (Fuel EconomyModel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-53

Trailer Towing (Except FuelEconomy Model) . . . . . . . . . . . 9-53

Towing Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . 9-55

Conversions and Add-OnsAdd-On ElectricalEquipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-55

Driving Information

Distracted DrivingDistraction comes in many formsand can take your focus from thetask of driving. Exercise goodjudgment and do not let otheractivities divert your attentionaway from the road. Many localgovernments have enacted lawsregarding driver distraction. Becomefamiliar with the local laws inyour area.

To avoid distracted driving, alwayskeep your eyes on the road, handson the wheel, and mind on the drive.. Do not use a phone in

demanding driving situations.Use a hands-free method toplace or receive necessaryphone calls.

. Watch the road. Do not read,take notes, or look upinformation on phones or otherelectronic devices.

. Designate a front seatpassenger to handle potentialdistractions.

. Become familiar with vehiclefeatures before driving, such asprogramming favorite radiostations and adjusting climatecontrol and seat settings.Program all trip information intoany navigation device prior todriving.

. Wait until the vehicle is parkedto retrieve items that have fallento the floor.

. Stop or park the vehicle to tendto children.

. Keep pets in an appropriatecarrier or restraint.

. Avoid stressful conversationswhile driving, whether with apassenger or on a cell phone.



{ WARNING

Taking your eyes off the road toolong or too often could cause acrash resulting in injury or death.Focus your attention on driving.

Refer to the Infotainment sectionfor more information on using thatsystem, including pairing and usinga cell phone.

If equipped, refer to the navigationmanual for information on thatsystem, including pairing and usinga cell phone.

Defensive DrivingDefensive driving means “alwaysexpect the unexpected.” The firststep in driving defensively is to wearthe safety belt. See Safety Belts onpage 3‑10.. Assume that other road users

(pedestrians, bicyclists, andother drivers) are going to becareless and make mistakes.Anticipate what they might doand be ready.

. Allow enough following distancebetween you and the driver infront of you.

. Focus on the task of driving.

Drunk DrivingDeath and injury associated withdrinking and driving is a globaltragedy.

{ WARNING

Drinking and then driving isvery dangerous. Your reflexes,perceptions, attentiveness, andjudgment can be affected by evena small amount of alcohol. Youcan have a serious — or evenfatal — collision if you drive afterdrinking.

Do not drink and drive or ride witha driver who has been drinking.Ride home in a cab; or if you arewith a group, designate a driverwho will not drink.



Control of a VehicleBraking, steering, and acceleratingare important factors in helping tocontrol a vehicle while driving.

BrakingBraking action involves perceptiontime and reaction time. Deciding topush the brake pedal is perceptiontime. Actually doing it isreaction time.

Average driver reaction time isabout three‐fourths of a second.In that time, a vehicle moving at100 km/h (60 mph) travels 20 m(66 ft), which could be a lot ofdistance in an emergency.

Helpful braking tips to keep in mindinclude:. Keep enough distance between

you and the vehicle in frontof you.

. Avoid needless heavy braking.

. Keep pace with traffic.

If the engine ever stops while thevehicle is being driven, brakenormally but do not pump thebrakes. Doing so could make thepedal harder to push down. If theengine stops, there will be somepower brake assist but it will beused when the brake is applied.Once the power assist is used up, itcan take longer to stop and thebrake pedal will be harder to push.

Steering

Electric Power Steering

Your vehicle has electric powersteering. It does not have powersteering fluid. Regular maintenanceis not required.

If power steering assist is lost dueto a system malfunction, the vehiclecan be steered, but may requireincreased effort.

If the steering wheel is turned ineither direction several times until itstops, or it is held until it is stoppedfor an extended time, power

steering assist should return shortlyafter a few normal steeringmovements.

See specific vehicle steeringmessages under Vehicle Messages(Canada Base Level) on page 5‑28or Vehicle Messages (CanadaUplevel and United States) onpage 5‑28.

See your dealer if there is aproblem.

CurveTips. Take curves at a reasonable

speed.. Reduce speed before entering a

curve, while the front wheels arestraight.

. Adjust speed so you can drivethrough the curve. Maintain areasonable, steady speed.

. Wait until out of the curve beforeaccelerating gently into thestraightaway.



Steering in Emergencies

There are times when steering canbe more effective than braking. Forexample, you come over a hill andfind a truck stopped in the lane, or achild darts out from between parkedcars and stops right in front of you.These problems can be avoided bybraking— if you can stop in time.

If you cannot fully stop, follow thesesuggestions:. Quickly apply the brakes to

remove as much speed aspossible from a collision.

. Steer around the problem, tothe left to right depending onavailable space.

. Straighten the wheel once youhave avoided the object.

Off-Road Recovery

The vehicle's right wheels can dropoff the edge of a road onto theshoulder while driving. Followthese tips:

1. Ease off the accelerator andthen, if there is nothing in theway, steer the vehicle so that itstraddles the edge of thepavement.

2. Turn the steering wheel aboutone-eighth of a turn, until theright front tire contacts thepavement edge.

3. Then turn the steering wheel togo straight down the roadway.

Loss of Control

Skidding

There are three types of skids thatcorrespond to the vehicle's threecontrol systems:. Braking Skid — wheels are

not rolling.. Steering or Cornering

Skid — too much speed orsteering in a curve causes tiresto slip and lose cornering force.

. Acceleration Skid — too muchthrottle causes the drivingwheels to spin.



Defensive drivers avoid most skidsby taking reasonable care suitedto existing conditions, and by notoverdriving those conditions.But skids are always possible.

If the vehicle starts to slide, followthese suggestions:. Ease your foot off the

accelerator pedal and quicklysteer the way you want thevehicle to go. The vehicle maystraighten out. Be ready for asecond skid if it occurs.

. Slow down and adjust yourdriving according to weatherconditions. Stopping distancecan be longer and vehiclecontrol can be affected whentraction is reduced by water,snow, ice, gravel, or othermaterial on the road. Learn torecognize warning clues — suchas enough water, ice, or packedsnow on the road to make amirrored surface — and slowdown when you have any doubt.

. Try to avoid sudden steering,acceleration, or braking,including reducing vehicle speedby shifting to a lower gear. Anysudden changes could causethe tires to slide.

Remember: Antilock brakes helpavoid only the braking skid.

Driving on Wet RoadsRain and wet roads can reducevehicle traction and affect yourability to stop and accelerate.Always drive slower in these typesof driving conditions and avoiddriving through large puddles anddeep‐standing or flowing water.

{ WARNING

Wet brakes can cause crashes.They might not work as well in aquick stop and could causepulling to one side. You couldlose control of the vehicle.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

After driving through a largepuddle of water or a car/vehiclewash, lightly apply the brakepedal until the brakes worknormally.

Flowing or rushing water createsstrong forces. Driving throughflowing water could cause thevehicle to be carried away. If thishappens, you and other vehicleoccupants could drown. Do notignore police warnings and bevery cautious about trying to drivethrough flowing water.

Hydroplaning

Hydroplaning is dangerous. Watercan build up under the vehicle'stires so they actually ride on thewater. This can happen if the road iswet enough and you are going fastenough. When the vehicle ishydroplaning, it has little or nocontact with the road.



There is no hard and fast rule abouthydroplaning. The best advice is toslow down when the road is wet.

Other Rainy Weather Tips

Besides slowing down, other wetweather driving tips include:. Allow extra following distance.. Pass with caution.. Keep windshield wiping

equipment in good shape.. Keep the windshield washer fluid

reservoir filled.. Have good tires with proper

tread depth. See Tires onpage 10‑42.

. Turn off cruise control.

Highway HypnosisAlways be alert and pay attention toyour surroundings while driving.If you become tired or sleepy, find asafe place to park the vehicleand rest.

Other driving tips include:. Keep the vehicle well ventilated.. Keep the interior

temperature cool.. Keep your eyes moving — scan

the road ahead and to the sides.. Check the rearview mirror and

vehicle instruments often.

Hill and Mountain RoadsDriving on steep hills or throughmountains is different than drivingon flat or rolling terrain. Tips fordriving in these conditions include:. Keep the vehicle serviced and in

good shape.. Check all fluid levels and brakes,

tires, cooling system, andtransmission.

. Shift to a lower gear when goingdown steep or long hills.

{ WARNING

If you do not shift down, thebrakes could get so hot that theywould not work well. You wouldthen have poor braking or evennone going down a hill. You couldcrash. Shift down to let the engineassist the brakes on a steepdownhill slope.



{ WARNING

Coasting downhill in N (Neutral)or with the ignition off isdangerous. The brakes will haveto do all the work of slowing downand they could get so hot thatthey would not work well. Youwould then have poor braking oreven none going down a hill. Youcould crash. Always have theengine running and the vehicle ingear when going downhill.

. Stay in your own lane. Do notswing wide or cut across thecenter of the road. Drive atspeeds that let you stay in yourown lane.

. Be alert on top of hills,something could be in your lane(stalled car, accident).

. Pay attention to special roadsigns (falling rocks area, windingroads, long grades, passing orno-passing zones) and takeappropriate action.

Winter Driving

Driving on Snow or Ice

Drive carefully when there is snowor ice between the tires and theroad, creating less traction or grip.Wet ice can occur at about 0°C(32°F) when freezing rain begins tofall, resulting in even less traction.Avoid driving on wet ice or infreezing rain until roads can betreated with salt or sand.

Drive with caution, whatever thecondition. Accelerate gently sotraction is not lost. Accelerating tooquickly causes the wheels to spinand makes the surface under thetires slick, so there is even lesstraction.

Try not to break the fragile traction.If you accelerate too fast, the drivewheels will spin and polish thesurface under the tires even more.

The Antilock Brake System (ABS)on page 9‑35 improves vehiclestability during hard stops onslippery roads, but apply the brakessooner than when on dry pavement.

Allow greater following distance onany slippery road and watch forslippery spots. Icy patches canoccur on otherwise clear roads inshaded areas. The surface of acurve or an overpass can remain icywhen the surrounding roads areclear. Avoid sudden steeringmaneuvers and braking whileon ice.

Turn off cruise control on slipperysurfaces.



Blizzard Conditions

Being stuck in snow can be aserious situation. Stay with thevehicle unless there is help nearby.If possible, use the RoadsideAssistance Program on page 13‑6.To get help and keep everyone inthe vehicle safe:. Turn on the hazard warning

flashers.. Tie a red cloth to an outside

mirror.

{ WARNING

Snow can trap engine exhaustunder the vehicle. This maycause exhaust gases to getinside. Engine exhaust containscarbon monoxide (CO) whichcannot be seen or smelled.It can cause unconsciousnessand even death.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

If the vehicle is stuck in the snow:. Clear away snow from aroundthe base of your vehicle,especially any that is blockingthe exhaust pipe.

. Check again from time totime to be sure snow doesnot collect there.

. Open a window about5 cm (2 in) on the side of thevehicle that is away from thewind to bring in fresh air.

. Fully open the air outlets onor under the instrumentpanel.

. Adjust the climate controlsystem to a setting thatcirculates the air inside thevehicle and set the fan speedto the highest setting. See“Climate Control System” inthe Index.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

For more information aboutcarbon monoxide, see EngineExhaust on page 9‑27.

Run the engine for short periodsonly as needed to keep warm, butbe careful.

To save fuel, run the engine for onlyshort periods as needed to warmthe vehicle and then shut the engineoff and close the window most ofthe way to save heat. Repeat thisuntil help arrives but only when youfeel really uncomfortable from thecold. Moving about to keep warmalso helps.

If it takes some time for help toarrive, now and then when you runthe engine, push the acceleratorpedal slightly so the engine runsfaster than the idle speed. Thiskeeps the battery charged to restartthe vehicle and to signal for helpwith the headlamps. Do this as littleas possible to save fuel.



If the Vehicle Is StuckSlowly and cautiously spin thewheels to free the vehicle whenstuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.

If stuck too severely for the tractionsystem to free the vehicle, turn thetraction system off and use therocking method.

{ WARNING

If the vehicle's tires spin at highspeed, they can explode, and youor others could be injured. Thevehicle can overheat, causing anengine compartment fire or otherdamage. Spin the wheels as littleas possible and avoid goingabove 55 km/h (35 mph).

For information about using tirechains on the vehicle, see TireChains on page 10‑62.

Rocking the Vehicle to Getit Out

Turn the steering wheel left andright to clear the area around thefront wheels. Turn off any tractionsystem. Shift back and forthbetween R (Reverse) and a forwardgear, or with a manual transmission,between 1 (First) or 2 (Second) andR (Reverse), spinning the wheels aslittle as possible. To preventtransmission wear, wait until thewheels stop spinning before shiftinggears. Release the acceleratorpedal while shifting, and presslightly on the accelerator pedalwhen the transmission is in gear.Slowly spinning the wheels in theforward and reverse directionscauses a rocking motion that couldfree the vehicle. If that does not getthe vehicle out after a few tries, itmight need to be towed out. If thevehicle does need to be towed out,see Towing the Vehicle onpage 10‑83.

Vehicle Load LimitsIt is very important to know howmuch weight the vehicle cancarry. This weight is called thevehicle capacity weight andincludes the weight of alloccupants, cargo, and allnonfactory‐installed options.Two labels on the vehicle showhow much weight it mayproperly carry, the Tire andLoading Information label andthe Certification label.



{ WARNING

Do not load the vehicle anyheavier than the GrossVehicle Weight Rating(GVWR), or either themaximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR).This can cause systems tobreak and change the way thevehicle handles. This couldcause loss of control and acrash. Overloading can alsoshorten the life of the vehicle.

Tire and Loading InformationLabel

Label Example

A vehicle-specific Tire andLoading Information label isattached to the vehicle centerpillar (B-pillar). With the driverdoor open, you will find the labelattached below the door lockpost. The Tire and LoadingInformation label shows thenumber of occupant seating

positions (A), and the maximumvehicle capacity weight (B) inkilograms and pounds.

The Tire and LoadingInformation label also showsthe tire size of the originalequipment tires (C) and therecommended cold tire inflationpressures (D). For moreinformation on tires and inflationsee Tires on page 10‑42 andTire Pressure on page 10‑49.

There is also important loadinginformation on the Certificationlabel. It tells you the GrossVehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)and the Gross Axle WeightRating (GAWR) for the front andrear axle; see “CertificationLabel” later in this section.



Steps for Determining CorrectLoad Limit

1. Locate the statement“The combined weight ofoccupants and cargo shouldnever exceed XXX kg orXXX lbs” on your vehicle'splacard.

2. Determine the combinedweight of the driver andpassengers that will beriding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combinedweight of the driver andpassengers from XXX kg orXXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equalsthe available amount of cargoand luggage load capacity.For example, if the “XXX”amount equals 1400 lbs andthere will be five 150 lbpassengers in your vehicle,the amount of available cargo

and luggage load capacityis 650 lbs (1400 − 750(5 x 150) = 650 lbs).

5. Determine the combinedweight of luggage and cargobeing loaded on the vehicle.That weight may not safelyexceed the available cargoand luggage load capacitycalculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towinga trailer, the load from yourtrailer will be transferred toyour vehicle. Consult thismanual to determine how thisreduces the available cargoand luggage load capacity ofyour vehicle.

See Trailer Towing (FuelEconomy Model) on page 9‑53or Trailer Towing (Except FuelEconomy Model) on page 9‑53for important information ontowing a trailer, towing safetyrules, and trailering tips.

Example 1

A. Vehicle Capacity Weight forExample 1 =453 kg (1,000 lbs).

B. Subtract Occupant Weight@ 68 kg (150 lbs) × 2 =136 kg (300 lbs).

C. Available Occupant andCargo Weight =317 kg (700 lbs).



Example 2


B. Subtract Occupant Weight@ 68 kg (150 lbs) × 5 =340 kg (750 lbs).

C. Available Cargo Weight =113 kg (250 lbs).

Example 3


B. Subtract Occupant Weight@ 91 kg (200 lbs) × 5 =453 kg (1,000 lbs).

C. Available Cargo Weight =0 kg (0 lbs).

Refer to the vehicle's Tire andLoading Information label forspecific information about the

vehicle's capacity weight andseating positions. The combinedweight of the driver, passengers,and cargo should never exceedthe vehicle's capacity weight.

Certification Label

Label Example

A vehicle-specific Certificationlabel, found on the vehiclecenter pillar (B-pillar), tells youthe gross weight capacity of thevehicle, called the Gross VehicleWeight Rating (GVWR).



The GVWR includes the weightof the vehicle, all occupants,fuel, and cargo. Never exceedthe GVWR for the vehicle, or theGross Axle Weight Rating(GAWR) for either the front orrear axle.

And, if you do have a heavyload, you should spread it out.See “Steps for DeterminingCorrect Load Limit” earlier inthis section.

{ WARNING

Do not load the vehicle anyheavier than the GrossVehicle Weight Rating(GVWR), or either themaximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR).This can cause systems tobreak and change the way thevehicle handles.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

This could cause loss ofcontrol and a crash.Overloading can also shortenthe life of the vehicle.

If you put things inside thevehicle — like suitcases, tools,packages, or anything else —they will go as fast as thevehicle goes. If you have to stopor turn quickly, or if there is acrash, they will keep going.

{ WARNING

Things inside the vehicle canstrike and injure people in asudden stop or turn, or ina crash.

. Put things in the cargoarea of the vehicle. In thecargo area, put them as

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

far forward as possible.Try to spread the weightevenly.

. Never stack heavierthings, like suitcases,inside the vehicle so thatsome of them are abovethe tops of the seats.

. Do not leave anunsecured child restraintin the vehicle.

. Secure loose items inthe vehicle.

. Do not leave a seat foldeddown unless needed.



Starting andOperating

New Vehicle Break-InNotice: The vehicle does notneed an elaborate break-in. But itwill perform better in the long runif you follow these guidelines:. Do not drive at any oneconstant speed, fast or slow,for the first 805 km (500mi).Do not make full-throttlestarts. Avoid downshifting tobrake or slow the vehicle.

. Avoid making hard stops forthe first 322 km (200mi) orso. During this time the newbrake linings are not yetbroken in. Hard stops withnew linings can meanpremature wear and earlierreplacement. Follow thisbreaking-in guideline everytime you get new brakelinings.

Following break‐in, engine speedand load can be graduallyincreased.

Ignition Positions(Key Access)

The ignition switch has four differentpositions.

Notice: Using a tool to force thekey to turn in the ignition couldcause damage to the switch orbreak the key. Use the correctkey, make sure it is all the way in,

and turn it only with your hand.If the key cannot be turned byhand, see your dealer.

The key must be fully extended tostart the vehicle.

To shift out of P (Park), turn theignition to ON/RUN and apply thebrake pedal.

A (STOPPING THE ENGINE/LOCK/OFF): When the vehicle isstopped, turn the ignition switch toLOCK/OFF to turn the engine off.Retained Accessory Power (RAP)will remain active. See RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) onpage 9‑23.

This is the only position from whichthe key can be removed. This locksthe steering wheel, ignition, andautomatic transmission.

Do not turn the engine off when thevehicle is moving. This will cause aloss of power assist in the brakeand steering systems and disablethe airbags.



If the vehicle must be shut off in anemergency:

1. Brake using a firm and steadypressure. Do not pump thebrakes repeatedly. This maydeplete power assist, requiringincreased brake pedal force.

2. Shift the vehicle to Neutral. Thiscan be done while the vehicle ismoving. After shifting to Neutral,continue to firmly apply thebrakes and steer the vehicle to asafe location.

3. Come to a complete stop. Shiftto P (Park) with an automatictransmission, or Neutral with amanual transmission. Turn theignition to LOCK/OFF.

4. Set the parking brake. SeeParking Brake on page 9‑36.

{ WARNING

Turning off the vehicle whilemoving may cause loss of powerassist in the brake and steeringsystems and disable the airbags.While driving, only shut thevehicle off in an emergency.

If the vehicle cannot be pulled over,and must be shut off while driving,turn the ignition to ACC/ACCESSORY.

The ignition switch can bind in theLOCK/OFF position with the wheelsturned off center. If this happens,move the steering wheel from rightto left while turning the key to ACC/ACCESSORY. If this does not work,then the vehicle needs service.

B (ACC/ACCESSORY):This position provides power tosome of the electrical accessories.It unlocks the steering wheel andignition. To move the key fromACC/ACCESSORY to LOCK/OFF,push in the key and then turn itto LOCK/OFF.

C (ON/RUN): The ignition switchstays in this position when theengine is running. This position canbe used to operate the electricalaccessories, including theventilation fan and 12‐volt poweroutlet, as well as to display somewarning and indicator lights. Thisposition can also be used forservice and diagnostics, and toverify the proper operation of themalfunction indicator lamp as maybe required for emission inspectionpurposes. The transmission isalso unlocked in this position onautomatic transmission vehicles.



The battery could be drained if thekey is left in the ACC/ACCESSORYor ON/RUN position with the engineoff. The vehicle might not start if thebattery is allowed to drain for anextended period of time.

D (START): This position starts theengine. When the engine starts,release the key. The ignition switchwill return to ON/RUN for normaldriving.

A warning tone sounds when thedriver door is opened if the ignitionis still in ACC/ACCESSORY and thekey is in the ignition.

Key Lock Release

Vehicles with an automatictransmission are equipped with anelectronic key lock release system.The key lock release is designed toprevent ignition key removal unlessthe shift lever is in P (Park).

The key lock release is alwaysfunctional except in the case of anuncharged or low voltage (less than9‐volt) battery. If the vehicle has anuncharged battery or a battery withlow voltage, try charging or jumpstarting the battery. See JumpStarting on page 10‑80.

If charging or jump starting thebattery does not work, locate thehole below the ignition lock. Insert aflat bladed tool or another key fromthe key chain into the opening.When the lever can be felt, actuatethe lever toward the driver, andremove the key from the ignition.



Ignition Positions(Keyless Access)

The vehicle has an electronickeyless ignition with pushbuttonstart.

Pressing the button cycles it throughthree modes, ACC/ACCESSORY,ON/RUN/START, and Stopping theEngine/OFF.

The transmitter must be in thevehicle for the system to operate.If the pushbutton start is notworking, the vehicle may be near astrong radio antenna signal causinginterference to the keyless accesssystem. See Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System Operation onpage 2‑3 for more information.

To shift out of P (Park), the vehiclemust be in ACC/ACCESSORY orON/RUN and the brake pedal mustbe applied.

Stopping the Engine/OFF(No LED Lights): When thevehicle is stopped, press the engineSTART/STOP button once to turnthe engine off.

If the vehicle is in P (Park), theignition will turn off, and RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) will remainactive. See Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) on page 9‑23 formore information.

If the vehicle is not in P (Park),the ignition will return to ACC/ACCESSORY and the DriverInformation Center (DIC) will displaythe message SHIFT TO PARK inthe Driver Information Center (DIC).See Transmission Messages onpage 5‑33 for more information.When the vehicle is shifted intoP (Park), the ignition system willswitch to OFF.

Do not turn the engine off when thevehicle is moving. This will cause aloss of power assist in the brakeand steering systems and disablethe airbags.

If the vehicle must be shut off in anemergency:

1. Brake using a firm and steadypressure. Do not pump thebrakes repeatedly. This maydeplete power assist, requiringincreased brake pedal force.



2. Shift the vehicle to N (Neutral).This can be done while thevehicle is moving. After shiftingto N (Neutral), firmly apply thebrakes and steer the vehicle to asafe location.

3. Come to a complete stop, shiftto P (Park), and turn the ignitionto LOCK/OFF. On vehicles withan automatic transmission, theshift lever must be in P (Park) toturn the ignition switch to theLOCK/OFF position.

4. Set the parking brake. SeeParking Brake on page 9‑36.

{ WARNING

Turning off the vehicle whilemoving may cause loss of powerassist in the brake and steeringsystems and disable the airbags.While driving, only shut thevehicle off in an emergency.

If the vehicle cannot be pulled over,and must be shut off while driving,switch the ignition to ACC/ACCESSORY.

ACC/ACCESSORY (Amber LEDLight): This mode allows you touse some electrical accessorieswhen the engine is off.

With the ignition off, pressing thebutton one time without the brakepedal applied will place the ignitionsystem in ACC/ACCESSORY.

The ignition will switch fromACC/ACCESSORY to OFF afterfive minutes to prevent batteryrundown.



ON/RUN/START (Green LEDLight): This mode is for driving andstarting. With the ignition off, andthe brake pedal applied, pressingthe button once will place theignition system in ON/RUN/START.Once engine cranking begins,release the button. Engine crankingwill continue until the enginestarts. See Starting the Engine onpage 9‑20 for more information. Theignition will then remain in ON/RUN.

Service Only Mode

This power mode is available forservice and diagnostics, and toverify the proper operation of themalfunction indicator lamp as maybe required for emission inspectionpurposes. With the vehicle off, andthe brake pedal not applied,pressing and holding the button formore than five seconds will placethe vehicle in Service Only Mode.The instruments and audio systemswill operate as they do in ON/RUN,but the vehicle will not be able to be

driven. The engine will not start inService Only Mode. Push the buttonagain to turn the vehicle off.

Starting the EnginePlace the transmission in theproper gear.

Notice: The engine is designed towork with the electronics in thevehicle. If you add electrical partsor accessories, you could changethe way the engine operates.Before adding electricalequipment, check with yourdealer. If you do not, the enginemight not perform properly. Anyresulting damage would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Automatic Transmission

Move the shift lever to P (Park) orN (Neutral). The engine will not startin any other position. To restart thevehicle when it is already moving,use N (Neutral) only.

Notice: Do not try to shift toP (Park) if the vehicle is moving.If you do, you could damage thetransmission. Shift to P (Park)only when the vehicle is stopped.

Manual Transmission

The shift lever should be in Neutraland the parking brake engaged.Hold the clutch pedal down to thefloor and start the engine. Thevehicle will not start if the clutchpedal is not all the way down.

Starting Procedure (Key Access)

1. With your foot off the acceleratorpedal, turn the ignition key toSTART. When the engine starts,let go of the key. The idle speedwill go down as the enginewarms. Do not race the engineimmediately after starting it.Allow the oil to warm up andlubricate all moving parts.

The vehicle has aComputer-Controlled CrankingSystem. This feature assists instarting the engine and protects



components. If the ignition key isturned to the START position,and then released when theengine begins cranking, theengine will continue crankingfor a few seconds or until thevehicle starts. If the engine doesnot start and the key is held inSTART for many seconds,cranking stops after 15 secondsto prevent cranking motordamage. To prevent geardamage, this system alsoprevents cranking if the engineis already running. Enginecranking can be stopped byturning the ignition switch toACC/ACCESSORY orLOCK/OFF.

Notice: Cranking the engine forlong periods of time, by returningthe key to the START positionimmediately after cranking hasended, can overheat and damagethe cranking motor, and drain thebattery. Wait at least 15 secondsbetween each try, to let thecranking motor cool down.

2. If the engine does not start afterfive to 10 seconds, especiallyin very cold weather (below 0°For −18°C), it could be floodedwith too much gasoline.Push the accelerator pedal allthe way to the floor and hold itthere as you hold the key inSTART for a maximum of15 seconds. Wait at least15 seconds between each try, toallow the cranking motor to cool.When the engine starts, let go ofthe key and accelerator. If thevehicle starts briefly but thenstops again, repeat theprocedure. This clears the extragasoline from the engine. Do notrace the engine immediatelyafter starting it. Operate theengine and transmission gentlyuntil the oil warms up andlubricates all moving parts.

Starting Procedure(Keyless Access)

1. If the vehicle has the keylessaccess system, the transmittermust be in the vehicle. Put yourfoot on the brake pedal andpush the START/STOP button.When the engine beginscranking, let go of the button.

The idle speed will go down asyour engine gets warm. Do notrace the engine immediatelyafter starting it. Operate theengine and transmission gentlyto allow the oil to warm up andlubricate all moving parts.

If the transmitter is not in thevehicle or something isinterfering with the transmitter,the Driver Information Center(DIC) will display NO REMOTEDETECTED. See DriverInformation Center (DIC) onpage 5‑23 for more information.



If the battery in the keylessaccess transmitter needsreplacing, the DIC displaysREPLACE BATTERY INREMOTE KEY. The vehicle canstill be driven. See “Starting theVehicle with a Low TransmitterBattery” in Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System Operationon page 2‑3 for moreinformation.

The vehicle has aComputer-Controlled CrankingSystem. This feature assists instarting the engine and protectscomponents. If the STARTbutton is pressed, and thenreleased when the enginebegins cranking, the engine willcontinue cranking for a fewseconds or until the vehiclestarts. If the engine does notstart and the button is pressedfor many seconds, cranking willbe stopped after 15 seconds toprevent cranking motor damage.

To prevent gear damage, thissystem also prevents cranking ifthe engine is already running.Engine cranking can be stoppedby pressing the START button asecond time.

Notice: Cranking the engine forlong periods of time, by returningthe key to the START positionimmediately after cranking hasended, can overheat and damagethe cranking motor, and drain thebattery. Wait at least 15 secondsbetween each try, to let thecranking motor cool down.

2. If the engine does not start afterfive to 10 seconds, especially invery cold weather (below −18°Cor 0°F), it could be flooded withtoo much gasoline. Try pushingthe accelerator pedal all the wayto the floor and holding it thereas you hold the key in START,or press the START button, forup to a maximum of 15 seconds.

Wait at least 15 secondsbetween each try, to allow thecranking motor to cool down.When the engine starts, let go ofthe key or button, and theaccelerator. If the vehicle startsbriefly but then stops again, dothe same thing. This clears theextra gasoline from the engine.Do not race the engineimmediately after starting it.Operate the engine andtransmission gently until the oilwarms up and lubricates allmoving parts.

Engine HeaterThe engine heater, if available, canhelp in cold weather conditions at orbelow −18°C (0°F) for easier startingand better fuel economy duringengine warm-up. Plug in the heaterat least four hours before startingthe vehicle. An internal thermostatin the plug end of the cord willprevent engine heater operation attemperatures above −18°C (0°F).



To Use The Engine Heater

1. Turn off the engine.

1.4L Engine Shown, 1.8L Similar

2. Open the hood and unwrap theelectrical cord. The electricalcord is located on the passengerside of the engine compartment,behind the air cleaner.

3. Plug it into a normal, grounded110-volt AC outlet.

{ WARNING

Plugging the cord into anungrounded outlet could cause anelectrical shock. Also, the wrongkind of extension cord couldoverheat and cause a fire. Youcould be seriously injured. Plugthe cord into a properly groundedthree-prong 110-volt AC outlet.If the cord will not reach, use aheavy-duty three-prong extensioncord rated for at least 15 amps.

4. Before starting the engine, besure to unplug and store thecord as it was before to keep itaway from moving engine parts.If you do not it could bedamaged.

The length of time the heater shouldremain plugged in depends onseveral factors. Ask a dealer in thearea where you will be parking thevehicle for the best advice on this.

Retained AccessoryPower (RAP)These vehicle accessories may beused for up to 10 minutes after theengine is turned off:. Audio System. Power Windows. Sunroof

The power windows and sunroof willcontinue to work for up to10 minutes or until any door isopened. The radio will work whenthe key is in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY. Once the key isturned from ON/RUN to LOCK/OFF,the radio will continue to work for10 minutes, or until the driver door isopened or the key is removed fromthe ignition.



Shifting Into Park(Automatic Transmission)

{ WARNING

It can be dangerous to get out ofthe vehicle if the shift lever is notfully in P (Park) with the parkingbrake firmly set. The vehicle canroll. If you have left the enginerunning, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could beinjured. To be sure the vehicle willnot move, even when you are onfairly level ground, use the stepsthat follow. If you are pulling atrailer, see Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips on page 9‑49.

Use this procedure to shift intoP (Park):

1. Hold the brake pedal down andset the parking brake.

See Parking Brake on page 9‑36for more information.

2. Hold the button on the shift leverand push the lever toward thefront of the vehicle into P (Park).

3. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.

4. Remove the key.

Leaving the Vehicle with theEngine Running

{ WARNING

It can be dangerous to leave thevehicle with the engine running.The vehicle could move suddenlyif the shift lever is not fully inP (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. And, if you leave thevehicle with the engine running, itcould overheat and even catchfire. You or others could beinjured. Do not leave the vehiclewith the engine running.

If you have to leave the vehicle withthe engine running, the vehicle mustbe in P (Park) and the parkingbrake set.

Release the button and check thatthe shift lever cannot be moved outof P (Park).

Torque Lock

Torque lock is when the weight ofthe vehicle puts too much force onthe parking pawl in thetransmission. This happens whenparking on a hill and shifting thetransmission into P (Park) is notdone properly and then it is difficultto shift out of P (Park). To preventtorque lock, set the parking brakeand then shift into P (Park). To findout how, see “Shifting Into Park”listed previously.

If torque lock does occur, thevehicle may need to be pusheduphill by another vehicle to relievethe parking pawl pressure, so youcan shift out of P (Park).



Shifting out of ParkThis vehicle is equipped with anautomatic transmission shift lockcontrol system. The shift lock isdesigned to:. Prevent ignition key removal

unless the shift lever is inP (Park) with the shift leverbutton fully released.

. Prevent movement of the shiftlever out of P (Park) unless theignition is in ON/RUN and thebrake pedal is applied.

The shift lock release is alwaysfunctional except in the case of anuncharged or low voltage (less than9‐volt) battery.

If the vehicle has an unchargedbattery or a battery with low voltage,try charging or jump starting thebattery. See Jump Starting onpage 10‑80

To shift out of P (Park):

1. Apply the brake pedal.

2. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN.

3. Press the shift lever button.

4. Move the shift lever to thedesired position.

If still unable to shift out of P (Park):

1. Fully release the shift leverbutton.

2. Hold the brake pedal down andpress the shift lever buttonagain.

3. Move the shift lever to thedesired position.

If the shift lever still cannot bemoved from P (Park), see“Shift Lock Manual Release.”



Shift Lock Manual Release

The automatic transmission has anelectric park lock. The key must bein the ON/RUN position, and thebrake pedal pressed so the shiftlever can be moved from theP (Park) position. If the battery haslost power, the shift lever cannot bemoved from P (Park) unless theshift lock manual release isdisengaged manually.

To access the shift lock manualrelease:

1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Open the cover to the right ofthe shift lever.

3. Insert a tool into the opening asfar as it will go and move theshift lever out of P (Park).If P (Park) is selected again, theshift lever will be locked again.Have the cause of the problemfixed by your dealer.

4. Close the cover.



ParkingIf the vehicle has a manualtransmission, before getting out ofthe vehicle, move the shift lever intoR (Reverse), and firmly apply theparking brake. Once the shift leverhas been placed into R (Reverse)with the clutch pedal pressed in,turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF, andrelease the clutch.

If parking on a hill, or if the vehicleis pulling a trailer, see DrivingCharacteristics and Towing Tips onpage 9‑49.

Parking over ThingsThat Burn

{ WARNING

Things that can burn could touchhot exhaust parts under thevehicle and ignite. Do not parkover papers, leaves, dry grass,or other things that can burn.

Engine Exhaust

{ WARNING

Engine exhaust contains carbonmonoxide (CO) which cannot beseen or smelled. Exposure to COcan cause unconsciousness andeven death.

Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:. The vehicle idles in areaswith poor ventilation (parkinggarages, tunnels, deep snowthat may block underbodyairflow or tail pipes).

. The exhaust smells orsounds strange or different.

. The exhaust system leaksdue to corrosion or damage.

. The vehicle exhaust systemhas been modified, damagedor improperly repaired.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. There are holes or openingsin the vehicle body fromdamage or aftermarketmodifications that are notcompletely sealed.

If unusual fumes are detected orif it is suspected that exhaust iscoming into the vehicle:

. Drive it only with the windowscompletely down.

. Have the vehicle repairedimmediately.

Never park the vehicle with theengine running in an enclosedarea such as a garage or abuilding that has no fresh airventilation.



Running the VehicleWhile ParkedIt is better not to park with theengine running. But if you ever haveto, here are some things to know.

{ WARNING

Idling a vehicle in an enclosedarea with poor ventilation isdangerous. Engine exhaust mayenter the vehicle. Engine exhaustcontains carbon monoxide (CO)which cannot be seen or smelled.It can cause unconsciousnessand even death. Never run theengine in an enclosed area thathas no fresh air ventilation. Formore information, see EngineExhaust on page 9‑27.

{ WARNING

It can be dangerous to get out ofthe vehicle if the automatictransmission shift lever is not fullyin P (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. The vehicle can roll.Do not leave the vehicle whenthe engine is running unless youhave to. If you have left theengine running, the vehicle canmove suddenly. You or otherscould be injured. To be sure thevehicle will not move, even whenit is on fairly level ground, alwaysset the parking brake and movethe automatic transmission shiftlever to P (Park), or the manualtransmission shift lever to Neutral.

Follow the proper steps to besure the vehicle will not move.If the vehicle has an automatictransmission, see Shifting Into Park(Automatic Transmission) onpage 9‑24. If the vehicle has amanual transmission, see Parkingon page 9‑27.




AutomaticTransmissionThe automatic transmission has ashift lever located on the consolebetween the seats.

The selected gear is also shown inthe instrument cluster.

English Shown, Metric Similar

P (Park): This position locks thedrive wheels. It is the best positionto use when starting the enginebecause the vehicle cannotmove easily.

{ WARNING

It is dangerous to get out of thevehicle if the shift lever is not fullyin P (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. The vehicle can roll.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

Do not leave the vehicle when theengine is running unless youhave to. If you have left theengine running, the vehicle canmove suddenly. You or otherscould be injured. To be sure thevehicle will not move, even whenyou are on level ground, alwaysset the parking brake and movethe shift lever to P (Park). SeeShifting Into Park (AutomaticTransmission) on page 9‑24.

Make sure the shift lever is fully inP (Park) before starting the engine.The vehicle has an automatictransmission shift lock controlsystem. The regular brake must befully applied first and then the shiftlever button pressed before shiftingfrom P (Park) when the ignition keyis in ON/RUN.



If you cannot shift out of P (Park),ease pressure on the shift lever,then push the shift lever all the wayinto P (Park) as you maintain brakeapplication. Then press the shiftlever button and move the shift leverinto another gear. See Shifting outof Park on page 9‑25.

R (Reverse): Use this gear toback up.

Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse)while the vehicle is movingforward could damage thetransmission. The repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Shift to R (Reverse) onlyafter the vehicle is stopped.

To rock the vehicle back and forth toget out of snow, ice, or sand withoutdamaging the transmission, see Ifthe Vehicle Is Stuck on page 9‑10.

N (Neutral): In this position, theengine does not connect with thewheels. To restart the engine whenthe vehicle is already moving, use

N (Neutral) only. Also, useN (Neutral) when the vehicle isbeing towed.

The vehicle has an automaticneutral shift feature which allows thetransmission to automatically shift toN (Neutral) when the vehicle isstopped with a forward gearengaged. The reduced load on theengine improves vehicle fueleconomy.

{ WARNING

Shifting into a drive gear while theengine is running at high speed isdangerous. Unless your foot isfirmly on the brake pedal, thevehicle could move very rapidly.You could lose control and hitpeople or objects. Do not shiftinto a drive gear while the engineis running at high speed.

Notice: Shifting out of P (Park) orN (Neutral) with the enginerunning at high speed may

damage the transmission. Therepairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Be sure theengine is not running at highspeed when shifting the vehicle.

D (Drive): This position is fornormal driving. It provides the bestfuel economy. If more power isneeded for passing, and thevehicle is:. Going less than 56 km/h

(35 mph), push the acceleratorpedal about halfway down.

. Going about 56 km/h (35 mph) ormore, push the accelerator allthe way down.

Notice: If the vehicle seems toaccelerate slowly or not shiftgears when you go faster, andyou continue to drive the vehiclethat way, you could damage thetransmission. Have the vehicleserviced right away.



Manual Mode

Driver Shift Control (DSC)

All Models Except Fuel EconomyModel

Notice: If you drive the vehicle ata high rpm without upshiftingwhile using Driver Shift Control(DSC), you could damage thevehicle. Always upshift whennecessary while using DSC.

DSC allows you to shift anautomatic transmission similar to amanual transmission.

1. Move the shift lever fromD (Drive) to the left into the (+) or(−) manual position.

2. Press the shift lever forward (+)to upshift or rearward (−) todownshift. An M and the currentgear will be displayed in the DIC.



While using the DSC feature, thevehicle will have firmer, quickershifting. You can use this forsport driving or when climbing ordescending hills, to stay in gearlonger, or to downshift for morepower or engine braking.

The transmission will only allowyou to shift into gears appropriatefor the vehicle speed and enginerevolutions per minute (rpm). Thetransmission will not automaticallyshift to the next lower gear if theengine rpm is too high, nor tothe next higher gear when themaximum engine rpm is reached.

If shifting is prevented for anyreason, the currently selected gearwill flash multiple times, indicatingthat the transmission has notshifted gears.

While in the DSC mode, thetransmission will automaticallydownshift when the vehicle comesto a stop. This will allow for morepower during take-off.

When accelerating the vehicle froma stop in snowy and icy conditions,you may want to shift into secondgear. A higher gear allows thevehicle to gain more traction onslippery surfaces.

Electronic Range Select(ERS) Mode

Fuel Economy Model

Notice: If you drive the vehicle ata high rpm without upshiftingwhile using Electronic RangeSelect (ERS), you could damagethe vehicle. Always upshift whennecessary while using ERS.

ERS allows for the selection of therange of gear positions. Use thismode when driving downhill ortowing a trailer to limit the top gearand vehicle speed. The shiftposition indicator within theDriver Information Center (DIC)will display a number next to theM indicating the highest available

gear under manual mode and thedriving conditions when manualmode was selected.

1. Move the shift lever fromD (Drive) to the left into the (+) or(−) manual position.

2. Press the shift lever forward (+)to upshift or rearward (−) todownshift. An M and the currentgear will be displayed in the DIC.

When shifting to M (Manual Mode),the transmission will shift to therange of the current gear. For thisrange, the highest gear available isdisplayed next to the M in the DIC.See Driver Information Center (DIC)on page 5‑23 for more information.All gears below that number areavailable to use. For example, when4 (Fourth) is shown next to the M,1 (First) through 4 (Fourth) gears areshifted automatically. To shift to5 (Fifth) gear, press the shift leverforward (+) to upshift or shift intoD (Drive).



M (Manual Mode) will preventshifting to a lower gear range if theengine speed is too high. If vehiclespeed is not reduced within the timeallowed, the lower gear range shiftwill not be completed. Slow thevehicle, then press the shift leverrearward (−) to downshift to thedesired lower gear range.

While using the ERS, cruise controlcan be used.

Manual TransmissionShift Pattern

All ModelsExcept Fuel

Economy Model

Fuel EconomyModel

These are the shift patterns for thesix-speed manual transmissions.

To operate the transmissions:

Notice: Do not rest your hand onthe shift lever while driving. Thepressure could cause prematurewear in the transmission. Therepairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty.

Notice: Do not rest your foot onthe clutch pedal while driving orwhile stopped. The pressure cancause premature wear in theclutch. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

1 (First): Press the clutch pedalfully to the pedal stop and shift into1 (First). Then slowly let up on theclutch pedal as you press theaccelerator pedal.

If you come to a complete stop andit is hard to shift into 1 (First), putthe shift lever in Neutral and let upon the clutch. Press the clutch pedalback down. Then shift into 1 (First).

2 (Second): Press the clutch pedalfully to the pedal stop as you let upon the accelerator pedal and shiftinto 2 (Second). Then, slowly let upon the clutch pedal as you press theaccelerator pedal.



3 (Third), 4 (Fourth), 5 (Fifth), and6 (Sixth): Shift into 3 (Third),4 (Fourth), 5 (Fifth), and 6 (Sixth) thesame way you do for 2 (Second).Slowly let up on the clutch pedal asyou press the accelerator pedal.

For the best fuel economy, use6 (Sixth) gear whenever vehiclespeed and driving conditions allow.

An up-shift light in the instrumentcluster indicates when to shift to thenext higher gear for the best fueleconomy.

During normal driving, upshiftsshould occur between 1,300 and2,500 rpm, and downshifts shouldoccur between 1,500 and1,000 rpm.

To stop, let up on the acceleratorpedal and press the brake pedal.Just before the vehicle stops, pressthe clutch pedal and the brakepedal, and shift to Neutral.

Neutral: Use this position whenyou start or idle the engine. Theshift lever is in Neutral when it iscentered in the shift pattern, not inany gear.

R (Reverse): To back up, with thevehicle at a complete stop, pressdown the clutch pedal. Then pull upthe ring on the shift lever, and shift

into R (Reverse). Let up on theclutch pedal slowly while pressingthe accelerator pedal.

If the gear does not engage, shiftthe transmission to Neutral, releasethe clutch pedal and press it backdown. Repeat the gear selection.

{ WARNING

If you skip a gear when youdownshift, you could lose controlof the vehicle. You could injureyourself or others. Do not shiftdown more than one gear at atime when you downshift.

Notice: Do not skip gearswhile upshifting. This cancause premature wear in thetransmission. The repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty.



Brakes

Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS)This vehicle has the Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS), an advancedelectronic braking system that helpsprevent a braking skid.

When the engine is started and thevehicle begins to drive away, ABSchecks itself. A momentary motor orclicking noise might be heard whilethis test is going on, and it mighteven be noticed that the brakepedal moves a little. This is normal.

If there is a problem with ABS, thiswarning light stays on. See AntilockBrake System (ABS) Warning Lighton page 5‑17.

If driving safely on a wet road and itbecomes necessary to slam on thebrakes and continue braking toavoid a sudden obstacle, acomputer senses that the wheelsare slowing down. If one of thewheels is about to stop rolling, thecomputer will separately work thebrakes at each wheel.

ABS can change the brake pressureto each wheel, as required, fasterthan any driver could. This can helpthe driver steer around the obstaclewhile braking hard.

As the brakes are applied, thecomputer keeps receiving updateson wheel speed and controlsbraking pressure accordingly.

Remember: ABS does not changethe time needed to get a foot up tothe brake pedal or always decreasestopping distance. If you get tooclose to the vehicle in front of you,there will not be enough time toapply the brakes if that vehicle

suddenly slows or stops. Alwaysleave enough room up ahead tostop, even with ABS.

Using ABS

Do not pump the brakes. Just holdthe brake pedal down firmly and letABS work. You might hear the ABSpump or motor operating and feelthe brake pedal pulsate, but this isnormal.

Braking in Emergencies

ABS allows the driver to steer andbrake at the same time. In manyemergencies, steering can helpmore than even the very bestbraking.



Parking Brake

To apply the parking brake, pull upon the parking brake handle. It isnot necessary to push in on therelease button while applying theparking brake. If the ignition is in theON/RUN position, the brake systemwarning light will come on. SeeBrake System Warning Light onpage 5‑16.

To release the parking brake:

1. Hold the brake pedal down.

2. Pull the parking brake handle upuntil you can press the releasebutton.

3. Hold the release button in asyou move the brake handle allthe way down.

Notice: Driving with the parkingbrake on can overheat the brakesystem and cause prematurewear or damage to brake systemparts. Make sure that the parkingbrake is fully released and thebrake warning light is off beforedriving.

Driving with the parking brakeapplied will cause a warning chimeto sound and the RELEASEPARKING BRAKE message toappear in the DIC. The message willremain on until the parking brake isreleased or the vehicle is stopped.


Brake AssistThis vehicle has a brake assistfeature designed to assist thedriver in stopping or decreasingvehicle speed in emergency drivingconditions. This feature uses thestability system hydraulic brakecontrol module to supplement thepower brake system underconditions where the driver hasquickly and forcefully applied thebrake pedal in an attempt to quicklystop or slow down the vehicle.The stability system hydraulic brakecontrol module increases brakepressure at each corner of thevehicle until the ABS activates.



Minor brake pedal pulsation orpedal movement during this timeis normal and the driver shouldcontinue to apply the brake pedalas the driving situation dictates.The brake assist feature willautomatically disengage when thebrake pedal is released or brakepedal pressure is quicklydecreased.

Ride Control Systems

Traction ControlSystem (TCS)The vehicle has a Traction ControlSystem (TCS) that limits wheel spin.On a front-wheel-drive vehicle, thesystem operates if it senses thatone or both of the front wheels arespinning or beginning to losetraction. When this happens, thesystem brakes the spinningwheel(s), and/or reduces enginepower to limit wheel spin.

The system may be heard or feltwhile it is working, but this isnormal.

TCS is on whenever the vehicle isstarted. To limit wheel spin,especially in slippery roadconditions, the system shouldalways be left on. But, TCS canbe turned off if needed.

TCS/StabiliTrak Light

d flashes to indicate that thetraction control system is active.

If there is a problem detected withTCS, SERVICE TRACTIONCONTROL and SERVICESTABILITRAK may be displayed onthe Driver Information Center (DIC).See Vehicle Messages (CanadaBase Level) on page 5‑28 orVehicle Messages (Canada Upleveland United States) on page 5‑28.When this message is displayedand d comes on and stays on, thevehicle is safe to drive but thesystem is not operational. Drivingshould be adjusted accordingly.



If d comes on and stays on, resetthe system:

1. Stop the vehicle.

2. Turn the engine off and wait15 seconds.

3. Start the engine.

If d still comes on and stays on at aspeed above 20 km/h (13 mph), seeyour dealer for service.

A chime may also sound when thelight comes on steady.

Notice: Do not repeatedly brakeor accelerate heavily when TCS isoff. The vehicle's driveline couldbe damaged.

TCS/StabiliTrak Button

g is located on the console.

TCS Off Light

TCS can be turned off by pressingand releasing g. When TCS is

turned off, i comes on and thesystem will not limit wheel spin.Driving should be adjustedaccordingly. Press and release gagain to turn the system back on.

It may be necessary to turn thesystem off if the vehicle gets stuckin sand, mud, or snow and rockingthe vehicle is required. See If theVehicle Is Stuck on page 9‑10 formore information. See also WinterDriving on page 9‑8 for informationon using TCS when driving in snowyor icy conditions.

If cruise control is being used whenTCS activates, cruise control willautomatically disengage.

Press the cruise control button toreengage when road conditionsallow. See Cruise Control onpage 9‑40.

Adding non‐GM accessories canaffect the vehicle's performance.See Accessories and Modificationson page 10‑3 for more information.

StabiliTrak® SystemThe vehicle has a vehicle stabilityenhancement system calledStabiliTrak. It is an advancedcomputer controlled system thatassists with directional control of thevehicle in difficult driving conditions.

StabiliTrak activates when thecomputer senses a differencebetween the intended path, and thedirection the vehicle is actuallytraveling. StabiliTrak selectivelyapplies braking pressure at any oneof the vehicle's brakes to help steerthe vehicle in the intended direction.



StabiliTrak is on automaticallywhenever the vehicle is started. Toassist with directional control of thevehicle, the system should alwaysbe left on.

TCS/StabiliTrak Light

When the stability control systemactivates, d flashes on theinstrument panel. This also occurswhen traction control is activated.A noise may be heard or vibrationmay be felt in the brake pedal. Thisis normal. Continue to steer thevehicle in the intended direction.

If there is a problem detectedwith StabiliTrak, SERVICESTABILITRAK is displayed on theDriver Information Center (DIC).See Vehicle Messages (CanadaBase Level) on page 5‑28 orVehicle Messages (Canada Uplevel

and United States) on page 5‑28.When this message is displayedand/or d comes on and stays on,the vehicle is safe to drive but thesystem is not operational. Drivingshould be adjusted accordingly.

If d comes on and stays on, resetthe system:

1. Stop the vehicle.

2. Turn the engine off and wait15 seconds.

3. Start the engine.

If d still comes on and stays on at aspeed above 20 km/h (13 mph), seeyour dealer for service.

TCS/StabiliTrak Button

g is located on the console.

StabiliTrak OffLight

TCS Off Light

StabiliTrak can be turned off ifneeded by pressing and holding guntil g and i come on theinstrument panel. When StabiliTrakis turned off, the system will notassist with directional control of thevehicle or limit wheel spin. Drivingshould be adjusted accordingly.Press and release g again to turnthe system back on.

If cruise control is being used whenStabiliTrak activates, cruise controlwill automatically disengage. Pressthe cruise control button toreengage when road conditionsallow. See Cruise Control onpage 9‑40 for more information.



Cruise ControlFor vehicles with cruise control, thevehicle can maintain a speed ofabout 40 km/h (25 mph) or morewithout keeping your foot on theaccelerator. Cruise control doesnot work at speeds below40 km/h (25 mph).

If the brakes are applied, thecruise control shuts off.

The vehicle has a Traction ControlSystem (TCS) or StabiliTrak systemthat begins to limit wheel spin whileusing cruise control and the cruisecontrol will automatically disengage.See Traction Control System (TCS)on page 9‑37 or StabiliTrak® Systemon page 9‑38. When road conditionsallow you to safely use it again, thecruise control can be turned on.

{ WARNING

Cruise control can be dangerouswhere you cannot drive safely ata steady speed. So, do not usethe cruise control on windingroads or in heavy traffic.

Cruise control can be dangerouson slippery roads. On such roads,fast changes in tire traction cancause excessive wheel slip, andyou could lose control. Do not usecruise control on slippery roads. 1 (On/Off): Press to turn the

cruise control system on and off.

RES/+ (Resume/Accelerate):Move the thumbwheel up to resumea previously set speed or toaccelerate.

SET/− (Set/Coast): Move thethumbwheel down to set a speed orto make the vehicle decelerate.

* (Cancel): Press to disengagecruise control without erasing theset speed from memory.



Setting Cruise Control

If the cruise button is on when not inuse, it could get bumped and go intocruise when not desired. Keep thecruise control switch off when cruiseis not being used.

1. Press 1.

2. Get to the speed desired.

3. Move the thumbwheel down andrelease it.

4. Take your foot off the acceleratorpedal.

Resuming a Set Speed

If the cruise control is set at adesired speed and then the brakesor clutch for manual transmissionsare applied, the cruise control isdisengaged without erasing the setspeed from memory.

Once the vehicle reaches about40 km/h (25 mph) or more, movethe thumbwheel up toward RES/+briefly. The vehicle returns to thespeed selected previously andstays there.

Increasing Speed While UsingCruise Control

If the cruise control system isalready activated:. Move the thumbwheel up toward

RES/+ and hold it until thedesired speed is reached, thenrelease it.

. To increase the speed in smallamounts, move the thumbwheelup toward RES/+ briefly andthen release it. Each time this isdone, the vehicle goes about1.6 km/h (1 mph) faster.

Reducing Speed While UsingCruise Control

If the cruise control system isalready activated:. Move the thumbwheel toward

SET/− and hold until the desiredlower speed is reached, thenrelease it.

. To slow down in small amounts,move the thumbwheel towardSET/− briefly. Each time this isdone, the vehicle goes about1.6 km/h (1 mph) slower.

Passing Another Vehicle WhileUsing Cruise Control

Use the accelerator pedal toincrease the vehicle speed. Whenyou take your foot off the pedal, thevehicle slows down to the previousset cruise control speed.

Using Cruise Control on Hills

How well the cruise control workson hills depends upon the vehiclespeed, load, and the steepness ofthe hills. When going up steep hills,you might have to step on theaccelerator pedal to maintain thevehicle speed. When goingdownhill, you might have to brake orshift to a lower gear to maintain thevehicle speed. When the brakes areapplied, the cruise control isdisengaged.



Ending Cruise Control

There are three ways to end cruisecontrol:. To disengage cruise control,

step lightly on the brake pedal orclutch for a manual transmission.

. Press* on the steering wheel.

. To turn off cruise control, press1 on the steering wheel.

Erasing Speed Memory

The cruise control set speed iserased from memory if 1 is pressedor if the ignition is turned off.

Object DetectionSystems

Ultrasonic Parking AssistFor vehicles with the UltrasonicRear Parking Assist (URPA) system,it assists the driver with parkingand avoiding objects while inR (Reverse). URPA operates atspeeds less than 8 km/h (5 mph).The sensors on the rear bumperdetect objects up to 2.5 m (8 ft)behind the vehicle, and at least20 cm (8 in) off the ground.

{ WARNING

The URPA system does notdetect pedestrians, bicyclists,animals, or any other objectslocated below the bumper or thatare too close or too far from thevehicle. To prevent injury, death,

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

or vehicle damage, even withURPA, always check behind thevehicle and check all mirrorsbefore backing.

How the System Works

URPA comes on automaticallywhen the shift lever is moved intoR (Reverse). A single tone soundsto indicate the system is working.

URPA operates only at speeds lessthan 8 km/h (5 mph).

An obstacle is indicated by audiblebeeps. The interval between thebeeps becomes shorter as thevehicle gets closer to the obstacle.When the distance is less than30 cm (12 in), the beeping is acontinuous tone for five seconds.



To be detected, objects must be atleast 20 cm (8 in) off the ground andbelow trunk level. Objects must alsobe within 2.5 m (8 ft) from the rearbumper. The distance objects canbe detected may be less duringwarmer or humid weather.

Turning the System On and Off

The URPA system can be turnedon and off using the infotainmentsystem controls. See VehiclePersonalization on page 5‑34 formore information.

When the system is off, PARKASSIST OFF displays on the DriverInformation Center (DIC). Themessage disappears after a shortperiod of time.

URPA defaults to the on settingeach time the vehicle is started.

When the System Does NotSeem to Work Properly

The following messages may bedisplayed on the DIC:

SERVICE PARKING ASSIST:If this message occurs, take thevehicle to your dealer to repair thesystem.

PARK ASSIST Off: If the URPAsystem does not activate due to atemporary condition, the messagedisplays on the DIC. This can occurunder the following conditions:. The driver has disabled the

system.. The ultrasonic sensors are not

clean. Keep the vehicle's rearbumper free of mud, dirt, snow,ice, and slush. For cleaninginstructions, see Exterior Careon page 10‑86.

. The park assist sensors arecovered by frost or ice. Frost orice can form around and behindthe sensors and may not alwaysbe seen; this can occur afterwashing the vehicle in coldweather. The message may notclear until the frost or ice hasmelted.

. An object was hanging out of thetrunk during the last drive cycle.Once the object is removed,URPA will return to normaloperation.

. The bumper is damaged. Takethe vehicle to your dealer torepair the system.

. Other conditions, such asvibrations from a jackhammer orthe compression of air brakes ona very large truck, are affectingsystem performance.



FuelUse of the recommended fuel is animportant part of the propermaintenance of this vehicle. To helpkeep the engine clean and maintainoptimum vehicle performance, werecommend the use of gasolineadvertised as TOP TIER DetergentGasoline.

Look for the TOP TIER label on thefuel pump to ensure gasoline meetsenhanced detergency standardsdeveloped by auto companies. A listof marketers providing TOP TIERDetergent Gasoline can be found atwww.toptiergas.com.

Recommended FuelUse regular unleaded gasoline witha posted octane rating of 87 orhigher. If the octane rating is lessthan 87, an audible knocking noise,commonly referred to as sparkknock, might be heard when driving.If this occurs, use a gasoline ratedat 87 octane or higher as soon aspossible. If heavy knocking is heardwhen using gasoline rated at87 octane or higher, the engineneeds service.

Gasoline Specifications(U.S. and Canada Only)At a minimum, gasoline should meetASTM specification D 4814 in theUnited States or CAN/CGSB‐3.5 or3.511 in Canada. Some gasolinescontain an octane-enhancingadditive calledmethylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT). We recommendagainst the use of gasolinescontaining MMT. See Fuel Additiveson page 9‑45 for additionalinformation.



California FuelRequirementsIf the vehicle is certified to meetCalifornia Emissions Standards, it isdesigned to operate on fuels thatmeet California specifications. Seethe underhood emission controllabel. If this fuel is not available instates adopting California EmissionsStandards, the vehicle will operatesatisfactorily on fuels meetingfederal specifications, but emissioncontrol system performance mightbe affected. The malfunctionindicator lamp could turn on and thevehicle might fail a smog‐check test.See Malfunction Indicator Lamp onpage 5‑13. If this occurs, return toyour authorized dealer for diagnosis.If it is determined that the conditionis caused by the type of fuel used,repairs might not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

Fuels in ForeignCountriesNever use leaded gasoline or anyother fuel not recommended in theprevious text on fuel. Costly repairscaused by use of improper fuelwould not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

To check the fuel availability, ask anauto club, or contact a major oilcompany that does business in thecountry where you will be driving.

Fuel AdditivesTo provide cleaner air, all gasolinesin the United States are nowrequired to contain additives thathelp prevent engine and fuel systemdeposits from forming, allowing theemission control system to workproperly. In most cases, nothingshould have to be added to the fuel.However, some gasolines containonly the minimum amount ofadditive required to meet U.S.Environmental Protection Agency

regulations. To help keep fuelinjectors and intake valves cleanand avoid problems due to dirtyinjectors or valves, look for gasolinethat is advertised as TOP TIERDetergent Gasoline. Look for theTOP TIER label on the fuel pump toensure gasoline meets enhanceddetergency standards developed bythe auto companies. A list ofmarketers providing TOP TIERDetergent Gasoline can be found atwww.toptiergas.com.

For customers who do not use TOPTIER Detergent Gasoline regularly,one bottle of GM Fuel SystemTreatment PLUS, added to the fueltank at every engine oil change, canhelp clean deposits from fuelinjectors and intake valves. GM FuelSystem Treatment PLUS is the onlygasoline additive recommended byGeneral Motors. It is available atyour dealer.



Gasolines containing oxygenates,such as ethers and ethanol, andreformulated gasolines might beavailable in your area. Werecommend that you use thesegasolines, if they comply with thespecifications described earlier.However, E85 (85% ethanol) andother fuels containing more than15% ethanol must not be used invehicles that were not designedfor those fuels.

Notice: This vehicle was notdesigned for fuel that containsmethanol. Do not use fuelcontaining methanol. It cancorrode metal parts in the fuelsystem and also damage plasticand rubber parts. That damagewould not be covered under thevehicle warranty.

Some gasolines that arenot reformulated for lowemissions can contain anoctane-enhancing additive calledmethylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendantwhere you buy gasoline whether the

fuel contains MMT. We recommendagainst the use of such gasolines.Fuels containing MMT can reducespark plug life and affect emissioncontrol system performance. Themalfunction indicator lamp mightturn on. If this occurs, return to yourdealer for service.

Filling the Tank

{ WARNING

Fuel vapor burns violently and afuel fire can cause bad injuries.To help avoid injuries to you andothers, read and follow all theinstructions on the fuel pumpisland. Turn off the engine whenrefueling. Do not smoke near fuelor when refueling the vehicle.Do not use cellular phones.Keep sparks, flames, andsmoking materials away from fuel.Do not leave the fuel pumpunattended when refueling the

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

vehicle. This is against the law insome places. Do not re-enter thevehicle while pumping fuel. Keepchildren away from the fuel pump;never let children pump fuel.

The tethered fuel cap is behind thefuel door on the vehicle's passengerside. To open the fuel door, push therearward center edge in and releaseand the door will open. Turn the fuelcap counterclockwise to remove.



Do not release the cap too soon orit will spring back. Reinstall the capby turning it clockwise until it clicks.

If the cap is not properly installed,the malfunction indicator lamp willcome on. See Malfunction IndicatorLamp on page 5‑13 for moreinformation.

{ WARNING

Fuel can spray out on you if youopen the fuel cap too quickly.If you spill fuel and thensomething ignites it, you could bebadly burned. This spray canhappen if the tank is nearly full,and is more likely in hot weather.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

Open the fuel cap slowly and waitfor any hiss noise to stop. Thenunscrew the cap all the way.

Do not top off or overfill the tank.Wait a few seconds before removingthe nozzle. Clean fuel from paintedsurfaces as soon as possible. SeeExterior Care on page 10‑86.

{ WARNING

If a fire starts while you arerefueling, do not remove thenozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel byshutting off the pump or bynotifying the station attendant.Leave the area immediately.

Notice: If a new fuel cap isneeded, be sure to get the righttype of cap from your dealer. Thewrong type of fuel cap might notfit properly, might cause themalfunction indicator lamp tolight, and could damage the fueltank and emissions system. SeeMalfunction Indicator Lamp onpage 5‑13.



Filling a Portable FuelContainer

{ WARNING

Never fill a portable fuel containerwhile it is in the vehicle. Staticelectricity discharge from thecontainer can ignite the fuelvapor. You can be badly burnedand the vehicle damaged ifthis occurs. To help avoid injury toyou and others:

. Dispense fuel only intoapproved containers.

. Do not fill a container while itis inside a vehicle, in avehicle's trunk, pickup bed,or on any surface other thanthe ground.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Bring the fill nozzle in contactwith the inside of the fillopening before operating thenozzle. Contact should bemaintained until the filling iscomplete.

. Do not smoke whilepumping fuel.

. Do not use a cellular phonewhile pumping fuel.

Towing

General TowingInformationOnly use towing equipment that hasbeen designed for the vehicle.Contact your dealer or traileringdealer for assistance with preparingthe vehicle for towing a trailer.

See the following trailer towinginformation in this section:. For information on driving while

towing a trailer, see “DrivingCharacteristics andTowing Tips.”

. For maximum vehicle and trailerweights, see “Trailer Towing.”



. For information on equipment totow a trailer, see “TowingEquipment.”

For information on towing a disabledvehicle, see Towing the Vehicle onpage 10‑83. For information ontowing the vehicle behind anothervehicle such as a motor home, seeRecreational Vehicle Towing onpage 10‑84.

Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips

{ WARNING

The driver can lose control whenpulling a trailer if the correctequipment is not used or thevehicle is not driven properly.For example, if the trailer is tooheavy, the brakes may not workwell— or even at all.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

The driver and passengers couldbe seriously injured. The vehiclemay also be damaged; theresulting repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Pull a trailer only if all the steps inthis section have been followed.Ask your dealer for advice andinformation about towing a trailerwith the vehicle.

The vehicle can tow a trailer ifit is equipped with the proper trailertowing equipment. To identify thetrailering capacity of the vehicle,see Trailer Towing (Fuel EconomyModel) on page 9‑53 or TrailerTowing (Except Fuel EconomyModel) on page 9‑53. Traileringchanges handling, acceleration,braking, durability, and fueleconomy.

With the added weight, the engine,transmission, wheel assemblies,and tires are forced to work harderand under greater loads. The traileralso adds wind resistance,increasing the pulling requirements.For safe trailering, correctly use theproper trailering equipment.

The following information hasimportant trailering tips and rules foryour safety and that of yourpassengers. Read this sectioncarefully before pulling a trailer.

Pulling a Trailer

Here are some important points:. There are many laws, including

speed limit restrictions that applyto trailering. Check for legalrequirements with state orprovincial police.

. Do not tow a trailer at all duringthe first 1 600 km (1,000 mi) thenew vehicle is driven. Theengine or other parts could bedamaged.



. During the first 800 km (500 mi)that a trailer is towed, do notdrive over 80 km/h (50 mph) anddo not make starts at full throttle.This reduces wear on thevehicle.

. Vehicles with automatictransmissions can tow inD (Drive) but M (Manual Mode)is recommended. See ManualMode on page 9‑31 for moreinformation. Use a lower gear ifthe transmission shifts too often.For vehicles with a manualtransmission, it is better not touse the highest gear.

. Use the cruise control whentowing.

. Obey speed limit restrictions.Do not drive faster than themaximum posted speed fortrailers, or no more than90 km/h (55 mph), to reducewear on the vehicle.

Driving with a Trailer

Towing a trailer requires experience.Get familiar with handling andbraking with the added trailerweight. The vehicle is now longerand not as responsive as thevehicle is by itself.

Check all trailer hitch parts andattachments, safety chains,electrical connectors, lamps, tires,and mirror adjustments. If the trailerhas electric brakes, start the vehicleand trailer moving and then applythe trailer brake controller by handto be sure the brakes are working.

During the trip, check regularly tobe sure that the load is secure, andthe lamps and trailer brakes areworking properly.

Towing with a Stability ControlSystem

When towing, the sound of thestability control system might beheard. The system is reacting to thevehicle movement caused by the

trailer, which mainly occurs duringcornering. This is normal whentowing heavier trailers.

Following Distance

Stay at least twice as far behind thevehicle ahead as you would whendriving the vehicle without a trailer.This can help to avoid situationsthat require heavy braking andsudden turns.

Passing

More passing distance is neededwhen towing a trailer. Because therig is longer, it is necessary to gomuch farther beyond the passedvehicle before returning to the lane.

Backing Up

Hold the bottom of the steeringwheel with one hand. Then, to movethe trailer to the left, move that handto the left. To move the trailer to theright, move your hand to the right.Always back up slowly and,if possible, have someoneguide you.



Making Turns

Notice: Making very sharp turnswhile trailering could cause thetrailer to come in contact with thevehicle. The vehicle could bedamaged. Avoid making verysharp turns while trailering.

When turning with a trailer, makewider turns than normal. Do this sothe trailer will not strike softshoulders, curbs, road signs, trees,or other objects. Avoid jerky orsudden maneuvers. Signal well inadvance.

Turn Signals When Towing aTrailer

The arrows on the instrument panelflash whenever signaling a turn orlane change. Properly hooked up,the trailer lamps also flash, tellingother drivers the vehicle is turning,changing lanes, or stopping.

When towing a trailer, the arrows onthe instrument panel flash for turnseven if the bulbs on the trailer areburned out. For this reason you maythink other drivers are seeing thesignal when they are not. It isimportant to check occasionally tobe sure the trailer bulbs are stillworking.

Driving On Grades

Reduce speed and shift to a lowergear before starting down a long orsteep downgrade. If thetransmission is not shifted down, thebrakes might have to be used somuch that they would get hot and nolonger work well.

Vehicles with an automatictransmission can tow inD (Drive) but M (Manual Mode)is recommended. Shift thetransmission to a lower gear if thetransmission shifts too often underheavy loads and/or hilly conditions.

For vehicles with a manualtransmission, it is better not touse the highest gear.

When towing at high altitude onsteep uphill grades, consider thefollowing: Engine coolant will boil ata lower temperature than at normalaltitudes. If the engine is turned offimmediately after towing at highaltitude on steep uphill grades, thevehicle may show signs similar toengine overheating. To avoid this,let the engine run while parked,preferably on level ground, with theautomatic transmission in P (Park)for a few minutes before turning theengine off. For vehicles with manualtransmissions, let the engine runwhile parked, preferably on levelground, with the transmission out ofgear and the parking brake applied,for a few minutes before turning theengine off. If the overheat warningcomes on, see Engine Overheatingon page 10‑19.



Parking on Hills

{ WARNING

Parking the vehicle on a hill withthe trailer attached can bedangerous. If something goeswrong, the rig could start to move.People can be injured, and boththe vehicle and the trailer can bedamaged. When possible, alwayspark the rig on a flat surface.

If parking the rig on a hill:

1. Press the brake pedal, but donot shift into P (Park) yet forvehicles with an automatictransmission, or into gear forvehicles with a manualtransmission. Turn the wheelsinto the curb if facing downhill orinto traffic if facing uphill.

2. Have someone place chocksunder the trailer wheels.

3. When the wheel chocks are inplace, release the brake pedaluntil the chocks absorb the load.

4. Reapply the brake pedal. Thenapply the parking brake and shiftinto P (Park) for vehicles with anautomatic transmission or intogear for vehicles with a manualtransmission.

5. Release the brake pedal.

Leaving After Parking on a Hill

1. Apply and hold the brake pedalwhile you:

1.1. Start the engine.

1.2. Shift into a gear.

1.3. Release the parking brake.

2. Let up on the brake pedal.

3. Drive slowly until the trailer isclear of the chocks.

4. Stop and have someone pick upand store the chocks.

Maintenance When TrailerTowing

The vehicle needs service moreoften when pulling a trailer. See thismanual's Maintenance Schedule orIndex for more information. Thingsthat are especially important intrailer operation are automatictransmission fluid, engine oil, axlelubricant, belts, cooling system, andbrake system. It is a good idea toinspect these before and duringthe trip.

Check periodically to see that allhitch nuts and bolts are tight.

Engine Cooling When TrailerTowing

The cooling system may temporarilyoverheat during severe operatingconditions. See Engine Overheatingon page 10‑19.



Trailer Towing(Fuel Economy Model)The vehicle is neither designed norintended to tow a trailer.

Trailer Towing (ExceptFuel Economy Model)Before pulling a trailer, there arethree important considerations thathave to do with weight:. The weight of the trailer.. The weight of the trailer tongue.. The total weight on your

vehicle's tires.

Weight of the Trailer

How heavy can a trailer safely be?

It should never weigh more than454 kg (1,000 lbs). But even thatcan be too heavy.

It depends on how the rig is used.For example, speed, altitude, roadgrades, outside temperature, andhow much the vehicle is used topull a trailer are all important. It candepend on any special equipmenton the vehicle, and the amount oftongue weight the vehicle can carry.See “Weight of the Trailer Tongue”later in this section for moreinformation.

Maximum trailer weight is calculatedassuming only the driver is in thetow vehicle and it has all therequired trailering equipment.The weight of additional optionalequipment, passengers, andcargo in the tow vehicle mustbe subtracted from the maximumtrailer weight.

Ask your dealer for traileringinformation or advice, or write us atour Customer Assistance Offices.See Customer Assistance Officeson page 13‑3 for more information.



Weight of the Trailer Tongue

The tongue load (A) of any trailer isan important weight to measurebecause it affects the total grossweight of the vehicle. The GrossVehicle Weight (GVW) includes thecurb weight of the vehicle, anycargo carried in it, and the peoplewho will be riding in the vehicle.If there are a lot of options,equipment, passengers, or cargo inthe vehicle, it will reduce the tongueweight the vehicle can carry, whichwill also reduce the trailer weight thevehicle can tow. If towing a trailer,the tongue load must be added tothe GVW because the vehicle willbe carrying that weight, too. SeeVehicle Load Limits on page 9‑10for more information.

The trailer tongue (A) should weigh10‐15 percent of the total loadedtrailer weight (B).

After loading the trailer, weigh thetrailer and then the tongue,separately, to see if the weights areproper. If they are not, adjustmentsmight be made by moving someitems around in the trailer.

Total Weight on YourVehicle's Tires

Be sure the vehicle's tires areinflated to the upper limit for coldtires. These numbers can be foundon the Tire and Loading Informationlabel. See Vehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑10. Make sure not to go overthe GVW limit for the vehicle,including the weight of the trailertongue.



Towing Equipment

Hitches

Use the correct hitch equipment.See your dealer or a hitch dealerfor assistance.. The rear bumper on the vehicle

is not intended for hitches. Donot attach rental hitches or otherbumper-type hitches to it. Useonly a frame-mounted hitch thatdoes not attach to the bumper.

. Will any holes be made in thebody of the vehicle when thetrailer hitch is installed? If thereare, seal the holes when thehitch is removed. If the holes arenot sealed, dirt, water, anddeadly carbon monoxide (CO)from the exhaust can get into thevehicle. See Engine Exhaust onpage 9‑27.

Safety Chains

Always attach chains between thevehicle and the trailer. Cross thesafety chains under the tongue ofthe trailer to help prevent the tonguefrom contacting the road if itbecomes separated from the hitch.Leave enough slack so the rig canturn. Never allow safety chains todrag on the ground.

Trailer Brakes

Does the trailer have its ownbrakes? Be sure to read and followthe instructions for the trailer brakesso they are installed, adjusted, andmaintained properly.

Because the vehicle has antilockbrakes, do not tap into the vehicle'sbrake system. If this is done, bothbrake systems will not work well,or at all.

Conversions andAdd-Ons

Add-On ElectricalEquipmentNotice: Do not add anythingelectrical to the vehicle unlessyou check with your dealer first.Some electrical equipment candamage the vehicle and thedamage would not be covered bythe vehicle's warranty. Someadd-on electrical equipment cankeep other components fromworking as they should.

Add-on equipment can drain thevehicle's 12‐volt battery, even ifthe vehicle is not operating.

The vehicle has an airbag system.Before attempting to add anythingelectrical to the vehicle, seeServicing the Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 3‑30 and AddingEquipment to the Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 3‑31.



2 NOTES


Vehicle Care 10-1

Vehicle Care

General InformationGeneral Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2California Proposition65 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

California PerchlorateMaterials Requirements . . . . 10-3

Accessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

Vehicle ChecksDoing Your OwnService Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4

Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4Engine CompartmentOverview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6

Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9Engine Oil Life System . . . . . 10-12Automatic TransmissionFluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13

Manual TransmissionFluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13

Hydraulic Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14Engine Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . 10-14Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . 10-19Overheated EngineProtectionOperating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21

Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . 10-26Automatic Transmission ShiftLock Control FunctionCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26

Ignition Transmission LockCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27

Park Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-27

Wiper BladeReplacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28

Headlamp AimingHeadlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . 10-29

Bulb ReplacementBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-29Headlamps, Front TurnSignal and ParkingLamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29

Taillamps, Turn Signal,Sidemarker, Stoplamps,and Back-Up Lamps . . . . . . 10-31

License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . 10-34Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . 10-34

Electrical SystemElectrical SystemOverload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35

Fuses and CircuitBreakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35

Engine CompartmentFuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36

Instrument PanelFuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40


10-2 Vehicle Care

Wheels and TiresTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42Low-Profile Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43Tire Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . 10-44Tire Designations . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46Tire Terminology andDefinitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46

Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49Tire Pressure MonitorSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50

Tire Pressure MonitorOperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52

Tire Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55Tire Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57

Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57Different Size Tires andWheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59

Uniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59

Wheel Alignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61

Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-61Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-63Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65

Storing the Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . 10-72

Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-72Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . 10-80

Jump StartingJump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-80

TowingTowing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 10-83Recreational VehicleTowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-84

Appearance CareExterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-86Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-90Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-93

General InformationFor service and parts needs, visityour dealer. You will receivegenuine GM parts and GM-trainedand supported service people.

Genuine GM parts have one ofthese marks:


Vehicle Care 10-3

California Proposition65 WarningMost motor vehicles, including thisone, contain and/or emit chemicalsknown to the State of California tocause cancer and birth defects orother reproductive harm. Engineexhaust, many parts and systems,many fluids, and some componentwear by-products contain and/oremit these chemicals.

California PerchlorateMaterials RequirementsCertain types of automotiveapplications, such as airbaginitiators, seat belt pretensioners,and lithium batteries contained inRemote Keyless Entry transmitters,may contain perchlorate materials.Special handling may be necessary.For additional information, seewww.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

Accessories andModificationsAdding non‐dealer accessories ormaking modifications to the vehiclecan affect vehicle performance andsafety, including such things asairbags, braking, stability, ride andhandling, emissions systems,aerodynamics, durability, andelectronic systems like antilockbrakes, traction control, and stabilitycontrol. These accessories ormodifications could even causemalfunction or damage not coveredby the vehicle warranty.

Damage to vehicle componentsresulting from modifications or theinstallation or use of non‐GMcertified parts, including controlmodule or software modifications, isnot covered under the terms of thevehicle warranty and may affectremaining warranty coverage foraffected parts.

GM Accessories are designed tocomplement and function with othersystems on the vehicle. See yourdealer to accessorize the vehicleusing genuine GM Accessoriesinstalled by a dealer technician.

Also, see Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 3‑31.


10-4 Vehicle Care

Vehicle Checks

Doing Your OwnService Work

{ WARNING

You can be injured and thevehicle could be damaged if youtry to do service work on a vehiclewithout knowing enough about it.

. Be sure you have sufficientknowledge, experience, theproper replacement parts,and tools before attemptingany vehiclemaintenance task.

. Be sure to use the propernuts, bolts, and otherfasteners. Metric and Englishfasteners can be easilyconfused. If the wrongfasteners are used, partscan later break or fall off.You could be hurt.

If doing some of your own servicework, use the proper servicemanual. It tells you much moreabout how to service the vehiclethan this manual can. To order theproper service manual, see ServicePublications Ordering Informationon page 13‑12.

This vehicle has an airbag system.Before attempting to do your ownservice work, see Servicing theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 3‑30.

Keep a record with all parts receiptsand list the mileage and the date ofany service work performed. SeeMaintenance Records onpage 11‑16.

HoodTo open the hood:

1. Pull up on the hood releasehandle. It is located insidethe vehicle to the left of thesteering column.


Vehicle Care 10-5

2. Go to the front of the vehicleand push the secondary hoodrelease handle toward the driverside of the vehicle.

3. Lift the hood and release thehood prop from its retainer,located above the radiator.Securely place the hood propinto the slot on the underside ofthe hood.

To close the hood:

1. Before closing the hood, be sureall the filler caps are on properly.Then, lift the hood to relievepressure on the hood prop.Remove the hood prop from theslot on the underside of the hoodand return the prop to itsretainer. The prop rod must clickinto place when returning it tothe retainer to prevent hooddamage.

2. Lower the hood 30 cm (12 in)above the vehicle and release itso it fully latches. Check tomake sure the hood is closedand repeat the process ifnecessary.


10-6 Vehicle Care

Engine Compartment Overview

1.4L L4 Engine


Vehicle Care 10-7

A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter onpage 10‑14.

B. Engine Oil Dipstick. See“Checking Engine Oil” underEngine Oil on page 10‑9.

C. Electric Engine Cooling Fan(Out of View). See CoolingSystem on page 10‑16.

D. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “Whento Add Engine Oil” underEngine Oil on page 10‑9.

E. Remote Negative (-) Terminal.See Jump Starting onpage 10‑80.

F. Brake/Clutch Fluid Reservoir.See “Brake Fluid” under Brakeson page 10‑22 and HydraulicClutch on page 10‑14.

G. Battery on page 10‑25 (UnderCover).

H. Engine Coolant Surge Tank andPressure Cap. See EngineCoolant on page 10‑16.

I. Remote Positive (+) Terminal.See Jump Starting onpage 10‑80.

J. Engine Compartment FuseBlock on page 10‑36.

K. Windshield Washer FluidReservoir. See “Adding WasherFluid” under Washer Fluid onpage 10‑22.


10-8 Vehicle Care

1.8L L4 Engine


Vehicle Care 10-9

A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter onpage 10‑14.

B. Engine Oil Dipstick. See“Checking Engine Oil” underEngine Oil on page 10‑9.

C. Engine Cooling Fan (Out ofView). See Cooling System onpage 10‑16.

D. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “Whento Add Engine Oil” underEngine Oil on page 10‑9.

E. Remote Negative (-) Terminal.See Jump Starting onpage 10‑80.

F. Brake/Clutch Fluid Reservoir.See “Brake Fluid” under Brakeson page 10‑22 and HydraulicClutch on page 10‑14.

G. Battery on page 10‑25 (UnderCover).

H. Engine Coolant Surge Tank andPressure Cap. See CoolingSystem on page 10‑16.

I. Remote Positive (+) Terminal.See Jump Starting onpage 10‑80.

J. Engine Compartment FuseBlock on page 10‑36.

K. Windshield Washer FluidReservoir. See “Adding WasherFluid” under Washer Fluid onpage 10‑22.

Engine OilTo ensure proper engineperformance and long life, carefulattention must be paid to engine oil.Following these simple, butimportant steps will help protectyour investment:. Always use engine oil approved

to the proper specification and ofthe proper viscosity grade. See“Selecting the Right Engine Oil”in this section.

. Check the engine oil levelregularly and maintain theproper oil level. See “CheckingEngine Oil” and “When to AddEngine Oil” in this section.

. Change the engine oil at theappropriate time. See Engine OilLife System on page 10‑12.

. Always dispose of engine oilproperly. See “What to Do withUsed Oil” in this section.


10-10 Vehicle Care

Checking Engine Oil

It is a good idea to check the engineoil level at each fuel fill. In order toget an accurate reading, the vehiclemust be on level ground. Theengine oil dipstick handle is a yellowloop. See Engine CompartmentOverview on page 10‑6 for thelocation of the engine oil dipstick.

Obtaining an accurate oil levelreading is essential:

1. If the engine has been runningrecently, turn off the engine andallow several minutes for the oilto drain back into the oil pan.Checking the oil level too soonafter engine shutoff will notprovide an accurate oil levelreading.

2. Pull out the dipstick and clean itwith a paper towel or cloth, thenpush it back in all the way.Remove it again, keeping thetip down, and check the level.

When to Add Engine Oil

If the oil is below the cross-hatchedarea at the tip of the dipstick, add1 L (1 qt) of the recommended oiland then recheck the level. See“Selecting the Right Engine Oil” inthis section for an explanation ofwhat kind of oil to use. For engineoil crankcase capacity, seeCapacities and Specifications onpage 12‑2.

Notice: Do not add too much oil.Oil levels above or below theacceptable operating rangeshown on the dipstick are harmfulto the engine. If you find that youhave an oil level above the

operating range, i.e., the enginehas so much oil that the oil levelgets above the cross-hatchedarea that shows the properoperating range, the engine couldbe damaged. You should drainout the excess oil or limit drivingof the vehicle and seek a serviceprofessional to remove theexcess amount of oil.

See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 10‑6 for the location of theengine oil fill cap.

Add enough oil to put the levelsomewhere in the proper operatingrange. Push the dipstick all the wayback in when through.


Vehicle Care 10-11

Selecting the Right Engine Oil

Selecting the right engine oildepends on both the proper oilspecification and viscosity grade.See Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑13.

Specification

Use and ask for licensed engine oilswith the dexos1™ approvedcertification mark. Engine oilsmeeting the requirements for thevehicle should have the dexos1approved certification mark. Thiscertification mark indicates that theoil has been approved to the dexos1specification.

Notice: Failure to use therecommended engine oil orequivalent can result in enginedamage not covered by thevehicle warranty. Check with yourdealer or service provider onwhether the oil is approved to thedexos1 specification.

Viscosity Grade

SAE 5W‐30 is the best viscositygrade for the vehicle. Do not useother viscosity grade oils such asSAE 10W‐30, 10W‐40, or 20W‐50.

If in an area of extreme cold, wherethe temperature falls below −20°F(−29°C), an SAE 0W‐30 oil shouldbe used. An oil of this viscositygrade will provide easier coldstarting for the engine at extremelylow temperatures. When selectingan oil of the appropriate viscositygrade, always select an oil thatmeets the dexos1 specification orequivalent. See “Specification” formore information.

Engine Oil Additives/EngineOil Flushes

Do not add anything to the oil. Therecommended oils with the dexosspecification and displaying thedexos certification mark are all thatis needed for good performance andengine protection.

Engine oil system flushes are notrecommended and could causeengine damage not covered by thevehicle warranty.


10-12 Vehicle Care

What to Do with Used Oil

Used engine oil contains certainelements that can be unhealthy foryour skin and could even causecancer. Do not let used oil stay onyour skin for very long. Clean yourskin and nails with soap and water,or a good hand cleaner. Wash orproperly dispose of clothing or ragscontaining used engine oil. See themanufacturer's warnings about theuse and disposal of oil products.

Used oil can be a threat to theenvironment. If you change yourown oil, be sure to drain all the oilfrom the filter before disposal. Neverdispose of oil by putting it in thetrash or pouring it on the ground,into sewers, or into streams orbodies of water. Recycle it by takingit to a place that collects used oil.

Engine Oil Life System

When to Change Engine Oil

This vehicle has a computer systemthat indicates when to change theengine oil and filter. This is basedon a combination of factors whichinclude engine revolutions, enginetemperature, and miles driven.Based on driving conditions, themileage at which an oil change isindicated can vary considerably.For the oil life system to workproperly, the system must be resetevery time the oil is changed.

When the system has calculatedthat oil life has been diminished,it indicates that an oil change isnecessary. A CHANGE ENGINEOIL SOON DIC message or Code82 DIC message comes on. SeeEngine Oil Messages on page 5‑30.Change the oil as soon as possiblewithin the next 1 000 km (600 mi).

It is possible that, if driving underthe best conditions, the oil lifesystem might indicate that an oilchange is not necessary for up to ayear. The engine oil and filter mustbe changed at least once a yearand, at this time, the system mustbe reset. Your dealer has trainedservice people who will perform thiswork and reset the system. It is alsoimportant to check the oil regularlyover the course of an oil draininterval and keep it at theproper level.

If the system is ever resetaccidentally, the oil must bechanged at 5 000 km (3,000 mi)since the last oil change.Remember to reset the oil lifesystem whenever the oilis changed.


Vehicle Care 10-13

How to Reset the Engine OilLife System

Reset the system whenever theengine oil is changed so that thesystem can calculate the nextengine oil change. To reset thesystem:

1. Using the DIC MENU button andthumbwheel, scroll until youreach REMAINING OIL LIFE onthe DIC (oil can symbol with% sign for Canada).

2. Press the SET button to resetthe oil life at 100%. Whenprompted, use the thumbwheelto highlight YES or NO.Press the SET/CLEAR buttonto confirm.

Be careful not to reset the oil lifedisplay accidentally at any timeother than after the oil is changed.It cannot be reset accurately.

If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONDIC message or Code 82 DICmessage comes back on when the

vehicle is started, the engine oil lifesystem has not reset. Repeat theprocedure.

Automatic TransmissionFluid

How to Check AutomaticTransmission Fluid

It is not necessary to checkthe transmission fluid level.A transmission fluid leak is theonly reason for fluid loss. If a leakoccurs, take the vehicle to yourdealer service department and haveit repaired as soon as possible.

The vehicle is not equipped witha transmission fluid level dipstick.There is a special procedure forchecking and changing thetransmission fluid. Because thisprocedure is difficult, this shouldbe done at the dealer servicedepartment. Contact the dealer foradditional information.

Change the fluid and filter at theintervals listed in MaintenanceSchedule on page 11‑3, and besure to use the fluid listed inRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑13.

Manual TransmissionFluid

How to Check ManualTransmission Fluid

It is not necessary to check themanual transmission fluid level.A transmission fluid leak is the onlyreason for fluid loss. If a leakoccurs, take the vehicle to yourdealer service department and haveit repaired as soon as possible.See Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑13 for theproper fluid to use.


10-14 Vehicle Care

Hydraulic ClutchFor vehicles with a manualtransmission, it is not necessary toregularly check brake/clutch fluidunless there is a leak suspected.Adding fluid will not correct a leak.A fluid loss in this system couldindicate a problem. Have thesystem inspected and repaired.

When to Check and Whatto Use

The brake/hydraulic clutch fluidreservoir cap has this symbol on it.The common brake/clutch fluidreservoir is filled with DOT 3 brakefluid as indicated on the reservoircap. See Engine CompartmentOverview on page 10‑6 forreservoir location.

How to Check and Add Fluid

Visually check the brake/clutch fluidreservoir to make sure the fluid levelis at the MIN (minimum) line on theside of the reservoir. The brake/hydraulic clutch fluid system shouldbe closed and sealed.

Do not remove the cap to check thefluid level or to top off the fluid level.Remove the cap only whennecessary to add the proper fluiduntil the level reaches the MIN line.

Engine Air Cleaner/FilterSee Engine Compartment Overviewon page 10‑6 for the location of theengine air cleaner/filter.

When to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/Filter

Inspect the air cleaner/filter at thescheduled maintenance intervalsand replace it at the first oil changeafter each 80 000 km (50,000 mi)interval. See Maintenance Scheduleon page 11‑3 for more information.

If you are driving in dusty/dirtyconditions, inspect the filter ateach engine oil change.

How to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/Filter

To inspect the air cleaner/filter,remove the filter from the vehicleand lightly shake the filter to releaseloose dust and dirt. If the filterremains covered with dirt, a newfilter is required.


Vehicle Care 10-15

To inspect or replace the engine aircleaner/filter:

1.4L L4 Engine

1.8L L4 Engine

1. Remove the six screws thatsecure the cover on.

2. Lift off the cover.

3. Inspect or replace the engine aircleaner/filter.

4. Align the filter correctly.

5. Install the cover by lowering itover the filter and secure withthe six screws.

{ WARNING

Operating the engine with the aircleaner/filter off can cause you orothers to be burned. The aircleaner not only cleans the air; ithelps to stop flames if the enginebackfires. Use caution whenworking on the engine and do notdrive with the air cleaner/filter off.

Notice: If the air cleaner/filter isoff, dirt can easily get into theengine, which could damage it.Always have the air cleaner/filterin place when you are driving.


10-16 Vehicle Care

Cooling SystemThe cooling system allows theengine to maintain the correctworking temperature.

1.4L L4 Engine Shown, 1.8L L4Engine Similar

A. Engine Cooling Fan(Out of View)

B. Engine Coolant Surge Tank andPressure Cap

{ WARNING

An electric engine cooling fanunder the hood can start up evenwhen the engine is not runningand can cause injury. Keephands, clothing, and tools awayfrom any underhood electric fan.

{ WARNING

Heater and radiator hoses, andother engine parts, can be veryhot. Do not touch them. If you do,you can be burned.

Do not run the engine if there is aleak. If you run the engine, itcould lose all coolant. That couldcause an engine fire, and youcould be burned. Get any leakfixed before you drive the vehicle.

Notice: Using coolant other thanDEX-COOL® can cause prematureengine, heater core, or radiator

corrosion. In addition, the enginecoolant could require changingsooner, at 50 000 km (30,000mi)or 24months, whichever occursfirst. Any repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Always use DEX-COOL(silicate-free) coolant in thevehicle.

Engine CoolantThe cooling system in the vehicle isfilled with DEX-COOL enginecoolant. This coolant is designed toremain in the vehicle for 5 years or240 000 km (150,000 mi), whicheveroccurs first.

The following explains the coolingsystem and how to check and addcoolant when it is low. If there is aproblem with engine overheating,see Engine Overheating onpage 10‑19.


Vehicle Care 10-17

What to Use

{ WARNING

Adding only plain water or someother liquid to the cooling systemcan be dangerous. Plain waterand other liquids, can boil beforethe proper coolant mixture will.The coolant warning system isset for the proper coolant mixture.With plain water or the wrongmixture, the engine could get toohot but you would not get theoverheat warning. The enginecould catch fire and you orothers could be burned. Use a50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and DEX-COOL coolant.

Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOLcoolant. If using this mixture,nothing else needs to be added.This mixture:. Gives freezing protection down

to −37°C (−34°F), outsidetemperature.

. Gives boiling protection up to129°C (265°F), enginetemperature.

. Protects against rust andcorrosion.

. Will not damage aluminum parts.

. Helps keep the proper enginetemperature.

Notice: If an improper coolantmixture is used, the engine couldoverheat and be badly damaged.The repair cost would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Too much water in the mixturecan freeze and crack the engine,radiator, heater core, andother parts.

Never dispose of engine coolant byputting it in the trash, pouring it onthe ground, or into sewers, streams,or bodies of water. Have the coolantchanged by an authorized servicecenter, familiar with legalrequirements regarding usedcoolant disposal. This will helpprotect the environment andyour health.

Checking Coolant

The vehicle must be on a levelsurface when checking thecoolant level.

Check to see if coolant is visible inthe coolant surge tank. If the coolantinside the coolant surge tank isboiling, do not do anything else untilit cools down. If coolant is visiblebut the coolant level is not at theindicated mark, add a 50/50 mixtureof clean, drinkable water andDEX-COOL coolant at the coolantsurge tank, but be sure the coolingsystem is cool before this is done.See Engine Overheating onpage 10‑19 for more information.


10-18 Vehicle Care

The coolant surge tank is located inthe engine compartment on thedriver side of the vehicle. SeeEngine Compartment Overview onpage 10‑6 for more information onlocation.

How to Add Coolant to theCoolant Surge Tank

Notice: This vehicle has aspecific coolant fill procedure.Failure to follow this procedurecould cause the engine tooverheat and be severelydamaged.

If no problem is found, check to seeif coolant is visible in the coolantsurge tank. If coolant is visible butthe coolant level is not at theindicated level mark, add a50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and DEX-COOL coolant atthe coolant surge tank, but be surethe cooling system, including thecoolant surge tank pressure cap,is cool before you do it.

{ WARNING

Steam and scalding liquids from ahot cooling system can blow outand burn you badly. They areunder pressure, and if you turnthe coolant surge tank pressurecap— even a little— they cancome out at high speed. Neverturn the cap when the coolingsystem, including the coolantsurge tank pressure cap, is hot.Wait for the cooling system andcoolant surge tank pressure capto cool if you ever have to turnthe pressure cap.

{ WARNING

Adding only plain water or someother liquid to the cooling systemcan be dangerous. Plain waterand other liquids, can boil beforethe proper coolant mixture will.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

The coolant warning system isset for the proper coolant mixture.With plain water or the wrongmixture, the engine could get toohot but you would not get theoverheat warning. The enginecould catch fire and you orothers could be burned. Use a50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and DEX-COOL coolant.

Notice: In cold weather, watercan freeze and crack the engine,radiator, heater core and otherparts. Use the recommendedcoolant and the proper coolantmixture.

{ WARNING

You can be burned if you spillcoolant on hot engine parts.Coolant contains ethylene glycol

(Continued)


Vehicle Care 10-19

WARNING (Continued)

and it will burn if the engine partsare hot enough. Do not spillcoolant on a hot engine.

1.4L L4 Engine Shown, 1.8L L4Engine Similar

1. Remove the coolant surge tankpressure cap when the coolingsystem, including the coolantsurge tank pressure cap andupper radiator hose, is nolonger hot.

Turn the pressure cap slowlycounterclockwise aboutone-quarter of a turn. If you heara hiss, wait for that to stop. Thiswill allow any pressure still left tobe vented out thedischarge hose.

2. Keep turning the pressure capslowly and remove it.

3. Fill the coolant surge tank withthe proper DEX-COOL coolantmixture to the indicatedlevel mark.

4. With the coolant surge tankpressure cap off, start theengine and let it run until theupper radiator hose can be feltgetting hot. Watch out for theengine cooling fan.

By this time, the coolant levelinside the coolant surge tankmay be lower. If the level islower, add more of the properDEX-COOL coolant mixture tothe coolant surge tank until thelevel reaches the indicatedlevel mark.

5. Replace the pressure cap.Be sure the pressure cap ishand-tight.

Check the level in the coolant surgetank when the cooling system hascooled down. If the coolant is not atthe proper level, repeat Steps 1through 3 and reinstall the pressurecap. If the coolant still is not at theproper level when the system coolsdown again, see your dealer.

Engine OverheatingThe vehicle has several indicatorsto warn of engine overheating.

There is an engine coolanttemperature gauge on the vehicleinstrument panel cluster. SeeEngine Coolant Temperature Gaugeon page 5‑10.

If the decision is made not to lift thehood when this warning appears,get service help right away. SeeRoadside Assistance Program onpage 13‑6.


10-20 Vehicle Care

If the decision is made to lift thehood, make sure the vehicle isparked on a level surface.

Check to see if the engine coolingfan is running. If the engine isoverheating, the fan should berunning. If it is not, do not continueto run the engine and have thevehicle serviced.

Notice: Engine damage fromrunning the engine withoutcoolant is not covered by thewarranty.

If Steam Is Coming from theEngine Compartment

{ WARNING

Steam from an overheated enginecan burn you badly, even if youjust open the hood. Stay awayfrom the engine if you see or hearsteam coming from it. Just turn itoff and get everyone away fromthe vehicle until it cools down.Wait until there is no sign ofsteam or coolant before youopen the hood.

If you keep driving when theengine is overheated, the liquidsin it can catch fire. You or otherscould be badly burned. Stop theengine if it overheats, and get outof the vehicle until the engineis cool.

If No Steam Is Coming fromthe Engine Compartment

If an engine overheat warning isdisplayed but no steam can be seenor heard, the problem may not betoo serious. Sometimes the enginecan get a little too hot when thevehicle:. Climbs a long hill on a hot day.. Stops after high-speed driving.. Idles for long periods in traffic.. Tows a trailer.

If the overheat warning is displayedwith no sign of steam:

1. Turn the air off.

2. Turn the heater on to the highesttemperature and to the highestfan speed. Open the windowsas necessary.


Vehicle Care 10-21

3. In heavy traffic, let the engineidle in N (Neutral) while stopped.If it is safe to do so, pull off theroad, shift to P (Park) orN (Neutral) and let theengine idle.

If the temperature overheat gaugeis no longer in the overheat zone oran overheat warning no longerdisplays, the vehicle can be driven.Continue to drive the vehicle slowlyfor about 10 minutes. Keep a safevehicle distance from the vehicle infront. If the warning does not comeback on, continue to drive normally.

If the warning continues, pull over,stop, and park the vehicleright away.

If there is no sign of steam, idle theengine for three minutes whileparked. If the warning is stilldisplayed, turn off the engine until itcools down. Also, see “OverheatedEngine Protection Operating Mode”following.

Overheated EngineProtectionOperating ModeThis emergency operating modeallows the vehicle to be driven to asafe place in an emergencysituation. If an overheated enginecondition exists, an overheatprotection mode which alternatesfiring groups of cylinders helpsprevent engine damage. In thismode, a significant loss in powerand engine performance will benoticed. The temperature gaugewill indicate an overheat conditionexists. Driving extended km (mi)and/or towing a trailer in theoverheat protection mode shouldbe avoided.

Notice: After driving in theoverheated engine protectionoperating mode, to avoid enginedamage, allow the engine to coolbefore attempting any repair.The engine oil will be severelydegraded. Repair the cause ofcoolant loss, change the oil andreset the oil life system. SeeEngine Oil on page 10‑9.


10-22 Vehicle Care

Washer Fluid

What to Use

When windshield washer fluid isneeded, be sure to read themanufacturer's instructions beforeuse. If operating the vehicle in anarea where the temperature may fallbelow freezing, use a fluid that hassufficient protection againstfreezing.

Adding Washer Fluid

Open the cap with the washersymbol on it. Add washer fluid untilthe tank is full. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 10‑6 for reservoir location.

Notice. When using concentratedwasher fluid, follow themanufacturer's instructionsfor adding water.

. Do not mix water withready-to-use washer fluid.Water can cause the solutionto freeze and damage thewasher fluid tank and otherparts of the washer system.Also, water does not clean aswell as washer fluid.

. Fill the washer fluid tank onlythree-quarters full when it isvery cold. This allows forfluid expansion if freezingoccurs, which could damagethe tank if it iscompletely full.

. Do not use engine coolant(antifreeze) in the windshieldwasher. It can damage thewindshield washer systemand paint.

BrakesThis vehicle has front disc brakesand could have rear drum brakes orrear disc brakes.

Disc brake pads have built-in wearindicators that make a high-pitchedwarning sound when the brake padsare worn and new pads are needed.The sound can come and go or beheard all the time the vehicle ismoving, except when applying thebrake pedal firmly.

{ WARNING

The brake wear warning soundmeans that soon the brakes willnot work well. That could lead toa crash. When the brake wearwarning sound is heard, have thevehicle serviced.

Notice: Continuing to drive withworn-out brake pads could resultin costly brake repair.


Vehicle Care 10-23

Some driving conditions or climatescan cause a brake squeal when thebrakes are first applied or lightlyapplied. This does not meansomething is wrong with the brakes.

Properly torqued wheel nuts arenecessary to help prevent brakepulsation. When tires are rotated,inspect brake pads for wear andevenly tighten wheel nuts in theproper sequence to torquespecifications in Capacities andSpecifications on page 12‑2.

If the vehicle has rear drum brakes,they do not have wear indicators,but if a rear brake rubbing noise isheard, have the rear brake liningsinspected immediately. Rear brakedrums should be removed andinspected each time the tires areremoved for rotation or changing.Drum brakes have an inspectionhole to inspect lining wear duringscheduled maintenance. When thefront brake pads are replaced, havethe rear brakes inspected, too.

Brake linings should always bereplaced as complete axle sets.

Brake Pedal Travel

See your dealer if the brake pedaldoes not return to normal height,or if there is a rapid increase inpedal travel. This could be a signthat brake service might berequired.

Brake Adjustment

Every time the brakes are applied,with or without the vehicle moving,the brakes adjust for wear.

Replacing Brake System Parts

The braking system on a vehicle iscomplex. Its many parts have to beof top quality and work well togetherif the vehicle is to have really goodbraking. The vehicle was designedand tested with top-quality brakeparts. When parts of the brakingsystem are replaced, be sure to getnew, approved replacement parts.If this is not done, the brakes mightnot work properly.

For example, installing disc brakepads that are wrong for the vehicle,can change the balance betweenthe front and rear brakes — for theworse. The braking performanceexpected can change in many otherways if the wrong replacementbrake parts are installed.

Brake Fluid

The brake/clutch master cylinderreservoir is filled with DOT 3 brakefluid as indicated on the reservoircap. See Engine CompartmentOverview on page 10‑6 for thelocation of the reservoir.


10-24 Vehicle Care

There are only two reasons why thebrake fluid level in the reservoirmight go down:. The brake fluid level goes down

because of normal brake liningwear. When new linings areinstalled, the fluid level goesback up.

. A fluid leak in the brake/clutchhydraulic system can also causea low fluid level. Have the brake/clutch hydraulic system fixed,since a leak means that sooneror later the brakes will notwork well.

Do not top off the brake/clutch fluid.Adding fluid does not correct a leak.If fluid is added when the linings areworn, there will be too much fluidwhen new brake linings areinstalled. Add or remove fluid, asnecessary, only when work is doneon the brake/clutch hydraulicsystem.

{ WARNING

If too much brake fluid is added, itcan spill on the engine and burn,if the engine is hot enough. Youor others could be burned, andthe vehicle could be damaged.Add brake fluid only when work isdone on the brake/clutchhydraulic system.

Checking Brake Fluid

The brake/clutch fluid can bechecked without taking off the capby looking at the brake/clutch fluidreservoir.

The fluid level should be aboveMIN. If it is not, have the brake/clutch hydraulic system checked tosee if there is a leak.

After work is done on the brake/clutch hydraulic system, make surethe level is above MIN but not overthe MAX mark.

When the brake/clutch fluid falls to alow level, the brake warning lightcomes on. See Brake SystemWarning Light on page 5‑16.

What to Add

Use only new DOT 3 brake fluidfrom a sealed container. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑13.

Always clean the brake/clutch fluidreservoir cap and the area aroundthe cap before removing it. Thishelps keep dirt from entering thereservoir.

{ WARNING

With the wrong kind of fluid in thebrake/clutch hydraulic system, thebrakes might not work well. Thiscould cause a crash. Always usethe proper brake/clutch fluid.


Vehicle Care 10-25

Notice. Using the wrong fluid canbadly damage brake/clutchhydraulic system parts. Forexample, just a few drops ofmineral-based oil, such asengine oil, in the brakehydraulic system candamage brake hydraulicsystem parts so badly thatthey will have to be replaced.Do not let someone put inthe wrong kind of fluid.

. If brake fluid is spilled onthe vehicle's paintedsurfaces, the paint finish canbe damaged. Be careful notto spill brake fluid on thevehicle. If you do, wash it offimmediately.

BatteryRefer to the replacement number onthe original battery label when anew battery is needed.

{ WARNING

Battery posts, terminals, andrelated accessories contain leadand lead compounds, chemicalsknown to the State of California tocause cancer and reproductiveharm. Wash hands after handling.

Vehicle Storage

{ WARNING

Batteries have acid that can burnyou and gas that can explode.You can be badly hurt if you arenot careful. See Jump Starting onpage 10‑80 for tips on workingaround a battery withoutgetting hurt.

Infrequent Usage: Remove theblack, negative (−) cable from thebattery to keep the battery fromrunning down.

Extended Storage: Remove theblack, negative (−) cable from thebattery or use a battery tricklecharger.


10-26 Vehicle Care

Starter Switch Check

{ WARNING

When you are doing thisinspection, the vehicle couldmove suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others couldbe injured.

1. Before starting this check, besure there is enough roomaround the vehicle.

2. Firmly apply both the parkingbrake and the regular brake.See Parking Brake onpage 9‑36.

Do not use the acceleratorpedal, and be ready to turn offthe engine immediately if itstarts.

3. For automatic transmissionvehicles, try to start the enginein each gear. The vehicle shouldstart only in P (Park) orN (Neutral). If the vehicle startsin any other position, contactyour dealer for service.

For manual transmissionvehicles, put the shift lever inNeutral, push the clutch pedaldown halfway, and try to startthe engine. The vehicle shouldstart only when the clutch pedalis pushed down all the way tothe floor. If the vehicle startswhen the clutch pedal is notpushed all the way down,contact your dealer for service.

Automatic TransmissionShift Lock ControlFunction Check

{ WARNING

When you are doing thisinspection, the vehicle couldmove suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others couldbe injured.

1. Before starting this check, besure there is enough roomaround the vehicle. It should beparked on a level surface.


Vehicle Care 10-27

2. Firmly apply the parking brake.See Parking Brake onpage 9‑36.

Be ready to apply the regularbrake immediately if the vehiclebegins to move.

3. With the engine off, turn theignition on, but do not start theengine. Without applying theregular brake, try to move theshift lever out of P (Park) withnormal effort. If the shift levermoves out of P (Park), contactyour dealer for service.

Ignition TransmissionLock CheckWhile parked, and with the parkingbrake set, try to turn the ignition toLOCK/OFF in each shift leverposition.. For automatic transmission

vehicles, the ignition should turnto LOCK/OFF only when the

shift lever is in P (Park). Theignition key should come outonly in LOCK/OFF.

. For manual transmissionvehicles, the ignition key shouldcome out only in LOCK/OFF.

Contact your dealer if service isrequired.

Park Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check

{ WARNING

When you are doing this check,the vehicle could begin to move.You or others could be injuredand property could be damaged.Make sure there is room in frontof the vehicle in case it begins toroll. Be ready to apply the regularbrake at once should the vehiclebegin to move.

Park on a fairly steep hill, with thevehicle facing downhill. Keepingyour foot on the regular brake, setthe parking brake.. To check the parking brake's

holding ability: With the enginerunning and the transmission inN (Neutral), slowly remove footpressure from the regular brakepedal. Do this until the vehicle isheld by the parking brake only.

. To check the P (Park)mechanism's holding ability:With the engine running, shift toP (Park). Then release theparking brake followed by theregular brake.

Contact your dealer if service isrequired.


10-28 Vehicle Care

Wiper Blade ReplacementWindshield wiper blades shouldbe inspected for wear or cracking.See Maintenance Schedule onpage 11‑3 for more information.

Replacement blades come indifferent types and are removedin different ways. For properwindshield wiper blade lengthand type, see MaintenanceReplacement Parts on page 11‑15.

Notice: Allowing the wiper bladearm to touch the windshield whenno wiper blade is installed coulddamage the windshield. Anydamage that occurs would not becovered by your warranty. Do notallow the wiper blade arm totouch the windshield.

To replace the windshield wiperblade:

1. Pull the wiper assembly awayfrom the windshield.

2. Lift up on the plastic latch in themiddle of the wiper blade wherethe wiper arm attaches.

3. With the latch open, pull thewiper blade down toward thewindshield far enough to releaseit from the J-hooked end of thewiper arm.

4. Remove the wiper blade.

Allowing the wiper blade arm totouch the windshield when nowiper blade is installed coulddamage the windshield. Anydamage that occurs would notbe covered by the vehiclewarranty. Do not allow the wiperblade to touch the windshield.

5. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 forwiper blade replacement.


Vehicle Care 10-29

Headlamp AimingHeadlamp aim has been preset atthe factory and should need nofurther adjustment.

However, if the vehicle is damagedin a crash, the headlamp aim maybe affected. Aim adjustment to thelow-beam headlamps may benecessary if oncoming drivers flashtheir high-beam headlamps at you(for vertical aim).

If the headlamps need to bere-aimed, it is recommended thatthe vehicle be taken to a dealerfor service.

Bulb ReplacementFor the proper type of replacementbulbs, see Replacement Bulbs onpage 10‑34.

For any bulb‐changing procedurenot listed in this section, contactyour dealer.

Headlamps, Front TurnSignal and ParkingLamps

A. Parking/Turn Signal Lamp

B. High‐Beam Headlamp/Low‐Beam Headlamp and DRL

High‐Beam Headlamp/Low‐Beam Headlamp and DRL

1. Open the hood. See Hood onpage 10‑4.

2. Remove the connectorretaining tab (A).

3. Disconnect the wiring harnessconnector from the bulb (C) bypressing the connectorrelease (B) and pullingstraight back.


10-30 Vehicle Care

4. Remove the bulb (C) from theheadlamp assembly by turningcounterclockwise and pullingstraight back.

5. Install the new bulb in theheadlamp assembly by turningclockwise.

6. Install the wiring harnessconnector to the bulb. Be surethe connector release (B) locksinto place.

7. Install the connectorretaining tab (A).

Parking/Turn Signal Lamp

1. Open the hood. See Hood onpage 10‑4.

2. Remove the parking/turn signallamp bulb socket from theheadlamp assembly by turningcounterclockwise.

3. Remove the bulb (A) from thebulb socket.

4. Install the new bulb in thebulb socket.

5. Install the bulb socket into theheadlamp assembly by turningclockwise.


Vehicle Care 10-31

Taillamps, Turn Signal,Sidemarker, Stoplamps,and Back-Up Lamps

Trunk Deck Inboard Taillamps

1. Open the trunk.

2. Remove the trunk deck trimcover (A).

3. Remove the bulb socket (B) byturning counterclockwise andpulling straight out.

4. Remove the bulb from thesocket (A).

5. Install the new bulb in thebulb socket.

6. Install the bulb socket by turningclockwise.

7. Install the trunk deck trim cover.


10-32 Vehicle Care

A. Back-up Lamp

B. Stoplamp/Taillamp

C. Turn Signal Lamp

D. Sidemarker Lamp

To replace any one of these bulbs:

Stoplamp/Taillamp, Turn Signal,Back‐up, and RearSidemarker Lamp

1. Open the trunk.

2. Open the two screw covers.

3. Remove the two screws, thatsecure the taillamp assembly.


Vehicle Care 10-33

4. Remove the taillamp assemblyby pulling it straight back untilthe two posts disengage fromthe grommets.

A. Sidemarker Lamp

B. Turn Signal Lamp

C. Stoplamp/Taillamp

D. Back-up Lamp

5. Remove the bulb socket fromthe taillamp assembly by turningit counterclockwise.

6. Install a new bulb into thebulb socket.

7. Install the bulb socket into thetaillamp assembly by turningit clockwise.

8. Install the taillamp assembly andtighten the two screws.

9. Close the two screw covers.


10-34 Vehicle Care

License Plate LampTo replace the license platelamp bulb:

1. Remove the two screws from thelicense plate lamp assembly.

2. Turn and pull the license platelamp assembly down.

3. Turn the bulb socketcounterclockwise and pull thebulb straight out of the socket.

4. Push the new bulb into thesocket.

5. Install the bulb socket by turningclockwise into the license platelamp assembly.

6. Replace the license plate lampassembly by using the twoscrews to secure.

Replacement Bulbs

Exterior LampBulb

Number

Back-Up Lamp 921K

Front and RearSidemarker Lamp

194

Front Parking/TurnSignal Lamp

7444NA

High Beam/LowBeam and DRLHeadlamp

H13LL

Rear TurnSignal Lamp

7443NA

Stoplamp/Taillamp 3057K LCP

For replacement bulbs not listedhere, contact your dealer.


Vehicle Care 10-35

Electrical System

Electrical SystemOverloadThe vehicle has fuses and circuitbreakers to protect against anelectrical system overload.

When the current electrical load istoo heavy, the circuit breaker opensand closes, protecting the circuituntil the current load returns tonormal or the problem is fixed. Thisgreatly reduces the chance of circuitoverload and fire caused byelectrical problems.

Fuses and circuit breakers protectpower devices in the vehicle.

Replace a bad fuse with a new oneof the identical size and rating.

If there is a problem on the road anda fuse needs to be replaced, thesame amperage fuse can beborrowed. Choose some feature ofthe vehicle that is not needed to useand replace it as soon as possible.

Headlamp Wiring

An electrical overload may causethe lamps to go on and off, or insome cases to remain off. Have theheadlamp wiring checked right awayif the lamps go on and off orremain off.

Windshield Wipers

If the wiper motor overheats due toheavy snow or ice, the windshieldwipers will stop until the motor coolsand will then restart.

Although the circuit is protectedfrom electrical overload, overloaddue to heavy snow or ice maycause wiper linkage damage.Always clear ice and heavy snowfrom the windshield before using thewindshield wipers.

If the overload is caused by anelectrical problem and not snow orice, be sure to get it fixed.

Fuses and CircuitBreakersThe wiring circuits in the vehicle areprotected from short circuits by acombination of fuses and circuitbreakers. This greatly reduces thechance of damage caused byelectrical problems.

To check a fuse, look at thesilver-colored band inside the fuse.If the band is broken or melted,replace the fuse. Be sure to replacea bad fuse with a new one of theidentical size and rating.

Fuses of the same amperagecan be temporarily borrowed fromanother fuse location, if a fusegoes out. Replace the fuse assoon as possible.

To identify and check fuses, circuitbreakers, and relays, see EngineCompartment Fuse Block onpage 10‑36 and Instrument PanelFuse Block on page 10‑40.


10-36 Vehicle Care

Engine CompartmentFuse Block

To remove the fuse block cover,squeeze the clips and swing it up.

Notice: Spilling liquid on anyelectrical component on thevehicle may damage it. Alwayskeep the covers on any electricalcomponent.

Engine Compartment Fuse Block

The vehicle may not be equippedwith all of the fuses, relays, andfeatures shown.

Mini Fuses Usage

1 TransmissionControl Module

2Engine ControlModule

3 Not Used


Vehicle Care 10-37

Mini Fuses Usage

4 Canister VentSolenoid

5 Ignition

7 Not Used

8 Fuel Injection

9Fuel Injection/Ignition System

10Engine ControlModule

11 Lambda Sensor

13Canister VentSolenoid

14 Not Used

15 Rear Wiper

16Ignition/Air QualitySensor/Aero‐Shutter

17 Ignition/Airbag

Mini Fuses Usage

18 Fuel Control Module

19 Not Used

20 Fuel Pump

23 Not Used

29 Not Used

30Antilock BrakeSystem

31Body ControlModule


33 Front Seat Heating

34Sunroof(If Equipped)

35InfotainmentSystem/Amplifier

36 Not Used

Mini Fuses Usage

37 High BeamRight Side

38 High Beam Left Side

39 Not Used

40 Not Used

46 Cooling Fan

47 Lambda Sensor

48 Fog Lights

49 Not Used

50 Not Used

51 Horn

52 Ignition

53Automatic DimmingRearview Mirror

54Light Switch/Light Control


10-38 Vehicle Care

Mini Fuses Usage

55 Mirror Folding

56 Windshield Washer

57SteeringColumn Lock

58 Not Used

60 Heated Mirror

61 Heated Mirror

62 Air Conditioning

63Rear WindowSensor

64 Air Quality Sensor

65 Rear Fog Lamp

66 Rear Washer

Mini Fuses Usage

67 Fuel System ControlModule

68 Not Used

69Battery VoltageSensor

70 Not Used

71 Not Used

J‐CaseFuses

Usage

6 Front Wipers

12 Starter Solenoid

21 Rear PowerWindows

J‐CaseFuses

Usage

22 Not Used

24Front PowerWindows

25ElectronicVacuum Pump

26Antilock BrakeSystem Pump

27Electronic KeySystem/PEPS

28Rear WindowDefogger

41 Not Used

42 Cooling Fan K2


Vehicle Care 10-39

J‐CaseFuses

Usage

43 Not Used

44 Not Used

45 Cooling Fan K1

59 Not Used

MicroRelays

Usage

1 A/C Clutch

2 Starter Solenoid

4 Front Wiper Speed

MicroRelays

Usage

5 Front Wiper On

6 Not Used

10 Cooling Fan K3

12 Cooling Fan K3

14 Not Used

U‐MicroRelays

Usage

3 Cooling Fan K7

8 Fuel Pump

11 Not Used

HC Relays Usage

9 Cooling Fan K2

13 Cooling Fan K1

Mini Relays Usage

7 Ignition 87 Main

15 Ignition 15

16 Not Used

17 Not Used


10-40 Vehicle Care

Instrument Panel FuseBlock

The instrument panel fuse block isin the driver side of the instrumentpanel. To access the fuses:

1. Open the fuse block cover bypulling out at the top.

2. Remove the lower edge ofthe cover.

3. Remove the cover.

To reinstall the cover, reverse thesteps above.

Instrument Panel Fuse Block

The vehicle may not be equippedwith all of the fuses, relays, andfeatures shown.

Fuses Usage

1InfotainmentSystem/Hands‐freePhone

2 Not Used

3Body ControlModule

4 Infotainment System

5Information Display/Parking Assist

6 Cigarette Lighter

7 Power Outlet

8 Body ControlModule

9Body ControlModule



Vehicle Care 10-41

Fuses Usage

11 Interior Fan

12 Not Used

13 Power Seat

14DiagnosticConnector

15 Airbag

16Central LockingSystem/Tailgate

17Air ConditioningSystem

18 Not Used

19 Not Used

Fuses Usage

20 Not Used

21 Instrument Cluster

22Ignition/ElectronicKey System



25SteeringColumn Lock

26 Not Used

Relays Usage

1 Trunk Open

2 Logistics Module

3 RAP Relay


10-42 Vehicle Care

Wheels and Tires

TiresEvery new GM vehicle hashigh-quality tires made by aleading tire manufacturer.See the warranty manual forinformation regarding the tirewarranty and where to getservice. For additionalinformation refer to the tiremanufacturer.

{ WARNING

. Poorly maintained andimproperly used tires aredangerous.

. Overloading the tires cancause overheating as a resultof too much flexing. Therecould be a blowout and aserious crash. See VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑10.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Underinflated tires pose thesame danger as overloadedtires. The resulting crashcould cause serious injury.Check all tires frequently tomaintain the recommendedpressure. Tire pressureshould be checked when thetires are cold.

. Overinflated tires are morelikely to be cut, punctured,or broken by a suddenimpact — such as whenhitting a pothole. Keep tires atthe recommended pressure.

. Worn or old tires can cause acrash. If the tread is badlyworn, replace them.

. Replace any tires that havebeen damaged by impactswith potholes, curbs, etc.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Improperly repaired tires cancause a crash. Only thedealer or an authorized tireservice center should repair,replace, dismount, andmount the tires.

. Do not spin the tires inexcess of 55 km/h (35 mph)on slippery surfaces suchas snow, mud, ice, etc.Excessive spinning maycause the tires to explode.

Winter TiresConsider installing winter tires onthe vehicle if frequent driving onsnow or ice covered roads isexpected. All season tires providegood overall performance on mostsurfaces, but they may not offerthe traction or the same level ofperformance as winter tires onsnow or ice covered roads.


Vehicle Care 10-43

Winter tires, in general, aredesigned for increased traction onsnow and ice covered roads. Withwinter tires, there may be decreaseddry road traction, increased roadnoise, and shorter tread life. Afterchanging to winter tires, be alert forchanges in vehicle handling andbraking.

See your dealer for detailsregarding winter tire availability andproper tire selection. Also, seeBuying New Tires on page 10‑57.

If using snow tires:. Use tires of the same brand and

tread type on all four wheelpositions.

. Use only radial ply tires of thesame size, load range, andspeed rating as the originalequipment tires.

Winter tires with the same speedrating as the original equipment tiresmay not be available for H, V, W, Y,and ZR speed rated tires. If wintertires with a lower speed rating arechosen, never exceed the tire'smaximum speed capability.

Low-Profile TiresIf the vehicle has P225/45R18size tires, they are classified aslow‐profile tires. These tires aredesigned for very responsivedriving on wet or dry pavement,however, may produce moreroad noise and tend towear faster.

Notice: Low‐profile tires aremore susceptible to damagefrom road hazards or curbimpact than standard profiletires. Tire and/or wheelassembly damage can occurwhen coming into contactwith road hazards like,potholes, or sharp edgedobjects, or when sliding into acurb. The warranty does notcover this type of damage.Keep tires set to the correctinflation pressure and, whenpossible, avoid contact withcurbs, potholes, and otherroad hazards.


10-44 Vehicle Care

Tire Sidewall LabelingUseful information about a tire ismolded into its sidewall. Theexamples show a typicalpassenger vehicle tire and acompact spare tire sidewall.

Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire Example

(A) Tire Size: The tire size is acombination of letters andnumbers used to define aparticular tire's width, height,aspect ratio, construction type,

and service description. See the“Tire Size” illustration later in thissection for more detail.

(B) TPC Spec(Tire Performance CriteriaSpecification): Originalequipment tires designed toGM's specific tire performancecriteria have a TPC specificationcode molded onto the sidewall.GM's TPC specifications meet orexceed all federal safetyguidelines.

(C) DOT (Department ofTransportation): TheDepartment of Transportation(DOT) code indicates that thetire is in compliance with theU.S. Department ofTransportation Motor VehicleSafety Standards.

(D) Tire Identification Number(TIN): The letters and numbersfollowing the DOT (Departmentof Transportation) code are the

Tire Identification Number (TIN).The TIN shows themanufacturer and plant code,tire size, and date the tire wasmanufactured. The TIN ismolded onto both sides of thetire, although only one side mayhave the date of manufacture.

(E) Tire Ply Material: The typeof cord and number of plies inthe sidewall and under the tread.

(F) Uniform Tire QualityGrading (UTQG): Tiremanufacturers are required tograde tires based on threeperformance factors: treadwear,traction, and temperatureresistance. For more informationsee Uniform Tire QualityGrading on page 10‑59.

(G) Maximum Cold InflationLoad Limit: Maximum load thatcan be carried and themaximum pressure needed tosupport that load.


Vehicle Care 10-45

Compact Spare Tire Example

(A) Tire Ply Material: The typeof cord and number of plies inthe sidewall and under the tread.

(B) Temporary Use Only:The compact spare tire ortemporary use tire has a treadlife of approximately 5 000 km(3,000 mi) and should not bedriven at speeds over 105 km/h(65 mph). The compact sparetire is for emergency use when aregular road tire has lost air andgone flat. If the vehicle has a

compact spare tire, seeCompact Spare Tire onpage 10‑80 and If a Tire GoesFlat on page 10‑63.

(C) Tire Identification Number(TIN): The letters and numbersfollowing the DOT (Departmentof Transportation) code are theTire Identification Number (TIN).The TIN shows themanufacturer and plant code,tire size, and date the tire wasmanufactured. The TIN ismolded onto both sides of thetire, although only one side mayhave the date of manufacture.

(D) Maximum Cold InflationLoad Limit: Maximum loadthat can be carried and themaximum pressure needed tosupport that load.

(E) Tire Inflation:The temporary use tire orcompact spare tire should beinflated to 420 kPa (60 psi).

For more information on tirepressure and inflation see TirePressure on page 10‑49.

(F) Tire Size: A combination ofletters and numbers define atire's width, height, aspect ratio,construction type, and servicedescription. The letter T as thefirst character in the tire sizemeans the tire is for temporaryuse only.

(G) TPC Spec (TirePerformance CriteriaSpecification): Originalequipment tires designed toGM's specific tire performancecriteria have a TPC specificationcode molded onto the sidewall.GM's TPC specifications meet orexceed all federal safetyguidelines.


10-46 Vehicle Care

Tire Designations

Tire Size

The following is an example of atypical passenger vehicletire size.

(A) Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire:The United States version of ametric tire sizing system. Theletter P as the first character inthe tire size means a passengervehicle tire engineered tostandards set by the U.S. Tireand Rim Association.

(B) Tire Width: The three‐digitnumber indicates the tire sectionwidth in millimeters fromsidewall to sidewall.

(C) Aspect Ratio: A two‐digitnumber that indicates the tireheight‐to‐width measurements.For example, if the tire sizeaspect ratio is 60, as shown initem C of the illustration, it wouldmean that the tire's sidewall is60 percent as high as it is wide.

(D) Construction Code: Aletter code is used to indicatethe type of ply construction inthe tire. The letter R meansradial ply construction; theletter D means diagonal or biasply construction; and the letter Bmeans belted‐bias plyconstruction.

(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter ofthe wheel in inches.

(F) Service Description: Thesecharacters represent the loadindex and speed rating of thetire. The load index representsthe load carrying capacity a tire

is certified to carry. The speedrating is the maximum speed atire is certified to carry a load.

Tire Terminology andDefinitionsAir Pressure: The amount ofair inside the tire pressingoutward on each square inch ofthe tire. Air pressure isexpressed in kPa (kilopascal)or psi (pounds per square inch).

Accessory Weight: Thecombined weight of optionalaccessories. Some examples ofoptional accessories areautomatic transmission, powersteering, power brakes, powerwindows, power seats, and airconditioning.

Aspect Ratio: The relationshipof a tire's height to its width.


Vehicle Care 10-47

Belt: A rubber coated layer ofcords that is located betweenthe plies and the tread. Cordsmay be made from steel or otherreinforcing materials.

Bead: The tire bead containssteel wires wrapped by steelcords that hold the tire ontothe rim.

Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tirein which the plies are laid atalternate angles less than90 degrees to the centerline ofthe tread.

Cold Tire Pressure: Theamount of air pressure in a tire,measured in kPa (kilopascal)or psi (pounds per square inch)before a tire has built up heatfrom driving. See Tire Pressureon page 10‑49.

Curb Weight: The weight of amotor vehicle with standard andoptional equipment including the

maximum capacity of fuel, oil,and coolant, but withoutpassengers and cargo.

DOT Markings: A code moldedinto the sidewall of a tiresignifying that the tire is incompliance with the U.S.Department of Transportation(DOT) Motor Vehicle SafetyStandards. The DOT codeincludes the Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN), an alphanumericdesignator which can alsoidentify the tire manufacturer,production plant, brand, anddate of production.

GVWR: Gross Vehicle WeightRating. See Vehicle Load Limitson page 9‑10.

GAWR FRT: Gross AxleWeight Rating for the front axle.See Vehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑10.

GAWR RR: Gross Axle WeightRating for the rear axle. SeeVehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑10.

Intended Outboard Sidewall:The side of an asymmetrical tire,that must always face outwardwhen mounted on a vehicle.

Kilopascal (kPa): The metricunit for air pressure.

Light Truck (LT‐Metric) Tire:A tire used on light duty trucksand some multipurposepassenger vehicles.

Load Index: An assignednumber ranging from 1 to 279that corresponds to the loadcarrying capacity of a tire.

Maximum Inflation Pressure:The maximum air pressure towhich a cold tire can be inflated.The maximum air pressure ismolded onto the sidewall.


10-48 Vehicle Care

Maximum Load Rating:The load rating for a tire at themaximum permissible inflationpressure for that tire.

Maximum Loaded VehicleWeight: The sum of curbweight, accessory weight,vehicle capacity weight, andproduction options weight.

Normal Occupant Weight:The number of occupants avehicle is designed to seatmultiplied by 68 kg (150 lbs).See Vehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑10.

Occupant Distribution:Designated seating positions.

Outward Facing Sidewall:The side of an asymmetrical tirethat has a particular side thatfaces outward when mounted ona vehicle. The side of the tirethat contains a whitewall, bearswhite lettering, or bears

manufacturer, brand, and/ormodel name molding that ishigher or deeper than the samemoldings on the other sidewallof the tire.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire:A tire used on passenger carsand some light duty trucks andmultipurpose vehicles.

Recommended InflationPressure: Vehiclemanufacturer's recommendedtire inflation pressure as shownon the tire placard. See TirePressure on page 10‑49andVehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑10.

Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatictire in which the ply cords thatextend to the beads are laid at90 degrees to the centerline ofthe tread.

Rim: A metal support for a tireand upon which the tire beadsare seated.

Sidewall: The portion of a tirebetween the tread and the bead.

Speed Rating:An alphanumeric code assignedto a tire indicating the maximumspeed at which a tire canoperate.

Traction: The friction betweenthe tire and the road surface.The amount of grip provided.

Tread: The portion of a tire thatcomes into contact withthe road.

Treadwear Indicators:Narrow bands, sometimes calledwear bars, that show acrossthe tread of a tire when only1.6 mm (1/16 in) of treadremains. See When It Is Timefor New Tires on page 10‑57.


Vehicle Care 10-49

UTQGS (Uniform Tire QualityGrading Standards): A tireinformation system that providesconsumers with ratings for atire's traction, temperature,and treadwear. Ratings aredetermined by tiremanufacturers usinggovernment testing procedures.The ratings are molded into thesidewall of the tire. See UniformTire Quality Grading onpage 10‑59.

Vehicle Capacity Weight:The number of designatedseating positions multiplied by68 kg (150 lbs) plus the ratedcargo load. See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9‑10.

Vehicle Maximum Load on theTire: Load on an individual tiredue to curb weight, accessoryweight, occupant weight, andcargo weight.

Vehicle Placard: A labelpermanently attached to avehicle showing the vehiclecapacity weight and the originalequipment tire size andrecommended inflation pressure.See “Tire and LoadingInformation Label” under VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑10.

Tire PressureTires need the correct amount ofair pressure to operateeffectively.

Notice: Neither tireunderinflation noroverinflation is good.Underinflated tires, or tiresthat do not have enough air,can result in:. Tire overloading andoverheating which couldlead to a blowout.

. Premature orirregular wear.

. Poor handling.

. Reduced fuel economy.

Overinflated tires, or tires thathave too much air, canresult in:. Unusual wear.. Poor handling.. Rough ride.. Needless damage fromroad hazards.

The Tire and LoadingInformation label on the vehicleindicates the original equipmenttires and the correct cold tireinflation pressures. Therecommended pressure is theminimum air pressure needed tosupport the vehicle's maximumload carrying capacity.


10-50 Vehicle Care

For additional informationregarding how much weight thevehicle can carry, and anexample of the Tire and LoadingInformation label, see VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑10. Howthe vehicle is loaded affectsvehicle handling and ridecomfort. Never load the vehiclewith more weight than it wasdesigned to carry.

When to Check

Check the tires once a month ormore. Do not forget the compactspare tire, if the vehicle has one.The compact spare should be at420 kPa (60 psi). For additionalinformation regarding thecompact spare tire, seeCompact Spare Tire onpage 10‑80.

How to Check

Use a good quality pocket-typegauge to check tire pressure.Proper tire inflation cannot bedetermined by looking at the tire.Check the tire inflation pressurewhen the tires are cold, meaningthe vehicle has not been drivenfor at least three hours or nomore than 1.6 km (1 mi).

Remove the valve cap from thetire valve stem. Press the tiregauge firmly onto the valve toget a pressure measurement.If the cold tire inflation pressurematches the recommendedpressure on the Tire andLoading Information label, nofurther adjustment is necessary.If the inflation pressure is low,add air until the recommendedpressure is reached. If theinflation pressure is high, presson the metal stem in the centerof the tire valve to release air.

Re‐check the tire pressure withthe tire gauge.

Return the valve caps on thevalve stems to prevent leaksand keep out dirt and moisture.

Tire Pressure MonitorSystemThe Tire Pressure Monitor System(TPMS) uses radio and sensortechnology to check tire pressurelevels. The TPMS sensors monitorthe air pressure in your tires andtransmit tire pressure readings to areceiver located in the vehicle.

Each tire, including the spare(if provided), should be checkedmonthly when cold and inflated tothe inflation pressure recommendedby the vehicle manufacturer on thevehicle placard or tire inflationpressure label. (If your vehicle hastires of a different size than the sizeindicated on the vehicle placard or


Vehicle Care 10-51

tire inflation pressure label, youshould determine the proper tireinflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, yourvehicle has been equipped with atire pressure monitoring system(TPMS) that illuminates a low tirepressure telltale when one ormore of your tires is significantlyunder‐inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tirepressure telltale illuminates, youshould stop and check your tires assoon as possible, and inflate themto the proper pressure. Driving on asignificantly under‐inflated tirecauses the tire to overheat and canlead to tire failure. Under‐inflationalso reduces fuel efficiency andtire tread life, and may affectthe vehicle's handling andstopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS isnot a substitute for proper tiremaintenance, and it is the driver'sresponsibility to maintain correct tirepressure, even if under‐inflation hasnot reached the level to triggerillumination of the TPMS low tirepressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also beenequipped with a TPMS malfunctionindicator to indicate when thesystem is not operating properly.The TPMS malfunction indicator iscombined with the low tire pressuretelltale. When the system detects amalfunction, the telltale will flash forapproximately one minute and thenremain continuously illuminated.This sequence will continue uponsubsequent vehicle start‐ups aslong as the malfunction exists.

When the malfunction indicator isilluminated, the system may not beable to detect or signal low tirepressure as intended. TPMSmalfunctions may occur for a varietyof reasons, including the installationof replacement or alternate tires orwheels on the vehicle that preventthe TPMS from functioning properly.Always check the TPMS malfunctiontelltale after replacing one or moretires or wheels on your vehicle toensure that the replacement oralternate tires and wheels allow theTPMS to continue to functionproperly.

See Tire Pressure MonitorOperation on page 10‑52 foradditional information.


10-52 Vehicle Care

Federal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) Rules andwith Industry CanadaStandards

See Radio Frequency Statement onpage 13‑16 for informationregarding Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)Rules and with Industry CanadaStandards RSS-GEN/210/220/310.

Tire Pressure MonitorOperationThis vehicle may have a TirePressure Monitor System (TPMS).The TPMS is designed to warn thedriver when a low tire pressurecondition exists. TPMS sensors aremounted onto each tire and wheelassembly, excluding the spare tireand wheel assembly. The TPMSsensors monitor the air pressure inthe tires and transmit the tirepressure readings to a receiverlocated in the vehicle.

When a low tire pressure conditionis detected, the TPMS illuminatesthe low tire pressure warning lightlocated on the instrument cluster.If the warning light comes on, stopas soon as possible and inflate thetires to the recommended pressureshown on the Tire and LoadingInformation label. See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9‑10.

A message to check the pressure ina specific tire displays in the DriverInformation Center (DIC) display.The low tire pressure warning lightand the DIC warning message comeon at each ignition cycle until thetires are inflated to the correctinflation pressure. Using the DIC,tire pressure levels can be viewed.For additional information and

details about the DIC operation anddisplays see Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 5‑23.

The low tire pressure warning lightmay come on in cool weather whenthe vehicle is first started, and thenturn off as the vehicle is driven. Thiscould be an early indicator that theair pressure is getting low and mustbe inflated to the proper pressure.

A Tire and Loading Information labelshows the size of the originalequipment tires and the correctinflation pressure for the tires whenthey are cold. See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9‑10, for an exampleof the Tire and Loading Informationlabel and its location. Also see TirePressure on page 10‑49.

The TPMS can warn about a lowtire pressure condition but it doesnot replace normal tiremaintenance. See Tire Inspectionon page 10‑55, Tire Rotation onpage 10‑55 and Tires onpage 10‑42.


Vehicle Care 10-53

Notice: Tire sealant materials arenot all the same. A non-approvedtire sealant could damage theTPMS sensors. TPMS sensordamage caused by using anincorrect tire sealant is notcovered by the vehicle warranty.Always use only theGM-approved tire sealantavailable through your dealer orincluded in the vehicle.

Factory-installed Tire Inflator Kitsuse a GM-approved liquid tiresealant. Using non-approved tiresealants could damage the TPMSsensors. See Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit on page 10‑65 forinformation regarding the inflator kitmaterials and instructions.

TPMS Malfunction Light andMessage

The TPMS will not function properlyif one or more of the TPMS sensorsare missing or inoperable. When thesystem detects a malfunction, thelow tire warning light flashes forabout one minute and then stays on

for the remainder of the ignitioncycle. A DIC warning message alsodisplays. The malfunction light andDIC warning message come on ateach ignition cycle until the problemis corrected. Some of the conditionsthat can cause these to comeon are:. One of the road tires has been

replaced with the spare tire.The spare tire does not have aTPMS sensor. The malfunctionlight and DIC message shouldgo off after the road tire isreplaced and the sensormatching process is performedsuccessfully. See "TPMS SensorMatching Process" later in thissection.

. The TPMS sensor matchingprocess was not done ornot completed successfullyafter rotating the tires. Themalfunction light and the DICmessage should go off aftersuccessfully completing the

sensor matching process.See "TPMS Sensor MatchingProcess" later in this section.

. One or more TPMS sensors aremissing or damaged. The DICmessage and the malfunctionlight should go off when theTPMS sensors are installed andthe sensor matching process isperformed successfully. Seeyour dealer for service.

. Replacement tires or wheels donot match the original equipmenttires or wheels. Tires and wheelsother than those recommendedcould prevent the TPMS fromfunctioning properly. See BuyingNew Tires on page 10‑57.

. Operating electronic devices orbeing near facilities using radiowave frequencies similar to theTPMS could cause the TPMSsensors to malfunction.

If the TPMS is not functioningproperly, it cannot detect or signal alow tire condition.


10-54 Vehicle Care

See your dealer for service if theTPMS malfunction light and DICmessage come on and stay on.

TPMS Sensor MatchingProcess

Each TPMS sensor has a uniqueidentification code. The identificationcode needs to be matched to a newtire/wheel position after rotating thetires or replacing one or more of theTPMS sensors. The TPMS sensormatching process should also beperformed after replacing a sparetire with a road tire containing theTPMS sensor. The malfunction lightand the DIC message should go offat the next ignition cycle. Thesensors are matched to the tire/wheel positions, using a TPMSrelearn tool, in the following order:driver side front tire, passenger sidefront tire, passenger side rear tire,and driver side rear. See yourdealer for service or to purchase arelearn tool.

There are two minutes to matchthe first tire/wheel position, andfive minutes overall to match allfour tire/wheel positions. If it takeslonger, the matching process stopsand must be restarted.

The TPMS sensor matchingprocess is:

1. Set the parking brake.

2. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN withthe engine off.

3. Use the MENU button to selectthe Vehicle Information menu inthe Driver InformationCenter (DIC).

4. Use the thumbwheel to scroll tothe Tire Pressure menu itemscreen.

5. Press the SET/CLR button tobegin the sensor matchingprocess.

A message requestingacceptance of the processshould display.

6. Press the SET/CLR button againto confirm the selection.

The horn sounds twice to signalthe receiver is in relearn modeand the TIRE LEARNINGACTIVE message displays onthe DIC screen.

7. Start with the driver sidefront tire.

8. Place the relearn tool againstthe tire sidewall, near the valvestem. Then press the button toactivate the TPMS sensor.A horn chirp confirms that thesensor identification code hasbeen matched to this tire andwheel position.

9. Proceed to the passenger sidefront tire, and repeat theprocedure in Step 8.

10. Proceed to the passenger siderear tire, and repeat theprocedure in Step 8.


Vehicle Care 10-55

11. Proceed to the driver side reartire, and repeat the procedurein Step 8. The horn soundstwo times to indicate thesensor identification code hasbeen matched to the driverside rear tire, and the TPMSsensor matching process is nolonger active. The TIRELEARNING ACTIVE messageon the DIC display screengoes off.

12. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.

13. Set all four tires to therecommended air pressurelevel as indicated on the Tireand Loading Information label.

Tire InspectionWe recommend that the tires,including the spare tire, if thevehicle has one, be inspectedfor signs of wear or damage atleast once a month.

Replace the tire if:. The indicators at three or

more places around the tirecan be seen.

. There is cord or fabricshowing through the tire'srubber.

. The tread or sidewall iscracked, cut, or snaggeddeep enough to show cord orfabric.

. The tire has a bump, bulge,or split.

. The tire has a puncture, cut,or other damage that cannotbe repaired well because ofthe size or location of thedamage.

Tire RotationTires should be rotated every12 000 km (7,500 mi). SeeMaintenance Schedule onpage 11‑3.

Tires are rotated to achievea uniform wear for all tires.The first rotation is the mostimportant.

Any time unusual wear isnoticed, rotate the tires as soonas possible and check the wheelalignment. Also check fordamaged tires or wheels.


10-56 Vehicle Care

See When It Is Time for NewTires on page 10‑57 and WheelReplacement on page 10‑61.

Use this rotation pattern whenrotating the tires.

Do not include the compactspare tire in the tire rotation.

Adjust the front and rear tires tothe recommended inflationpressure on the Tire andLoading Information label afterthe tires have been rotated.See Tire Pressure onpage 10‑49 and Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9‑10.

Reset the Tire Pressure MonitorSystem. See Tire PressureMonitor Operation onpage 10‑52.

Check that all wheel nuts areproperly tightened. See “WheelNut Torque” under Capacitiesand Specifications onpage 12‑2.

{ WARNING

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on theparts to which it is fastened, canmake wheel nuts become looseafter time.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

The wheel could come off andcause an accident. Whenchanging a wheel, remove anyrust or dirt from places where thewheel attaches to the vehicle. Inan emergency, a cloth or a papertowel can be used; however, usea scraper or wire brush later toremove all rust or dirt.

Lightly coat the center of thewheel hub with wheel bearinggrease after a wheel change ortire rotation to prevent corrosionor rust build-up. Do not getgrease on the flat wheelmounting surface or on thewheel nuts or bolts.


Vehicle Care 10-57

When It Is Time for NewTiresFactors such as maintenance,temperatures, driving speeds,vehicle loading, and road conditionsaffect the wear rate of the tires.

Treadwear indicators are one way totell when it is time for new tires.Treadwear indicators appear whenthe tires have only 1.6 mm (1/16 in)or less of tread remaining. See TireInspection on page 10‑55 and TireRotation on page 10‑55 for moreinformation.

The rubber in tires ages over time.This also applies for the spare tire,if the vehicle has one, even if it isnever used. Multiple conditionsincluding temperatures, loadingconditions, and inflation pressuremaintenance affect how fast agingtakes place. Tires will typically needto be replaced due to wear beforethey may need to be replaceddue to age. Consult the tiremanufacturer for more informationon when tires should be replaced.

Vehicle Storage

Tires age when stored normallymounted on a parked vehicle. Parka vehicle that will be stored for atleast a month in a cool, dry, cleanarea away from direct sunlight toslow aging. This area should befree of grease, gasoline, or othersubstances that can deterioraterubber.

Parking for an extended period cancause flat spots on the tires thatmay result in vibrations whiledriving. When storing a vehicle for

at least a month, remove the tires orraise the vehicle to reduce theweight from the tires.

Buying New TiresGM has developed and matchedspecific tires for the vehicle. Theoriginal equipment tires installedwere designed to meet GeneralMotors Tire Performance CriteriaSpecification (TPC Spec)system rating. Whenreplacement tires are needed,GM strongly recommendsbuying tires with the sameTPC Spec rating.

GM's exclusive TPC Specsystem considers over a dozencritical specifications that impactthe overall performance of thevehicle, including brake systemperformance, ride and handling,traction control, and tirepressure monitoringperformance.


10-58 Vehicle Care

GM's TPC Spec number ismolded onto the tire's sidewallnear the tire size. If the tireshave an all‐season tread design,the TPC Spec number will befollowed by MS for mud andsnow. See Tire SidewallLabeling on page 10‑44 foradditional information.

GM recommends replacing allthe tires at the same time.Uniform tread depth on all tireswill help to maintain theperformance of the vehicle.Braking and handlingperformance may be adverselyaffected if all the tires are notreplaced at the same time. SeeTire Inspection on page 10‑55and Tire Rotation on page 10‑55for information on proper tirerotation.

{ WARNING

Tires could explode duringimproper service. Attempting tomount or dismount a tire couldcause injury or death. Only yourdealer or authorized tire servicecenter should mount or dismountthe tires.

{ WARNING

Mixing tires of different sizes,brands, or types may causeloss of control of the vehicle,resulting in a crash or othervehicle damage. Use thecorrect size, brand, and typeof tires on all wheels.

{ WARNING

Using bias-ply tires on thevehicle may cause the wheelrim flanges to develop cracksafter many miles of driving.A tire and/or wheel could failsuddenly and cause a crash.Use only radial-ply tires withthe wheels on the vehicle.

If the vehicle tires must bereplaced with a tire that does nothave a TPC Spec number, makesure they are the same size,load range, speed rating, andconstruction (radial) as theoriginal tires.

Vehicles that have a tirepressure monitoring systemcould give an inaccurate low‐pressure warning if non‐TPCSpec rated tires are installed.See Tire Pressure MonitorSystem on page 10‑50.


Vehicle Care 10-59

The Tire and LoadingInformation label indicates theoriginal equipment tires on thevehicle. See Vehicle Load Limitson page 9‑10 for the labellocation and more informationabout the Tire and LoadingInformation label.

Different Size Tires andWheelsIf wheels or tires are installed thatare a different size than the originalequipment wheels and tires, vehicleperformance, including its braking,ride and handling characteristics,stability, and resistance to rollovermay be affected. If the vehicle haselectronic systems such as antilockbrakes, rollover airbags, tractioncontrol, and electronic stabilitycontrol, the performance of thesesystems can also be affected.

{ WARNING

If different sized wheels are used,there may not be an acceptablelevel of performance and safetyif tires not recommended forthose wheels are selected. Thisincreases the chance of a crashand serious injury. Only useGM specific wheel and tiresystems developed for thevehicle, and have them properlyinstalled by a GM certifiedtechnician.

See Buying New Tires onpage 10‑57 and Accessories andModifications on page 10‑3 foradditional information.

Uniform Tire QualityGradingQuality grades can be foundwhere applicable on the tiresidewall between tread shoulderand maximum section width.For example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AATemperature A

The following information relatesto the system developed by theUnited States National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration(NHTSA), which grades tiresby treadwear, traction, andtemperature performance. Thisapplies only to vehicles sold inthe United States. The gradesare molded on the sidewalls ofmost passenger car tires.


10-60 Vehicle Care

The Uniform Tire QualityGrading (UTQG) system doesnot apply to deep tread,winter-type snow tires,space-saver, or temporary usespare tires, tires with nominalrim diameters of 10 to 12 inches(25 to 30 cm), or to somelimited-production tires.

While the tires available onGeneral Motors passenger carsand light trucks may vary withrespect to these grades, theymust also conform to federalsafety requirements andadditional General Motors TirePerformance Criteria (TPC)standards.

All Passenger Car Tires MustConform to Federal SafetyRequirements In Addition ToThese Grades.

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is acomparative rating based on thewear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions on aspecified government testcourse. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one anda half (1½) times as well on thegovernment course as a tiregraded 100. The relativeperformance of tires dependsupon the actual conditions oftheir use, however, and maydepart significantly from thenorm due to variations in drivinghabits, service practices anddifferences in roadcharacteristics and climate.

Traction – AA, A, B, C

The traction grades, fromhighest to lowest, are AA, A, B,and C. Those grades representthe tire's ability to stop on wetpavement as measured under

controlled conditions onspecified government testsurfaces of asphalt andconcrete. A tire marked C mayhave poor traction performance.Warning: The traction gradeassigned to this tire is based onstraight-ahead braking tractiontests, and does not includeacceleration, cornering,hydroplaning, or peak tractioncharacteristics.

Temperature – A, B, C

The temperature grades areA (the highest), B, and C,representing the tire's resistanceto the generation of heat and itsability to dissipate heat whentested under controlledconditions on a specified indoorlaboratory test wheel. Sustainedhigh temperature can cause thematerial of the tire to degenerateand reduce tire life, andexcessive temperature can lead


Vehicle Care 10-61

to sudden tire failure. The gradeC corresponds to a level ofperformance which allpassenger car tires must meetunder the Federal Motor SafetyStandard No. 109. Grades B andA represent higher levels ofperformance on the laboratorytest wheel than the minimumrequired by law. Warning: Thetemperature grade for this tire isestablished for a tire that isproperly inflated and notoverloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessiveloading, either separately or incombination, can cause heatbuildup and possible tire failure.

Wheel Alignment and TireBalanceThe tires and wheels were alignedand balanced at the factory toprovide the longest tire life and bestoverall performance. Adjustments towheel alignment and tire balancingwill not be necessary on a regularbasis. However, check thealignment if there is unusual tirewear or if the vehicle is pulling toone side or the other. If the vehiclevibrates when driving on a smoothroad, the tires and wheels mightneed to be rebalanced. See yourdealer for proper diagnosis.

Wheel ReplacementReplace any wheel that is bent,cracked, or badly rusted orcorroded. If wheel nuts keep comingloose, the wheel, wheel bolts, andwheel nuts should be replaced.If the wheel leaks air, replace it.Some aluminum wheels can berepaired. See your dealer if any ofthese conditions exist.

Your dealer will know the kind ofwheel that is needed.

Each new wheel should have thesame load-carrying capacity,diameter, width, offset, and bemounted the same way as the one itreplaces.


10-62 Vehicle Care

Replace wheels, wheel bolts, wheelnuts, or Tire Pressure MonitorSystem (TPMS) sensors with newGM original equipment parts.

{ WARNING

Using the wrong replacementwheels, wheel bolts, or wheelnuts can be dangerous. It couldaffect the braking and handling ofthe vehicle. Tires can lose air,and cause loss of control, causinga crash. Always use the correctwheel, wheel bolts, and wheelnuts for replacement.

Notice: The wrong wheel canalso cause problems with bearinglife, brake cooling, speedometeror odometer calibration,

headlamp aim, bumper height,vehicle ground clearance, and tireor tire chain clearance to thebody and chassis.

See If a Tire Goes Flat onpage 10‑63 for more information.

Used Replacement Wheels

{ WARNING

Replacing a wheel with a usedone is dangerous. How it hasbeen used or how far it has beendriven may be unknown. It couldfail suddenly and cause a crash.When replacing wheels, use anew GM original equipmentwheel.

Tire Chains

{ WARNING

Do not use tire chains. There isnot enough clearance. Tire chainsused on a vehicle without theproper amount of clearance cancause damage to the brakes,suspension, or other vehicleparts. The area damaged by thetire chains could cause loss ofcontrol and a crash. Use anothertype of traction device only if itsmanufacturer recommends it forthe vehicle's tire size combinationand road conditions. Follow thatmanufacturer's instructions.To avoid vehicle damage, driveslowly and readjust or remove thetraction device if it contacts thevehicle. Do not spin the wheels.If traction devices are used, installthem on the rear tires.


Vehicle Care 10-63

If a Tire Goes FlatIt is unusual for a tire to blowoutwhile driving, especially if the tiresare maintained properly. If air goesout of a tire, it is much more likely toleak out slowly. But if there ever is ablowout, here are a few tips aboutwhat to expect and what to do:

If a front tire fails, the flat tirecreates a drag that pulls the vehicletoward that side. Take your foot offthe accelerator pedal and grip thesteering wheel firmly. Steer tomaintain lane position, and thengently brake to a stop, well off theroad, if possible.

A rear blowout, particularly on acurve, acts much like a skid andmay require the same correction asused in a skid. Stop pressing theaccelerator pedal and steer tostraighten the vehicle.

It may be very bumpy and noisy.Gently brake to a stop, well off theroad, if possible.

{ WARNING

Driving on a flat tire will causepermanent damage to the tire.Re-inflating a tire after it hasbeen driven on while severelyunderinflated or flat may cause ablowout and a serious crash.Never attempt to re-inflate a tirethat has been driven on whileseverely underinflated or flat.Have your dealer or an authorizedtire service center repair orreplace the flat tire as soonas possible.

{ WARNING

Lifting a vehicle and gettingunder it to do maintenance orrepairs is dangerous without theappropriate safety equipment andtraining. If a jack is provided withthe vehicle, it is designed only forchanging a flat tire. If it is used foranything else, you or others couldbe badly injured or killed if thevehicle slips off the jack. If a jackis provided with the vehicle, onlyuse it for changing a flat tire.

If a tire goes flat, avoid further tireand wheel damage by driving slowlyto a level place, well off the road,if possible. Turn on the hazardwarning flashers. See HazardWarning Flashers on page 6‑3.


10-64 Vehicle Care

{ WARNING

Changing a tire can bedangerous. The vehicle can slipoff the jack and roll over or fallcausing injury or death. Find alevel place to change the tire.To help prevent the vehiclefrom moving:

1. Set the parking brake firmly.

2. Put an automatictransmission in P (Park) ora manual transmission in1 (First) or R (Reverse).

3. Turn off the engine and donot restart while the vehicleis raised.

4. Do not allow passengers toremain in the vehicle.

5. Place wheel blocks on bothsides of the tire at theopposite corner of the tirebeing changed.

This vehicle may come with a jack,spare tire, and wheel block(s) or atire sealant and compressor kit.To use the jacking equipment tochange a spare tire safely, followthe instructions below. Then seeTire Changing on page 10‑72. Touse the tire sealant and compressorkit, see Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit on page 10‑65.

To use the wheel blocks, lift thewheel block and lock it into place.

When the vehicle has a flat tire (B),use the following example as aguide to assist in the placement ofthe wheel blocks (A).

A. Wheel Block

B. Flat Tire

The following information explainshow to repair or change a tire.


Vehicle Care 10-65

Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit

{ WARNING

Idling a vehicle in an enclosedarea with poor ventilation isdangerous. Engine exhaust mayenter the vehicle. Engine exhaustcontains carbon monoxide (CO)which cannot be seen or smelled.It can cause unconsciousnessand even death. Never run theengine in an enclosed area thathas no fresh air ventilation. Formore information, see EngineExhaust on page 9‑27.

{ WARNING

Overinflating a tire could causethe tire to rupture and you orothers could be injured. Be sureto read and follow the tire sealantand compressor kit instructionsand inflate the tire to itsrecommended pressure. Do notexceed the recommendedpressure.

{ WARNING

Storing the tire sealant andcompressor kit or otherequipment in the passengercompartment of the vehicle couldcause injury. In a sudden stop orcollision, loose equipment couldstrike someone. Store the tiresealant and compressor kit in itsoriginal location.

If this vehicle has a tire sealant andcompressor kit, there may not be aspare tire, tire changing equipment,and on some vehicles there may notbe a place to store a tire.

The tire sealant and compressorcan be used to temporarily sealpunctures up to 6 mm (¼ inch) inthe tread area of the tire. It can alsobe used to inflate an underinflated tire.

If the tire has been separated fromthe wheel, has damaged sidewalls,or has a large puncture, the tire istoo severely damaged for the tiresealant and compressor kit to beeffective. See Roadside AssistanceProgram on page 13‑6.

Read and follow all of the tiresealant and compressor kitinstructions.


10-66 Vehicle Care

The kit includes:

A. Air Compressor

B. Tire Sealant Canister

C. Power Plug

D. On/Off Button

E. Pressure Gauge

F. Air Only Hose (Black)

G. Sealant/Air Hose (Clear)

Tire Sealant

Read and follow the safe handlinginstructions on the label adhered tothe sealant canister.

Check the tire sealant expirationdate on the sealant canister.The sealant canister should bereplaced before its expiration date.Replacement sealant canisters areavailable at your local dealer. See“Removal and Installation of theSealant Canister” following.

There is only enough sealant to sealone tire. After usage, the sealantcanister and sealant/air hoseassembly must be replaced. See“Removal and Installation of theSealant Canister” following.

Using the Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit to TemporarilySeal and Inflate aPunctured Tire

When using the tire sealantand compressor kit during coldtemperatures, warm the kit in aheated environment for five minutes.This will help to inflate the tirefaster.


Vehicle Care 10-67

If a tire goes flat, avoid further tireand wheel damage by driving slowlyto a level place. Turn on the hazardwarning flashers. See HazardWarning Flashers on page 6‑3.

See If a Tire Goes Flat onpage 10‑63 for other importantsafety warnings.

Do not remove any objects thathave penetrated the tire.

1. Remove the tire sealant andcompressor kit from its storagelocation. See Storing the TireSealant and Compressor Kit onpage 10‑72.

Make sure the on/off button (D)is in the off O position.

2. Unwrap the sealant/air hose (G)and the power plug (C).

3. Place the kit on the ground.

Make sure the tire valve stem ispositioned close to the groundso the hose will reach it.

4. Remove the valve stem cap fromthe flat tire by turning itcounterclockwise.

5. Attach the sealant/air hose (G)onto the tire valve stem. Turn itclockwise until it is tight.

6. Plug the power plug (C) into theaccessory power outlet in thevehicle. Unplug all items fromother accessory power outlets.See Power Outlets on page 5‑5.

If the vehicle has an accessorypower outlet, do not use thecigarette lighter.

If the vehicle only has a cigarettelighter, use the cigarette lighter.

Do not pinch the power plugcord in the door or window.

7. Start the vehicle. The vehiclemust be running while using theair compressor.

8. Press the on/off button (D) toturn the tire sealant andcompressor kit on.

The compressor will injectsealant and air into the tire.

The pressure gauge (E) willinitially show a high pressurewhile the compressor pushes thesealant into the tire. Once thesealant is completely dispersedinto the tire, the pressure willquickly drop and start to riseagain as the tire inflates withair only.

9. Inflate the tire to therecommended inflation pressureusing the pressure gauge (E).The recommended inflationpressure can be found on theTire and Loading Informationlabel. See Tire Pressure onpage 10‑49.

The pressure gauge (E) mayread higher than the actual tirepressure while the compressor ison. Turn the compressor off toget an accurate pressurereading. The compressor maybe turned on/off until the correctpressure is reached.


10-68 Vehicle Care

Notice: If the recommendedpressure cannot be reached afterapproximately 25 minutes, thevehicle should not be drivenfarther. The tire is too severelydamaged and the tire sealant andcompressor kit cannot inflate thetire. Remove the power plug fromthe accessory power outlet andunscrew the inflating hose fromthe tire valve. See RoadsideAssistance Program onpage 13‑6.

10. Press the on/off button (D) toturn the tire sealant andcompressor kit off.

The tire is not sealed and willcontinue to leak air until thevehicle is driven and thesealant is distributed in the tire.Therefore, Steps 11 through17 must be done immediatelyafter Step 10.

Be careful while handling thetire sealant and compressor kitas it could be warm afterusage.

11. Unplug the power plug (C) fromthe accessory power outlet inthe vehicle.

12. Turn the sealant/air hose (G)counterclockwise to remove itfrom the tire valve stem.

13. Replace the tire valvestem cap.

14. Replace the sealant/airhose (G), and the powerplug (C) back in theiroriginal location.

15. If the flat tire was able to inflateto the recommended inflationpressure, remove themaximum speed label from thesealant canister (B) and placeit in a highly visible location.

Do not exceed the speed onthis label until the damaged tireis repaired or replaced.

16. Return the equipment to itsoriginal storage location in thevehicle.

17. Immediately drive the vehicle8 km (5 mi) to distribute thesealant in the tire.

18. Stop at a safe location andcheck the tire pressure. Referto Steps 1 through 11 under“Using the Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit without Sealantto Inflate a Tire (NotPunctured).”

If the tire pressure has fallenmore than 68 kPa (10 psi)below the recommendedinflation pressure, stop drivingthe vehicle. The tire is tooseverely damaged and the tiresealant cannot seal the tire.See Roadside AssistanceProgram on page 13‑6.


Vehicle Care 10-69

If the tire pressure has notdropped more than 68 kPa(10 psi) from the recommendedinflation pressure, inflate thetire to the recommendedinflation pressure.

19. Wipe off any sealant from thewheel, tire or vehicle.

20. Dispose of the used sealantcanister (B) and sealant/airhose (G) assembly at a localdealer or in accordance withlocal state codes and practices.

21. Replace it with a new canisteravailable from your dealer.

22. After temporarily sealing a tireusing the tire sealant andcompressor kit, take thevehicle to an authorized dealerwithin 161 km (100 mi) ofdriving to have the tire repairedor replaced.

Using the Tire Sealant andCompressor Kit withoutSealant to Inflate a Tire(Not Punctured)

To use the air compressor to inflatea tire with air only and not sealant:

If a tire goes flat, avoid further tireand wheel damage by driving slowlyto a level place. Turn on the hazardwarning flashers. See HazardWarning Flashers on page 6‑3.

See If a Tire Goes Flat onpage 10‑63 for other importantsafety warnings.

1. Remove the tire sealant andcompressor kit from its storagelocation. See Storing the TireSealant and Compressor Kit onpage 10‑72.

2. Unlock the air only hose (F) fromthe sealant canister (B) bypulling up on the lever.

3. Pull the air only hose (F) fromthe sealant canister (B).

4. Remove the power plug (C) fromthe air compressor (A).

5. Place the kit on the ground.

Make sure the tire valve stem ispositioned close to the groundso the hose will reach it.

6. Remove the tire valve stem capby turning it counterclockwise.

7. Attach the air only hose (F) ontothe tire valve stem and press thelever down to secure it.


10-70 Vehicle Care

8. Plug the power plug (C) into theaccessory power outlet in thevehicle. Unplug all items fromother accessory power outlets.See Power Outlets on page 5‑5.

If the vehicle has an accessorypower outlet, do not use thecigarette lighter.

If the vehicle only has a cigarettelighter, use the cigarette lighter.

Do not pinch the power plugcord in the door or window.

9. Start the vehicle. The vehiclemust be running while using theair compressor.

10. Press the on/off button (D) toturn the compressor on.

The compressor will inflate thetire with air only.

11. Inflate the tire to therecommended inflationpressure using the pressuregauge (E). The recommendedinflation pressure can be foundon the Tire and LoadingInformation label. See TirePressure on page 10‑49.

The pressure gauge (E) mayread higher than the actual tirepressure while the compressoris on. Turn the compressor offto get an accurate reading.The compressor may be turnedon/off until the correct pressureis reached.

12. Press the on/off button (D) toturn the tire sealant andcompressor kit off.

Be careful while handling thetire sealant and compressorkit as it could be warm afterusage.

13. Unplug the power plug (C) fromthe accessory power outlet inthe vehicle.

14. Disconnect the air onlyhose (F) from the tire valvestem by lifting the lever.Replace the tire valvestem cap.

15. Replace the air only hose (F)and the power plug (C) back inits original location.

16. Place the equipment in theoriginal storage location in thevehicle.

The tire sealant and compressor kithas an accessory adapter located ina compartment on the bottom of itshousing that may be used to inflateair mattresses, balls, etc.


Vehicle Care 10-71

Removal and Installation of theSealant Canister

To remove the sealant canister:

1. Unlock the air only hose (F) fromthe sealant canister (B) bypulling up on the lever.

2. Pull the air only hose (F) fromthe sealant canister (B).

3. Unwrap the sealant/air hose (G)from the compressor (A).

4. Turn the sealant canister (B) sothe inflator filling hose is alignedwith the slot in the compressor.

5. Lift the sealant canister (B) fromthe compressor and replace witha new sealant canister. See yourdealer for more information.

To install a new sealant canister:

1. Align the sealant/air hose (G)with the slot in the aircompressor.

2. Push the sealant canister (B)down and turn it clockwise.

3. Wrap the sealant/air hose (G)around the air compressorchannel to stow it in its originallocation.

4. Push the air only hose (F) ontothe sealant canister inlet andpush the lever down.


10-72 Vehicle Care

Storing the Tire Sealantand Compressor KitThe tire sealant and compressor kitis located in the trunk, under theload floor, behind an access panel.

To remove the kit:

1. Open the trunk. See Trunk onpage 2‑12.

2. Turn the left knobcounterclockwise and the rightknob clockwise, 90 degrees, at

the same time. Then pull theaccess panel rearward and up toremove it.

3. Pull the inflator kit rearward.

Squeeze the two tabs of thequick release buckle to removethe tire sealant andcompressor kit.

To store the inflator kit, reversethe steps.

Tire Changing

Removing the Spare Tire andTools

To access the spare tire and tools:

1. Open the trunk. See Trunk onpage 2‑12.

2. Lift the load floor.

A. Retainer Nut

B. Tool Bag Tether

C. Tool Bag

D. Spare Tire


Vehicle Care 10-73

3. Turn the retainer nut (A)counterclockwise to remove it.Then remove the tool bagtether (B) from the stow rod, thetool bag (C) containing thewheel wrench and wheel blocks,and the spare tire (D).

4. Remove the jack, jack handleextension, and two-piecewrench, if equipped.

A. Three-Piece Wrench

B. Hex Head Jack

C. Jack Handle Extension

D. Coin/Pierce Jack

E. Two-Piece Wrench

This vehicle may have one ofthe following: A coin/piercejack (D), a jack handleextension (C), and atwo-piece wrench (E), or ahex head jack (B) andthree-piece wrench (A).

Removing the Flat Tire andInstalling the Spare Tire

This vehicle may have aluminumwheels with exposed wheel nuts.Use the wheel wrench to loosen allthe wheel nuts. Do not removethem yet.

Or, this vehicle may have steelwheels with plastic covers.

To remove the plastic covers andwheel nut caps, loosen the plasticnut caps with the wheel wrench in acounterclockwise direction.


10-74 Vehicle Care

If needed, finish loosening themwith your fingers. The plastic nutcaps will not come off.

If needed, use the flat end of thewheel wrench and pry along theedge of the cover until it comes off.The edge of the wheel cover couldbe sharp, so do not try to remove itwith your bare hands. Do not dropthe cover or lay it face down, as itcould become scratched ordamaged. Store the wheel cover inthe trunk until the flat tire is repairedor replaced.

Once you have removed the wheelcover, use the following procedureto remove the flat tire and install thespare tire.

1. Do a safety check beforeproceeding. See If a Tire GoesFlat on page 10‑63 for moreinformation.

2. Turn the wheel wrenchcounterclockwise once on eachwheel nut to loosen it. Do notremove them yet.

3. Place the jack near the flat tire.

4. Place the wheel blocks on bothsides of the tire at the oppositecorner of the tire being changed.See If a Tire Goes Flat onpage 10‑63 for proper wheelblock placement.

5. If this vehicle is the RS model,locate the front or rear jackcover on the rocker moldingnear the tire being changed.

Place your hand behind theedge of the cover on the rockermolding. Pull down and out toremove the cover.

The cover will remain attachedto the molding by a tether.


Vehicle Care 10-75

6. Place the jack under the vehicle.

7. If you have a coin/pierce jack,attach the jack handle extensionto the jack by sliding the hookthrough the end of the jack.

If you have a hex head jack,place the hex tube end of thewrench over the hex head ofthe jack.

Notice: Make sure that the jacklift head is in the correct positionor you may damage your vehicle.The repairs would not be coveredby your warranty.

8. Position the jack lift head at thejack location nearest the flat tire.The location is indicated by anotch in the flange. The jackmust not be used in any otherposition.

{ WARNING

Getting under a vehicle when it isjacked up is dangerous. If thevehicle slips off the jack, youcould be badly injured or killed.Never get under a vehicle when itis supported only by a jack.

{ WARNING

Raising the vehicle with the jackimproperly positioned candamage the vehicle and evenmake the vehicle fall. To helpavoid personal injury and vehicledamage, be sure to fit the jack lifthead into the proper locationbefore raising the vehicle.

{ WARNING

Lifting a vehicle and getting underit to do maintenance or repairs isdangerous without theappropriate safety equipment andtraining. If a jack is provided withthe vehicle, it is designed only forchanging a flat tire. If it is used foranything else, you or others couldbe badly injured or killed if thevehicle slips off the jack. If a jackis provided with the vehicle, onlyuse it for changing a flat tire.


10-76 Vehicle Care

Hex Head Jack Shown, Coin/Pierce Jack Similar

9. Raise the jack by turning thehandle clockwise until it comesin contact with the notch inthe flange.

Make sure the jack lift headnotch is placed in the flangenotch.

Raise the vehicle far enough offthe ground so there is enoughroom for the road tire to clearthe ground.

10. Remove all of the wheel nuts.

11. Remove the flat tire.


Vehicle Care 10-77

{ WARNING

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on theparts to which it is fastened, canmake wheel nuts become looseafter time. The wheel could comeoff and cause an accident. Whenchanging a wheel, remove anyrust or dirt from places where thewheel attaches to the vehicle.In an emergency, a cloth or apaper towel can be used;however, use a scraper or wirebrush later to remove all rustor dirt.

12. Remove any rust or dirt fromthe wheel bolts, mountingsurfaces, and spare wheel.

13. Place the compact spare tireon the wheel-mounting surface.

{ WARNING

Never use oil or grease on boltsor nuts because the nuts mightcome loose. The vehicle's wheelcould fall off, causing a crash.

14. Reinstall the wheel nuts.Tighten each nut by hand untilthe wheel is held againstthe hub.

15. Lower the vehicle byturning the jack handlecounterclockwise.


10-78 Vehicle Care

{ WARNING

Wheel nuts that are improperly orincorrectly tightened can causethe wheels to become loose orcome off. The wheel nuts shouldbe tightened with a torque wrenchto the proper torque specificationafter replacing. Follow the torquespecification supplied by theaftermarket manufacturer whenusing accessory locking wheelnuts. See Capacities andSpecifications on page 12‑2 fororiginal equipment wheel nuttorque specifications.

Notice: Improperly tightenedwheel nuts can lead to brakepulsation and rotor damage. Toavoid expensive brake repairs,evenly tighten the wheel nuts inthe proper sequence and to theproper torque specification. SeeCapacities and Specifications onpage 12‑2 for the wheel nuttorque specification.

16. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly ina crisscross sequence, asshown.

17. Lower the jack all the way andremove the jack from under thevehicle.

18. Tighten the wheel nuts firmlywith the wheel wrench.

Front Jack Cover Shown, RearJack Cover Similar

19. If this vehicle is the RS model,snap the jack cover back intoplace.

20. Remove the wheel blocks andreturn them to their properstorage location.

When reinstalling the wheel cover orcenter cap on the full-size tire,tighten all five plastic caps handsnug with the aid of the wheelwrench and tighten them with thewheel wrench an additionalone‐quarter of a turn.


Vehicle Care 10-79

Notice: Wheel covers will not fiton the vehicle's compact spare.If you try to put a wheel cover onthe compact spare, the cover orthe spare could be damaged.

Storing a Flat or Spare Tireand Tools

{ WARNING

Storing a jack, a tire, or otherequipment in the passengercompartment of the vehicle couldcause injury. In a sudden stop orcollision, loose equipment couldstrike someone. Store all these inthe proper place.

Storing the Flat Tire and Tools

1. Replace the wheel wrench andwheel blocks in the tool bag.

2. Remove the foam container fromthe rear storage compartment.

Coin/Pierce Jack Shown, HexHead Jack Similar

3. Place the flat tire in the storagecompartment with the valvestem down.

4. Place the jack and jack handleextension, if the vehicle has one,in the foam container.

5. Place the foam container insidethe flat tire. Align the hole withthe stow rod.

6. Place the tool bag tether overthe stow rod and the tool bagrear of the flat tire.

7. Turn the retainer nut clockwiseuntil tight.

8. Replace the load floor.

The load floor may not lay flat.

The compact spare is for temporaryuse only. Replace the compactspare tire with a full-size tire assoon as you can.

Storing the Compact Spare Tireand Tools

Reverse the instructions forremoving the spare tire and tools tostore the compact spare tire.


10-80 Vehicle Care

Compact Spare Tire

{ WARNING

Driving with more than onecompact spare tire at a time couldresult in loss of braking andhandling. This could lead to acrash and you or others could beinjured. Use only one compactspare tire at a time.

If this vehicle has a compact sparetire, it was fully inflated when thevehicle was new; however, it canlose air after a time. Check theinflation pressure regularly.It should be 420 kPa (60 psi).

After installing the compact spareon the vehicle, stop as soon aspossible and make sure the sparetire is correctly inflated. Thecompact spare is made to performwell at speeds up to 105 km/h(65 mph) for distances up to5 000 km (3,000 mi), so you canfinish your trip and have the full-size

tire repaired or replaced at yourconvenience. Of course, it is best toreplace the spare with a full-size tireas soon as possible. The spare tirewill last longer and be in goodshape in case it is needed again.

Notice: When the compact spareis installed, do not take thevehicle through an automatic carwash with guide rails. Thecompact spare can get caught onthe rails which can damage thetire, wheel, and other parts of thevehicle.

Do not use the compact spare onother vehicles.

Do not mix the compact spare tire orwheel with other wheels or tires.They will not fit. Keep the spare tireand its wheel together.

Notice: Tire chains will not fit thecompact spare. Using them candamage the vehicle and candamage the chains too. Do notuse tire chains on the compactspare.

Jump StartingFor more information about thevehicle battery, see Battery onpage 10‑25.

If the battery has run down, try touse another vehicle and somejumper cables to start your vehicle.Be sure to use the following steps todo it safely.

{ WARNING

Batteries can hurt you. They canbe dangerous because:

. They contain acid that canburn you.

. They contain gas that canexplode or ignite.

. They contain enoughelectricity to burn you.

If you do not follow these stepsexactly, some or all of thesethings can hurt you.


Vehicle Care 10-81

Notice: Ignoring these stepscould result in costly damage tothe vehicle that would not becovered by the warranty.

Trying to start the vehicle bypushing or pulling it will notwork, and it could damage thevehicle.

The jump start positive post (B) islocated in the engine compartmenton the driver side of the vehicle.

The jump start negative groundingpoint (D) is the engine block or anengine mounting bolt. Connect to aspot as far away from thedischarged battery as possible.

These locations are used instead ofa direct connection to the battery.

The positive jump start connectionis under a trim cover. Open thecover door to expose the terminal.

1. Check the other vehicle. It musthave a 12-volt battery with anegative ground system.

Notice: Only use a vehicle thathas a 12-volt system with anegative ground for jumpstarting. If the other vehicle doesnot have a 12-volt system with anegative ground, both vehiclescan be damaged.

2. Position the two vehicles so thatthey are not touching.

3. Set the parking brake firmly andput the shift lever in P (Park)with an automatic transmission,or Neutral with a manual

transmission. See Shifting IntoPark (Automatic Transmission)on page 9‑24 with an automatictransmission, or Parking onpage 9‑27 with a manualtransmission.

Notice: If the radio or otheraccessories are left on during thejump starting procedure, theycould be damaged. The repairswould not be covered by thewarranty. Always turn off theradio and other accessories whenjump starting the vehicle.

4. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.Turn off all lights andaccessories in both vehicles,except the hazard warningflashers if needed.

{ WARNING

An electric fan can start up evenwhen the engine is not runningand can injure you. Keep hands,clothing and tools away from anyunderhood electric fan.


10-82 Vehicle Care

{ WARNING

Using a match near a battery cancause battery gas to explode.People have been hurt doing this,and some have been blinded.Use a flashlight if you needmore light.

Be sure the battery has enoughwater. You do not need to addwater to the battery installed inyour new vehicle. But if a batteryhas filler caps, be sure the rightamount of fluid is there. If it is low,add water to take care of thatfirst. If you don't, explosive gascould be present.

Battery fluid contains acid thatcan burn you. Do not get it onyou. If you accidentally get it inyour eyes or on your skin, flushthe place with water and getmedical help immediately.

{ WARNING

Fans or other moving engineparts can injure you badly. Keepyour hands away from movingparts once the engine is running.

5. Connect one end of the redpositive (+) cable to the jumpstart positive (+) post (B).

6. Connect the other end of thered positive (+) cable to thepositive (+) terminal of thegood battery (A).

7. Connect one end of theblack negative (–) cable to thenegative (–) terminal of thegood battery (C).

8. Connect the other end of theblack negative (–) cable to thenegative (–) grounding point (D).

9. Start the engine in the vehiclewith the good battery and runthe engine at idle speed for atleast four minutes.

10. Try to start the vehicle that hadthe dead battery. If it will notstart after a few tries, itprobably needs service.

Notice: If the jumper cables areconnected or removed in thewrong order, electrical shortingmay occur and damage thevehicle. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Always connect and remove thejumper cables in the correctorder, making sure that thecables do not touch each other orother metal.


Vehicle Care 10-83

Jumper Cable Removal

A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal EnginePart or Remote Negative (–)Terminal

B. Good Battery or RemotePositive (+) and RemoteNegative (–) Terminals

C. Dead Battery or RemotePositive (+) Terminal

To disconnect the jumper cablesfrom both vehicles:

1. Disconnect the blacknegative (−) cable from thevehicle that had the deadbattery.

2. Disconnect the blacknegative (−) cable from thevehicle with the good battery.

3. Disconnect the red positive (+)cable from the vehicle with thegood battery.

4. Disconnect the red positive (+)cable from the other vehicle.

5. Return the covers over thepositive (+) and negative (–)terminals to their originalpositions.

Towing

Towing the VehicleNotice: To avoid damage, thedisabled vehicle should be towedwith all four wheels off theground. Care must be taken withvehicles that have low groundclearance and/or specialequipment. Always flatbed on acar carrier.

Consult your dealer or aprofessional towing service if thedisabled vehicle must be towed.See Roadside Assistance Programon page 13‑6.

To tow the vehicle behind anothervehicle for recreational purposes,such as behind a motor home, see“Recreational Vehicle Towing” inthis section.

10-84 Vehicle Care

Recreational VehicleTowingRecreational vehicle towing refers totowing the vehicle behind anothervehicle – such as behind a motorhome. The two most common typesof recreational vehicle towing areknown as dinghy towing and dollytowing. Dinghy towing is towing thevehicle with all four wheels on theground. Dolly towing is towing thevehicle with two wheels on theground and two wheels up on adevice known as a dolly.

Here are some important things toconsider before recreationalvehicle towing:. The towing capacity of the

towing vehicle. Be sure to readthe tow vehicle manufacturer'srecommendations.

. How far the vehicle will betowed. Some vehicles haverestrictions on how far and howlong they can tow.

. The proper towing equipment.See your dealer or traileringprofessional for additionaladvice and equipmentrecommendations.

. If the vehicle is ready to betowed. Just as preparing thevehicle for a long trip, make surethe vehicle is prepared to betowed.

Dinghy Towing(With Automatic Transmission)

Notice: If the vehicle is towedwith all four wheels on theground, the drivetraincomponents could be damaged.The repairs would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty. Do nottow the vehicle with all fourwheels on the ground.

Vehicle Care 10-85

Vehicles with an automatictransmission should not betowed with all four wheels on theground. If the vehicle must betowed, a dolly should be used.See “Dolly Towing” that follows formore information.

Dinghy Towing(With Manual Transmission)

To dinghy tow the vehicle from thefront with all four wheels on theground:

1. Position the vehicle to tow andthen secure it to the towingvehicle.

2. Shift the transmission to Neutral.

3. Turn the ignition toACC/ACCESSORY.

4. To prevent the battery fromdraining while the vehicle isbeing towed, remove fuse 22,23, 24, and 25 from theinstrument panel fuse block.See Instrument Panel FuseBlock on page 10‑40 for moreinformation.

Remember to reinstall the fusesonce the destination has beenreached.

Notice: If 105 km/h (65mph) isexceeded while towing thevehicle, it could be damaged.Never exceed 105 km/h (65mph)while towing the vehicle.


10-86 Vehicle Care

Dolly Towing

Tow the vehicle with the two rearwheels on the ground and the frontwheels on a dolly:

To tow the vehicle with two wheelson the ground and a dolly:

1. Put the front wheels on a dolly.

2. Shift the automatic transmissioninto P (Park) or a manualtransmission into 1 (First) gear.

3. Set the parking brake.

4. Clamp the steering wheel in astraight-ahead position with aclamping device designed fortowing.

5. Remove the key from theignition.

6. Secure the vehicle to the dolly.

7. Release the parking brake.

Notice: Towing the vehicle fromthe rear could damage it. Also,repairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Never havethe vehicle towed from the rear.

Appearance Care

Exterior Care

Washing the Vehicle

To preserve the vehicle's finish,wash it often and out of directsunlight.

Notice: Do not use petroleumbased, acidic, or abrasivecleaning agents as they candamage the vehicle's paint, metal,or plastic parts. If damageoccurs, it would not be coveredby the vehicle's warranty.Approved cleaning products canbe obtained from your dealer.Follow all manufacturerdirections regarding correctproduct usage, necessary safetyprecautions, and appropriatedisposal of any vehicle careproduct.


Vehicle Care 10-87

Notice: Avoid using highpressure washes closer than30 cm (12 in) to the surface of thevehicle. Use of power washersexceeding 8,274 kPa (1,200 psi)can result in damage or removalof paint and decals.

Rinse the vehicle well, beforewashing and after, to remove allcleaning agents completely. If theyare allowed to dry on the surface,they could stain.

Dry the finish with a soft, cleanchamois or an all-cotton towel toavoid surface scratches and waterspotting.

Finish Care

Occasional waxing or mild polishingof the vehicle by hand may benecessary to remove residue fromthe paint finish. Approved cleaningproducts can be obtained fromyour dealer.

If the vehicle has a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish, the clearcoatgives more depth and gloss to thecolored basecoat. Always usewaxes and polishes that arenon-abrasive and made for abasecoat/clearcoat paint finish.

Notice: Machine compoundingor aggressive polishing on abasecoat/clearcoat paint finishmay damage it. Use onlynon-abrasive waxes and polishesthat are made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish on thevehicle.

Foreign materials such as calciumchloride and other salts, ice meltingagents, road oil and tar, tree sap,bird droppings, chemicals fromindustrial chimneys, etc., candamage the vehicle's finish if theyremain on painted surfaces. Washthe vehicle as soon as possible.

If necessary, use non-abrasivecleaners that are marked safe forpainted surfaces to removeforeign matter.

To keep the paint finish looking new,keep the vehicle garaged orcovered whenever possible.

Protecting Exterior Bright MetalParts

Regularly clean bright metal partswith water or chrome polish onchrome or stainless steel trim,if necessary.

For aluminum, never use auto orchrome polish, steam, or causticsoap to clean. A coating of wax,rubbed to high polish, isrecommended for all brightmetal parts.


10-88 Vehicle Care

Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses and Emblems

Use only lukewarm or cold water, asoft cloth, and a car washing soapto clean exterior lamps and lenses.Follow instructions under "Washingthe Vehicle" later in this section.

Shutter System

The vehicle may have a shuttersystem designed to help increasefuel economy. Keep the shuttersystem clean for proper operation.

Windshield and Wiper Blades

Clean the outside of the windshieldwith glass cleaner.

Clean rubber blades using lint-freecloth or paper towel soaked withwindshield washer fluid or a milddetergent. Wash the windshieldthoroughly when cleaning theblades. Bugs, road grime, sap, anda buildup of vehicle wash/waxtreatments may cause wiperstreaking.

Replace the wiper blades if they areworn or damaged. Damage can becaused by extreme dustyconditions, sand, salt, heat, sun,snow and ice.

Weatherstrips

Apply silicone grease onweatherstrips to make them lastlonger, seal better, and not stick orsqueak. See Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants on page 11‑13

Tires

Use a stiff brush with tire cleaner toclean the tires.

Notice: Using petroleum-basedtire dressing products on thevehicle may damage the paintfinish and/or tires. When applyinga tire dressing, always wipe offany overspray from all paintedsurfaces on the vehicle.

Wheels and Trim—Aluminumor Chrome

Use a soft, clean cloth with mildsoap and water to clean the wheels.After rinsing thoroughly with cleanwater, dry with a soft, clean towel.A wax may then be applied.

Keep the wheels clean using asoft, clean cloth with mild soap andwater. Rinse with clean water. Afterrinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft,clean towel. A wax may then beapplied.

Notice: Chrome wheels and otherchrome trim may be damaged ifthe vehicle is not washed after


Vehicle Care 10-89

driving on roads that have beensprayed with magnesium,calcium, or sodium chloride.These chlorides are used onroads for conditions such asice and dust. Always wash thechrome with soap and waterafter exposure.

Notice: To avoid surface damage,do not use strong soaps,chemicals, abrasive polishes,cleaners, brushes, or cleanersthat contain acid on aluminum orchrome-plated wheels. Use onlyapproved cleaners. Also, neverdrive a vehicle with aluminum orchrome-plated wheels through anautomatic car wash that usessilicone carbide tire cleaningbrushes. Damage could occurand the repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Steering, Suspension, andChassis Components

Visually inspect front and rearsuspension and steering system fordamaged, loose, or missing parts orsigns of wear. Inspect powersteering lines and hoses for properhook-up, binding, leaks, cracks,chafing, etc. Visually check constantvelocity joints, rubber boots, andaxle seals for leaks.

Body Component Lubrication

Lubricate all key lock cylinders,hood hinges, liftgate hinges, andsteel fuel door hinge unless thecomponents are plastic. Applyingsilicone grease on weatherstripswith a clean cloth will make themlast longer, seal better, and not stickor squeak.

Underbody Maintenance

Use plain water to flush dirt anddebris from the vehicle's underbody.Your dealer or an underbody carwashing system can do this. If notremoved, rust and corrosion candevelop.

Sheet Metal Damage

If the vehicle is damaged andrequires sheet metal repair orreplacement, make sure the bodyrepair shop applies anti-corrosionmaterial to parts repaired orreplaced to restore corrosionprotection.

Original manufacturer replacementparts will provide the corrosionprotection while maintaining thevehicle warranty.


10-90 Vehicle Care

Finish Damage

Quickly repair minor chips andscratches with touch-up materialsavailable from your dealer to avoidcorrosion. Larger areas of finishdamage can be corrected in yourdealer's body and paint shop.

Chemical Paint Spotting

Airborne pollutants can fall uponand attack painted vehicle surfacescausing blotchy, ring-shapeddiscolorations, and small, irregulardark spots etched into the paintsurface.

Interior CareTo prevent dirt particle abrasions,regularly clean the vehicle's interior.Immediately remove any soils. Notethat newspapers or dark garmentsthat can transfer color to homefurnishings can also permanentlytransfer color to the vehicle'sinterior.

Use a soft bristle brush to removedust from knobs and crevices on theinstrument cluster. Using a mildsoap solution, immediately removehand lotions, sunscreen, and insectrepellant from all interior surfaces orpermanent damage may result.

Your dealer may have products forcleaning the interior.

Use cleaners specifically designedfor the surfaces being cleaned toprevent permanent damage.To prevent overspray, apply allcleaners directly to the cleaningcloth. Cleaners should be removedquickly. Never allow cleaners toremain on the surface beingcleaned for extended periodsof time.

Cleaners may contain solvents thatcan become concentrated in theinterior. Before using cleaners, readand adhere to all safety instructionson the label. While cleaning theinterior, maintain adequateventilation by opening the doorsand windows.


Vehicle Care 10-91

To prevent damage, do not cleanthe interior using the followingcleaners or techniques:. Never use a razor or any other

sharp object to remove a soilfrom any interior surface.

. Never use a brush with stiffbristles.

. Never rub any surfaceaggressively or with excessivepressure.

. Do not use laundry detergents ordishwashing soaps withdegreasers. For liquid cleaners,use approximately 20 dropsper 3.78L (1 gal) of water.A concentrated soap solution willleave a residue that createsstreaks and attracts dirt. Do notuse solutions that contain strongor caustic soap.

. Do not heavily saturate theupholstery when cleaning.

. Do not use solvents or cleanerscontaining solvents.

Interior Glass

To clean, use a terry cloth fabricdampened with water. Wipe dropletsleft behind with a clean dry cloth.Commercial glass cleaners may beused, if necessary, after cleaningthe interior glass with plain water.

Notice: To prevent scratching,never use abrasive cleaners onautomotive glass. Abrasivecleaners or aggressive cleaningmay damage the rear windowdefogger.

Fabric/Carpet

Start by vacuuming the surfaceusing a soft brush attachment. If arotating brush attachment is beingused during vacuuming, only use iton the floor carpet. Before cleaning,gently remove as much of the soilas possible using one of thefollowing techniques:. Gently blot liquids with a paper

towel. Continue blotting until nomore soil can be removed.

. For solid soils, remove as muchas possible prior to vacuuming.


10-92 Vehicle Care

To clean:

1. Saturate a clean lint-freecolorfast cloth with water orclub soda. Microfiber cloth isrecommended to prevent linttransfer to the fabric or carpet.

2. Remove excess moisture bygently wringing until water doesnot drip from the cleaning cloth.

3. Start on the outside edge of thesoil and gently rub toward thecenter. Rotate the cleaning clothto a clean area frequently toprevent forcing the soil in tothe fabric.

4. Continue gently rubbing thesoiled area until there is nolonger any color transfer fromthe soil to the cleaning cloth.

5. If the soil is not completelyremoved, use a mild soapsolution followed only by clubsoda or plain water.

If the soil is not completelyremoved, it may be necessary touse a commercial upholstery

cleaner or spot lifter. Test a smallhidden area for colorfastness beforeusing a commercial upholsterycleaner or spot lifter. If ringformation occurs, clean theentire fabric or carpet.

Following the cleaning process, apaper towel can be used to blotexcess moisture.

Instrument Panel, Vinyl, andOther Plastic Surfaces

Use a soft microfiber clothdampened with water to removedust and loose dirt. For a morethorough cleaning, use a softmicrofiber cloth dampened with amild soap solution.

Notice: Soaking or saturatingleather, especially perforatedleather, as well as other interiorsurfaces, may cause permanentdamage. Wipe excess moisturefrom these surfaces aftercleaning and allow them to drynaturally. Never use heat, steam,spot lifters or spot removers.

Do not use cleaners that containsilicone or wax-based products.Cleaners containing thesesolvents can permanently changethe appearance and feel of leatheror soft trim and are notrecommended.

Do not use cleaners that increasegloss, especially on the instrumentpanel. Reflected glare can decreasevisibility through the windshieldunder certain conditions.

Notice: Use of air fresheners maycause permanent damage toplastics and painted surfaces.If an air freshener comes incontact with any plastic orpainted surface in the vehicle,blot immediately and clean with asoft cloth dampened with a mildsoap solution. Damage caused byair fresheners would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.


Vehicle Care 10-93

Care of Safety Belts

Keep belts clean and dry.

{ WARNING

Do not bleach or dye safety belts.It may severely weaken them. Ina crash, they might not be able toprovide adequate protection.Clean safety belts only with mildsoap and lukewarm water.

Floor Mats

{ WARNING

If a floor mat is the wrong size oris not properly installed, it caninterfere with the acceleratorpedal and/or brake pedal.Interference with the pedals cancause unintended accelerationand/or increased stoppingdistance which can cause acrash and injury. Make sure thefloor mat does not interfere withthe pedals.

Use the following guidelines forproper floor mat usage:. The original equipment floor

mats were designed for yourvehicle. If the floor mats needreplacing, it is recommendedthat GM certified floor mats bepurchased. Non-GM floor matsmay not fit properly and mayinterfere with the accelerator orbrake pedal. Always check thatthe floor mats do not interferewith the pedals.

. Use the floor mat with thecorrect side up. Do not turnit over.

. Do not place anything on top ofthe driver side floor mat.

. Use only a single floor mat onthe driver side.

. Do not place one floor mat ontop of another.


10-94 Vehicle Care

Removing and Replacing theFloor Mats

Pull up on the rear of the floor matto unlock each retainer and remove.

Reinstall by lining up the floor matretainer openings over the carpetretainers and snap into position.

Make sure the floor mat is properlysecured in place.

Verify the floor mat does notinterfere with the pedals.


Service and Maintenance 11-1

Service andMaintenance

General InformationGeneral Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

Maintenance ScheduleMaintenance Schedule . . . . . . . 11-3

Special Application ServicesSpecial ApplicationServices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9

Additional Maintenanceand CareAdditional Maintenanceand Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10

Recommended Fluids,Lubricants, and PartsRecommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13

Maintenance ReplacementParts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-15

Maintenance RecordsMaintenance Records . . . . . . 11-16

General InformationYour vehicle is an importantinvestment. This section describesthe required maintenance for thevehicle. Follow this schedule tohelp protect against major repairexpenses resulting from neglect orinadequate maintenance. It mayalso help to maintain the value ofthe vehicle if it is sold. It is theresponsibility of the owner to haveall required maintenance performed.

Your dealer has trained technicianswho can perform requiredmaintenance using genuinereplacement parts. They haveup‐to‐date tools and equipmentfor fast and accurate diagnostics.Many dealers have extendedevening and Saturday hours,courtesy transportation, andonline scheduling to assist withservice needs.

Your dealer recognizes theimportance of providingcompetitively priced maintenanceand repair services.


11-2 Service and Maintenance

With trained technicians, the dealeris the place for routine maintenancesuch as oil changes and tirerotations and additionalmaintenance items like tires,brakes, batteries, and wiper blades.

Notice: Damage caused byimproper maintenance can lead tocostly repairs and may not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Maintenance intervals, checks,inspections, recommended fluids,and lubricants are important tokeep the vehicle in good workingcondition.

The Tire Rotation and RequiredServices are the responsibility of thevehicle owner. It is recommended tohave your dealer perform theseservices every 12 000 km/7,500 mi.Proper vehicle maintenance helps tokeep the vehicle in good workingcondition, improves fuel economy,and reduces vehicle emissions.

Because of the way people usevehicles, maintenance needs vary.There may need to be morefrequent checks and services.The Additional Required Services ‐Normal are for vehicles that:. Carry passengers and cargo

within recommended limits onthe Tire and Loading Informationlabel. See Vehicle Load Limitson page 9‑10.

. Are driven on reasonable roadsurfaces within legal drivinglimits.

. Use the recommended fuel.See Recommended Fuel onpage 9‑44.

Refer to the information in theMaintenance Schedule AdditionalRequired Services ‐ Normal chart.

The Additional Required Services ‐Severe are for vehicles that are:. Mainly driven in hilly or

mountainous terrain.. Frequently towing a trailer.. Used for high speed or

competitive driving.. Used for taxi, police, or delivery

service.

Refer to the information in theMaintenance Schedule AdditionalRequired Services ‐ Severe chart.



{ WARNING

Performing maintenance work canbe dangerous and can causeserious injury. Performmaintenance work only if therequired information, proper tools,and equipment are available.If they are not, see your dealer tohave a trained technician do thework. See Doing Your OwnService Work on page 10‑4.

MaintenanceScheduleOwner Checks and Services

At Each Fuel Stop. Check the engine oil level. See

Engine Oil on page 10‑9.

Once a Month. Check the tire inflation

pressures. See Tire Pressure onpage 10‑49.

. Inspect the tires for wear. SeeTire Inspection on page 10‑55.

. Check the windshield washerfluid level. See Washer Fluid onpage 10‑22.

Engine Oil Change

When the CHANGE ENGINE OILSOON DIC message or Code 82DIC message displays, have theengine oil and filter changed withinthe next 1 000 km/600 mi. If drivenunder the best conditions, theengine oil life system might notindicate the need for vehicle servicefor more than a year. The engine oiland filter must be changed at leastonce a year and the oil life systemmust be reset. Your trained dealertechnician can perform this work.If the engine oil life system is resetaccidentally, service the vehiclewithin 5 000 km/3,000 mi since thelast service. Reset the oil lifesystem when the oil is changed.See Engine Oil Life System onpage 10‑12.



Tire Rotation and RequiredServices Every 12 000 km/7,500 mi

Rotate the tires, if recommended forthe vehicle, and perform thefollowing services. See TireRotation on page 10‑55.. Check engine oil level and oil

life percentage. If needed,change engine oil and filter, andreset oil life system. See EngineOil on page 10‑9 and Engine OilLife System on page 10‑12.

. Check engine coolant level. SeeEngine Coolant on page 10‑16.

. Check windshield washer fluidlevel. See Washer Fluid onpage 10‑22.

. Visually inspect windshield wiperblades for wear, cracking,or contamination. See ExteriorCare on page 10‑86. Replaceworn or damaged wiper blades.See Wiper Blade Replacementon page 10‑28.

. Check tire inflation pressures.See Tire Pressure onpage 10‑49.

. Inspect tire wear. See TireInspection on page 10‑55.

. Visually check for fluid leaks.

. Inspect engine air cleaner filter.See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter onpage 10‑14.

. Inspect brake system.

. Visually inspect steering,suspension, and chassiscomponents for damaged, loose,or missing parts or signs ofwear. See Exterior Care onpage 10‑86.

. Check restraint systemcomponents. See Safety SystemCheck on page 3‑17.

. Visually inspect fuel system fordamage or leaks.

. Visually inspect exhaust systemand nearby heat shields forloose or damaged parts.

. Lubricate body components.See Exterior Care onpage 10‑86.

. Check starter switch. See StarterSwitch Check on page 10‑26.



. Check automatic transmissionshift lock control function. SeeAutomatic Transmission ShiftLock Control Function Check onpage 10‑26.

. Check ignition transmission lock.See Ignition Transmission LockCheck on page 10‑27.

. Check parking brake andautomatic transmission parkmechanism. See Park Brake andP (Park) Mechanism Check onpage 10‑27.

. Check accelerator pedal fordamage, high effort, or binding.Replace if needed.

. Visually inspect gas strut forsigns of wear, cracks, or otherdamage. Check the hold openability of the strut. See yourdealer if service is required.

. Check tire sealant expirationdate, if equipped. See TireSealant and Compressor Kit onpage 10‑65.

. Inspect sunroof track and seal,if equipped. See Sunroof onpage 2‑21.





Footnotes — MaintenanceSchedule Additional RequiredServices — Normal

a) Check all fuel and vapor linesand hoses for proper hook‐up,routing, and condition. Check thatthe purge valve, if the vehicle hasone, works properly. Replace asneeded.

b) Or every four years, whichevercomes first.

c) Or every 10 years, whichevercomes first.

d) Or every five years, whichevercomes first. See Cooling System onpage 10‑16.

e) Or every 10 years, whichevercomes first. Inspect for fraying,excessive cracking, or damage;replace, if needed.





Footnotes — MaintenanceSchedule Additional RequiredServices — Severe

a) Check all fuel and vapor linesand hoses for proper hook‐up,routing, and condition. Check thatthe purge valve, if the vehiclehas one, works properly.Replace as needed.

b) Or every four years, whichevercomes first.

c) Or every 10 years, whichevercomes first.

d) Or every five years, whichevercomes first. See Cooling System onpage 10‑16.

e) Or every 10 years, whichevercomes first. Inspect for fraying,excessive cracking, or damage;replace, if needed.

Special ApplicationServices. Severe Commercial Use

Vehicles Only: Lubricate chassiscomponents every 5 000 km/3,000 mi.

. Have underbody flushing serviceperformed once a year.



AdditionalMaintenance and CareYour vehicle is an importantinvestment and caring for it properlymay help to avoid future costlyrepairs. To maintain vehicleperformance, additionalmaintenance services may berequired. It is recommended thatyour dealer perform theseservices — their trained dealertechnicians know your vehicle best.Your dealer can also perform athorough assessment with amulti‐point inspection to recommendwhen your vehicle may needattention. The following list isintended to explain the services andconditions to look for that mayindicate services are required.

Battery

The battery supplies power to startthe engine and operate anyadditional electrical accessories.. To avoid break‐down or failure to

start the vehicle, maintain abattery with full cranking power.

. Trained dealer technicians havethe diagnostic equipment to testthe battery and ensure that theconnections and cables arecorrosion‐free.

Belts. Belts may need replacing if

they squeak or show signs ofcracking or splitting.

. Trained dealer technicianscan inspect the belts andrecommend replacementwhen necessary.

Brakes

Brakes stop the vehicle and arecrucial to safe driving.. Signs of brake wear may include

chirping, grinding, or squealingnoises, or difficulty stopping.

. Trained dealer technicians haveaccess to tools and equipmentto inspect the brakes andrecommend quality partsengineered for the vehicle.

Fluids

Proper fluid levels and approvedfluids protect the vehicle’s systemsand components. SeeRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑13 forGM approved fluids.. Engine oil and windshield

washer fluid levels should bechecked at every fuel fill.

. Instrument cluster lights maycome on to indicate thatfluids may be low and needto be filled.



Hoses

Hoses transport fluids and shouldbe regularly inspected to ensurethat there are no cracks or leaks.With a multi‐point inspection, yourdealer can inspect the hoses andadvise if replacement is needed.

Lamps

Properly working headlamps,taillamps, and brake lamps areimportant to see and be seen onthe road.. Signs that the headlamps need

attention include dimming, failureto light, cracking, or damage.The brake lamps need to bechecked periodically to ensurethat they light when braking.

. With a multi‐point inspection,your dealer can check the lampsand note any concerns.

Shocks and Struts

Shocks and struts help aid in controlfor a smoother ride.. Signs of wear may include

steering wheel vibration, bounce/sway while braking, longerstopping distance, or uneventire wear.

. As part of the multi‐pointinspection, trained dealertechnicians can visually inspectthe shocks and struts for signsof leaking, blown seals,or damage, and can advisewhen service is needed.

Tires

Tires need to be properly inflated,rotated, and balanced. Maintainingthe tires can save money, fuel, andcan reduce the risk of tire failure.. Signs that the tires need to be

replaced include three or morevisible treadwear indicators; cordor fabric showing through the

rubber; cracks or cuts in thetread or sidewall; or a bulge orsplit in the tire.

. Trained dealer technicians caninspect and recommend theright tires. Your dealer can alsoprovide tire/wheel balancingservices to ensure smoothvehicle operation at all speeds.Your dealer sells and servicesname brand tires.

Vehicle Care

To help keep the vehicle lookinglike new, vehicle care products areavailable from your dealer. Forinformation on how to clean andprotect the vehicle’s interior andexterior, see Interior Care onpage 10‑90 and Exterior Care onpage 10‑86.



Wheel Alignment

Wheel alignment is critical forensuring that the tires deliveroptimal wear and performance.. Signs that the alignment may

need to be adjusted includepulling, improper vehiclehandling, or unusual tire wear.

. Your dealer has the requiredequipment to ensure properwheel alignment.

Windshield

For safety, appearance, and thebest viewing, keep the windshieldclean and clear.. Signs of damage include

scratches, cracks, and chips.. Trained dealer technicians can

inspect the windshield andrecommend proper replacementif needed.

Wiper Blades

Wiper blades need to be cleanedand kept in good condition toprovide a clear view.. Signs of wear include streaking,

skipping across the windshield,and worn or split rubber.

. Trained dealer technicians cancheck the wiper blades andreplace them when needed.



Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Parts

Recommended Fluids and Lubricants

Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Engine OilUse only engine oil licensed to the dexos1 specfication, or equivalent, ofthe proper SAE viscosity grade. ACDelco dexos1 Synthetic Blend isrecommended. See Engine Oil on page 10‑9.

Engine Coolant50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL Coolant.See Engine Coolant on page 10‑16.

Hydraulic Brake/Clutch SystemDOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid(GM Part No. 88863461, in Canada 88863462).

Windshield Washer Optikleen® Washer Solvent.

Automatic Transmission DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.

Manual TransmissionManual Transmission Fluid(GM Part No. 19259104, in Canada 19259105).

Key Lock CylindersMulti-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube(GM Part No. 12346241, in Canada 10953474).



Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Hood Latch Assembly, SecondaryLatch, Pivots, Spring Anchor,

and Release Pawl

Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol(GM Part No. 12346293, in Canada 992723) or lubricant meetingrequirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.

Hood and Door HingesMulti-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube(GM Part No. 12346241, in Canada 10953474).

Weatherstrip Conditioning

Weatherstrip Lubricant(GM Part No. 3634770, in Canada 10953518) orDielectric Silicone Grease(GM Part No. 12345579, in Canada 992887).



Maintenance Replacement PartsReplacement parts identified here by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.

Part GM Part Number ACDelco Part Number

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter

1.4L L4 Engine 13272719 AC3144C

1.8L L4 Engine 13272720 AC3145C

Engine Oil Filter

1.4L L4 Engine 93185674 PF2257G

1.8L L4 Engine 93185674 PF2257G

Passenger Compartment Air Filter Element 13271191 CF176

Spark Plugs

1.4L L4 Engine 55576026 41–117

1.8L L4 Engine 55580961 41–120

Wiper Blades

Driver – 60.0 cm (23.6 in) 96910777 —

Passenger – 45.0 cm (17.7 in) 96910780 —



Maintenance RecordsAfter the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, andthe type of services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts.

DateOdometerReading

Serviced By Services Performed



DateOdometerReading




DateOdometerReading




DateOdometerReading




DateOdometerReading



Technical Data 12-1

Technical Data

Vehicle IdentificationVehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

Service Parts IdentificationLabel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

Vehicle DataCapacities andSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Engine Drive Belt Routing . . . 12-4

Vehicle Identification

Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN)

This legal identifier is in the frontcorner of the instrument panel, onthe left side of the vehicle. It can beseen through the windshield fromoutside. The VIN also appears onthe Vehicle Certification and ServiceParts labels and certificates of titleand registration.

Engine Identification

The eighth character in the VIN isthe engine code. This codeidentifies the vehicle's engine,specifications, and replacementparts. See “Engine Specifications”under Capacities and Specificationson page 12‑2 for the vehicle'sengine code.

Service PartsIdentification LabelThis label, on the inside of the glovebox, has the following information:. Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN).. Model designation.. Paint information.. Production options and special

equipment.

Do not remove this label from thevehicle.


12-2 Technical Data

Vehicle Data

Capacities and SpecificationsThe following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. Please refer to RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 11‑13 for more information.

ApplicationCapacities

Metric English

Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134aFor the air conditioning system refrigerant chargeamount, see the refrigerant label located under the

hood. See your dealer for more information.

Cooling System

1.4L L4 Engine 5.5 L 5.8 qt

1.8L L4 Engine 6.5 L 6.9 qt

Engine Oil with Filter

1.4L L4 Engine 4.0 L 4.25 qt

1.8L L4 Engine 4.5 L 4.76 qt


Technical Data 12-3

ApplicationCapacities

Metric English

Fuel Tank

Standard Fuel Tank 59.0 L 15.6 gal

With RPO NL6 Fuel Tank 48.0 L 12.6 gal

Transmission Fluid

Automatic — 6 Speed 4.0 L 4.2 qt

Wheel Nut Torque 140Y 100 lb ft

All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended inthis manual.

Engine Specifications

Engine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap

1.4L L4 Engine C AutomaticManual

0.70 mm (0.028 in)

1.8L L4 Engine HAutomaticManual

0.70 mm (0.028 in)


12-4 Technical Data

Engine Drive Belt Routing

1.4L L4 Engine

1.8L L4 Engine (with AirConditioning)

1.8L L4 Engine (without AirConditioning)


Customer Information 13-1

CustomerInformation

Customer InformationCustomer SatisfactionProcedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1

Customer AssistanceOffices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3

Customer Assistance for TextTelephone (TTY) Users . . . . . 13-4

Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . 13-4GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5

Roadside AssistanceProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6

Scheduling ServiceAppointments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8

Courtesy TransportationProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8

Collision Damage Repair . . . . 13-9Service PublicationsOrdering Information . . . . . . 13-12

Reporting Safety DefectsReporting Safety Defects tothe United StatesGovernment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13

Reporting Safety Defects tothe CanadianGovernment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13

Reporting Safety Defects toGeneral Motors . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14

Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacyVehicle Data Recording andPrivacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14

Event Data Recorders . . . . . . 13-14OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15Navigation System . . . . . . . . . 13-15Radio FrequencyIdentification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-16

Radio FrequencyStatement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16

Customer Information

Customer SatisfactionProcedureYour satisfaction and goodwill areimportant to your dealer and toChevrolet. Normally, any concernswith the sales transaction or theoperation of the vehicle will beresolved by your dealer's sales orservice departments. Sometimes,however, despite the best intentionsof all concerned, misunderstandingscan occur. If your concern has notbeen resolved to your satisfaction,the following steps should be taken:

STEP ONE: Discuss your concernwith a member of dealershipmanagement. Normally, concernscan be quickly resolved at that level.If the matter has already beenreviewed with the sales, service,or parts manager, contact the ownerof your dealership or the generalmanager.


13-2 Customer Information

STEP TWO: If after contacting amember of dealership management,it appears your concern cannot beresolved by your dealership withoutfurther help, in the U.S., call theChevrolet Customer AssistanceCenter at 1-800-222-1020. InCanada, call General Motors ofCanada Customer Care Centre at1-800-263-3777 (English),or 1-800-263-7854 (French).

We encourage you to call thetoll-free number in order to give yourinquiry prompt attention. Have thefollowing information available togive the Customer Assistancerepresentative:. Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN). This is availablefrom the vehicle registration ortitle, or the plate at the top left ofthe instrument panel and visiblethrough the windshield.

. Dealership name and location.

. Vehicle delivery date andpresent mileage.

When contacting Chevrolet,remember that your concern willlikely be resolved at a dealer'sfacility. That is why we suggestfollowing Step One first.

STEP THREE — U.S. Owners:Both General Motors and yourdealer are committed to makingsure you are completely satisfiedwith the new vehicle. However,if you continue to remain unsatisfiedafter following the procedureoutlined in Steps One and Two, youcan file with the Better BusinessBureau (BBB) Auto Line® Programto enforce your rights.

The BBB Auto Line Program is anout-of-court program administeredby the Council of Better BusinessBureaus to settle automotivedisputes regarding vehicle repairs orthe interpretation of the New VehicleLimited Warranty. Although you maybe required to resort to this informaldispute resolution program prior tofiling a court action, use of theprogram is free of charge and yourcase will generally be heard within

40 days. If you do not agree with thedecision given in your case, youmay reject it and proceed with anyother venue for relief availableto you.

You may contact the BBB Auto LineProgram using the toll-freetelephone number or write them atthe following address:

BBB Auto Line ProgramCouncil of Better BusinessBureaus, Inc.4200 Wilson BoulevardSuite 800Arlington, VA 22203-1838

Telephone: 1-800-955-5100www.dr.bbb.org/goauto

This program is available in all50 states and the District ofColumbia. Eligibility is limited byvehicle age, mileage, and otherfactors. General Motors reservesthe right to change eligibilitylimitations and/or discontinue itsparticipation in this program.



STEP THREE — CanadianOwners: In the event that you donot feel your concerns have beenaddressed after following theprocedure outlined in Steps Oneand Two, General Motors ofCanada Limited wants you to beaware of its participation in ano-charge Mediation/ArbitrationProgram. General Motors of CanadaLimited has committed to bindingarbitration of owner disputesinvolving factory-related vehicleservice claims. The programprovides for the review of the factsinvolved by an impartial third partyarbiter, and may include an informalhearing before the arbiter. Theprogram is designed so that theentire dispute settlement process,from the time you file your complaintto the final decision, should becompleted in about 70 days. Webelieve our impartial program offersadvantages over courts in mostjurisdictions because it is informal,quick, and free of charge.

For further information concerningeligibility in the Canadian MotorVehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),call toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or callthe General Motors Customer CareCentre, 1-800-263-3777 (English),1-800-263-7854 (French),or write to:

The Mediation/Arbitration Programc/o Customer Care CentreGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedMail Code: CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

The inquiry should be accompaniedby the Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN).

Customer AssistanceOfficesChevrolet encourages customers tocall the toll-free number forassistance. However, if a customerwishes to write or e-mail Chevrolet,the letter should be addressed to:

United States

Chevrolet Motor DivisionChevrolet CustomerAssistance CenterP.O. Box 33170Detroit, MI 48232-5170www.Chevrolet.com

1-800-222-10201-800-833-2438 (For TextTelephone Devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance:1-800-243-8872



From Puerto Rico:

1-800-496-9992 (English)1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)

From U.S. Virgin Islands:

1-800-496-9994

Canada

General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Care Centre, Mail Code:CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7www.gm.ca

1-800-263-3777 (English)1-800-263-7854 (French)1-800-263-3830 (For TextTelephone devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance:1-800-268-6800

Overseas

Please contact the local GeneralMotors Business Unit.

Mexico, Central America, andCaribbean Islands/Countries(Except Puerto Rico andU.S. Virgin Islands)

General Motors de Mexico, S. deR.L. de C.V.Customer Assistance CenterAv. Ejercito Nacional #843Col. GranadaC.P. 11520, Mexico, D.F.

01-800-466-0800Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0800

Customer Assistance forText Telephone (TTY)UsersTo assist customers who are deaf,hard of hearing, or speech-impairedand who use Text Telephones(TTYs), Chevrolet has TTYequipment available at its CustomerAssistance Center. Any TTY user inthe U.S. can communicate withChevrolet by dialing:1-800-833-2438. TTY users inCanada can dial 1-800-263-3830.

Online Owner Center

Chevrolet Owner Center (U.S.)www.chevyownercenter.com

Information and servicescustomized for your specificvehicle — all in one convenientplace.. Digital owner manual, warranty

information, and more.. Storage for online service and

maintenance records.. Chevrolet dealer locator for

service nationwide.. Exclusive privileges and offers.. Recall notices for your specific

vehicle.. OnStar and GM Cardmember

Services Earnings summaries.



Other Helpful Links

Chevrolet — www.chevrolet.com

Chevrolet Merchandise —www.chevymall.com

Help Center — www.chevrolet.com/pages/mds/helpcenter/faq.do. FAQ. Contact Us

My GM Canada www.gm.ca

My GM Canada is apassword-protected section ofwww.gm.ca where you can saveinformation on GM vehicles, getpersonalized offers, and use handytools and forms with greater ease.

Here are a few of the valuable toolsand services you will haveaccess to:. My Showroom: Find and save

information on vehicles andcurrent offers in your area.

. My Dealers: Save details suchas address and phone numberfor each of your preferred GMdealers.

. My Driveway: Access quick linksto parts and service estimates,check trade-in values,or schedule a serviceappointment by adding thevehicles you own to yourdriveway profile.

. My Preferences: Manage yourprofile and use tools and formswith greater ease.

To sign up, visit the My GM.casection within www.gm.ca.

GM MobilityReimbursement Program

This program is available toqualified applicants for costreimbursement of eligibleaftermarket adaptive equipmentrequired for the vehicle, such ashand controls or a wheelchair/scooter lift for the vehicle.

For more information on the limitedoffer, visit www.gmmobility.com orcall the GM Mobility AssistanceCenter at 1-800-323-9935. TextTelephone (TTY) users, call1-800-833-9935.

General Motors of Canada alsohas a Mobility Program. Call1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) fordetails. TTY users call1-800-263-3830.



Roadside AssistanceProgramFor U.S.‐purchased vehicles,call 1‐800‐243‐8872; (TextTelephone (TTY): 1‐888‐889‐2438).

For Canadian‐purchased vehicles,call 1-800-268-6800.

Service is available 24 hours a day,365 days a year.

Calling for Assistance

When calling Roadside Assistance,have the following informationready:. Your name, home address, and

home telephone number.. Telephone number of your

location.. Location of the vehicle.. Model, year, color, and license

plate number of the vehicle.

. Odometer reading, VehicleIdentification Number (VIN), anddelivery date of the vehicle.

. Description of the problem.

Coverage

Services are provided up to 5 years/160 000 km (100,000mi), whichevercomes first.

In the U.S., anyone driving thevehicle is covered. In Canada, aperson driving the vehicle withoutpermission from the owner is notcovered.

Roadside Assistance is not a part ofthe New Vehicle Limited Warranty.Chevrolet and General Motors ofCanada Limited reserve the right tomake any changes or discontinuethe Roadside Assistance program atany time without notification.

Chevrolet and General Motors ofCanada Limited reserve the right tolimit services or payment to an

owner or driver if they decide theclaims are made too often, orthe same type of claim is mademany times.

Services Provided. Emergency Fuel Delivery:

Delivery of enough fuel for thevehicle to get to the nearestservice station.

. Lock‐Out Service: Service tounlock the vehicle if you arelocked out. A remote unlock maybe available if you have OnStar.For security reasons, the drivermust present identificationbefore this service is given.

. Emergency Tow from a PublicRoad or Highway: Tow to thenearest Chevrolet dealer forwarranty service, or if the vehiclewas in a crash and cannot bedriven. Assistance is also givenwhen the vehicle is stuck in thesand, mud, or snow.



. Flat Tire Change: Service tochange a flat tire with the sparetire. The spare tire, if equipped,must be in good condition andproperly inflated. It is the owner'sresponsibility for the repair orreplacement of the tire if it is notcovered by the warranty.

. Battery Jump Start: Service tojump start a dead battery.

Services Not Included inRoadside Assistance. Impound towing caused by

violation of any laws.. Legal fines.. Mounting, dismounting,

or changing of snow tires,chains, or other traction devices.

. Towing or services for vehiclesdriven on a non-public road orhighway.

Services Specific toCanadian-Purchased Vehicles. Fuel Delivery: Reimbursement

is approximately $5 Canadian.Diesel fuel delivery may berestricted. Propane and otherfuels are not provided throughthis service.

. Lock-Out Service: Vehicleregistration is required.

. Trip Routing Service: Detailedmaps of North America areprovided when requested eitherwith the most direct route or themost scenic route. There is alimit of six requests per year.Additional travel information isalso available. Allow threeweeks for delivery.

. Trip Interruption Benefits andAssistance: Must be over250 kilometers from where yourtrip was started to qualify.General Motors ofCanada Limited requirespre-authorization, originaldetailed receipts, and acopy of the repair orders. Onceauthorization has been received,the Roadside Assistance advisorwill help to make arrangementsand explain how to receivepayment.

. Alternative Service:If assistance cannot beprovided right away, theRoadside Assistance advisormay give permission to get localemergency road service. You willreceive payment, up to $100,after sending the original receiptto Roadside Assistance.Mechanical failures may becovered, however any cost forparts and labor for repairs notcovered by the warranty are theowner responsibility.



Scheduling ServiceAppointmentsWhen the vehicle requires warrantyservice, contact your dealer andrequest an appointment. Byscheduling a service appointmentand advising the service consultantof your transportation needs, yourdealer can help minimize yourinconvenience.

If the vehicle cannot be scheduledinto the service departmentimmediately, keep driving it until itcan be scheduled for service,unless, of course, the problem issafety related. If it is, please callyour dealership, let them know this,and ask for instructions.

If your dealer requests you to bringthe vehicle for service, you areurged to do so as early in the workday as possible to allow forsame-day repair.

Courtesy TransportationProgramTo enhance your ownershipexperience, we and our participatingdealers are proud to offer CourtesyTransportation, a customer supportprogram for vehicles with theBumper-to-Bumper (Base WarrantyCoverage period in Canada),extended powertrain, and/orhybrid‐specific warranties in boththe U.S. and Canada.

Several Courtesy Transportationoptions are available to assist inreducing inconvenience whenwarranty repairs are required.

Courtesy Transportation is not apart of the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty. A separate bookletentitled “Warranty and OwnerAssistance Information” furnishedwith each new vehicle providesdetailed warranty coverageinformation.

Transportation Options

Warranty service can generally becompleted while you wait. However,if you are unable to wait, GM helpsto minimize inconvenience byproviding several transportationoptions. Depending on thecircumstances, your dealer canoffer one of the following:

Shuttle Service

Shuttle service is the preferredmeans of offering CourtesyTransportation. Dealers may provideshuttle service to get you to yourdestination with minimal interruptionof your daily schedule. This includesone‐way or round‐trip shuttle servicewithin reasonable time and distanceparameters of your dealer's area.



Public Transportation or FuelReimbursement

If the vehicle requires overnightwarranty repairs, and publictransportation is used instead ofyour dealer's shuttle service, theexpense must be supported byoriginal receipts and can only be upto the maximum amount allowed byGM for shuttle service. In addition,for U.S. customers, should youarrange transportation through afriend or relative, limitedreimbursement for reasonable fuelexpenses may be available. Claimamounts should reflect actual costsand be supported by originalreceipts. See your dealer forinformation regarding the allowanceamounts for reimbursement of fuelor other transportation costs.

Courtesy Rental Vehicle

Your dealer may arrange to provideyou with a courtesy rental vehicle orreimburse you for a rental vehiclethat you obtain if the vehicle is keptfor an overnight warranty repair.

Rental reimbursement will be limitedand must be supported by originalreceipts. This requires that you signand complete a rental agreementand meet state/provincial, local, andrental vehicle provider requirements.Requirements vary and may includeminimum age requirements,insurance coverage, credit card, etc.You are responsible for fuel usagecharges and may also beresponsible for taxes, levies, usagefees, excessive mileage, or rentalusage beyond the completion of therepair.

It may not be possible to provide alike vehicle as a courtesy rental.

Additional ProgramInformation

All program options, such as shuttleservice, may not be available atevery dealer. Please contact yourdealer for specific informationabout availability. All CourtesyTransportation arrangements willbe administered by appropriatedealer personnel.

General Motors reserves the right tounilaterally modify, change,or discontinue CourtesyTransportation at any time and toresolve all questions of claimeligibility pursuant to the terms andconditions described herein at itssole discretion.

Collision Damage RepairIf the vehicle is involved in acollision and it is damaged, have thedamage repaired by a qualifiedtechnician using the properequipment and quality replacementparts. Poorly performed collisionrepairs diminish the vehicle resalevalue, and safety performance canbe compromised in subsequentcollisions.

Collision Parts

Genuine GM Collision parts are newparts made with the same materialsand construction methods as theparts with which the vehicle wasoriginally built.



Genuine GM Collision parts are thebest choice to ensure that thevehicle's designed appearance,durability, and safety are preserved.The use of Genuine GM parts canhelp maintain the GM New VehicleLimited Warranty.

Recycled original equipment partsmay also be used for repair. Theseparts are typically removed fromvehicles that were total losses inprior crashes. In most cases, theparts being recycled are fromundamaged sections of the vehicle.A recycled original equipment GMpart may be an acceptable choice tomaintain the vehicle's originallydesigned appearance and safetyperformance; however, the history ofthese parts is not known. Such partsare not covered by the GM NewVehicle Limited Warranty, and anyrelated failures are not covered bythat warranty.

Aftermarket collision parts are alsoavailable. These are made bycompanies other than GM and maynot have been tested for the vehicle.

As a result, these parts may fitpoorly, exhibit premature durability/corrosion problems, and may notperform properly in subsequentcollisions. Aftermarket parts arenot covered by the GM New VehicleLimited Warranty, and any vehiclefailure related to such parts is notcovered by that warranty.

Repair Facility

GM also recommends that youchoose a collision repair facility thatmeets your needs before you everneed collision repairs. Your dealermay have a collision repair centerwith GM-trained technicians andstate‐of‐the‐art equipment, or beable to recommend a collision repaircenter that has GM-trainedtechnicians and comparableequipment.

Insuring the Vehicle

Protect your investment in theGM vehicle with comprehensive andcollision insurance coverage. Thereare significant differences in the

quality of coverage afforded byvarious insurance policy terms.Many insurance policies providereduced protection to the GMvehicle by limiting compensationfor damage repairs by usingaftermarket collision parts. Someinsurance companies will notspecify aftermarket collision parts.When purchasing insurance, werecommend that you ensure that thevehicle will be repaired with GMoriginal equipment collision parts.If such insurance coverage isnot available from your currentinsurance carrier, consider switchingto another insurance carrier.

If the vehicle is leased, the leasingcompany may require you to haveinsurance that ensures repairs withGenuine GM Original EquipmentManufacturer (OEM) parts orGenuine Manufacturer replacementparts. Read the lease carefully, asyou may be charged at the end ofthe lease for poor quality repairs.



If a Crash Occurs

If there has been an injury, callemergency services for help. Do notleave the scene of a crash until allmatters have been taken care of.Move the vehicle only if its positionputs you in danger, or you areinstructed to move it by apolice officer.

Give only the necessary informationto police and other parties involvedin the crash.

For emergency towing seeRoadside Assistance Program onpage 13‑6.

Gather the following information:. Driver name, address, and

telephone number.. Driver license number.. Owner name, address, and

telephone number.. Vehicle license plate number.. Vehicle make, model, and

model year.

. Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN).

. Insurance company and policynumber.

. General description of thedamage to the other vehicle.

Choose a reputable repair facilitythat uses quality replacement parts.See “Collision Parts” earlier in thissection.

If the airbag has inflated, see WhatWill You See after an AirbagInflates? on page 3‑24.

Managing the Vehicle DamageRepair Process

In the event that the vehicle requiresdamage repairs, GM recommendsthat you take an active role in itsrepair. If you have a pre-determinedrepair facility of choice, take thevehicle there, or have it towed there.Specify to the facility that anyrequired replacement collision partsbe original equipment parts, eithernew Genuine GM parts or recycled

original GM parts. Remember,recycled parts will not be covered bythe GM vehicle warranty.

Insurance pays the bill for the repair,but you must live with the repair.Depending on your policy limits,your insurance company mayinitially value the repair usingaftermarket parts. Discuss this withthe repair professional, and insist onGenuine GM parts. Remember,if the vehicle is leased, you maybe obligated to have the vehiclerepaired with Genuine GM parts,even if your insurance coveragedoes not pay the full cost.

If another party's insurancecompany is paying for the repairs,you are not obligated to accept arepair valuation based on thatinsurance company's collision policyrepair limits, as you have nocontractual limits with that company.In such cases, you can have controlof the repair and parts choices aslong as the cost stays withinreasonable limits.



Service PublicationsOrdering Information

Service Manuals

Service Manuals have the diagnosisand repair information on theengines, transmission, axle,suspension, brakes, electrical,steering, body, etc.

Service Bulletins

Service Bulletins give additionaltechnical service informationneeded to knowledgeably serviceGeneral Motors cars and trucks.Each bulletin contains instructionsto assist in the diagnosis andservice of the vehicle.

Owner Information

Owner publications are writtenspecifically for owners and intendedto provide basic operationalinformation about the vehicle.The Owner Manual includes theMaintenance Schedule for allmodels.

In-Portfolio: Includes aPortfolio, Owner Manual, andWarranty Booklet.

RETAIL SELL PRICE:$35.00 (U.S.) plus handling andshipping fees.

Without Portfolio: OwnerManual only.

RETAIL SELL PRICE:$25.00 (U.S.) plus handling andshipping fees.

Current and Past Models

Technical Service Bulletins andManuals are available for currentand past model GM vehicles.

ORDER TOLL FREE:1-800-551-4123 Monday - Friday8:00 AM - 6:00 PM Eastern Time

For Credit Card Orders Only(VISA-MasterCard-Discover),visit Helm, Inc. at:www.helminc.com.

Or write to:

Helm, IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

Prices are subject to changewithout notice and withoutincurring obligation. Allow ampletime for delivery.

All listed prices are quoted inU.S. funds. Make checks payablein U.S. funds.



Reporting SafetyDefects

Reporting Safety Defectsto the United StatesGovernmentIf you believe that your vehiclehas a defect which could causea crash or could cause injury ordeath, you should immediatelyinform the National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration(NHTSA) in addition tonotifying General Motors.

If NHTSA receives similarcomplaints, it may open aninvestigation, and if it finds thata safety defect exists in a groupof vehicles, it may order a recalland remedy campaign.

However, NHTSA cannotbecome involved in individualproblems between you, yourdealer, or General Motors.

To contact NHTSA, you maycall the Vehicle Safety Hotlinetoll-free at 1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go tohttp://www.safercar.gov; orwrite to:

Administrator, NHTSA1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E.Washington, D.C. 20590

You can also obtain otherinformation about motorvehicle safety fromhttp://www.safercar.gov.

Reporting Safety Defectsto the CanadianGovernmentIf you live in Canada, and youbelieve that the vehicle has a safetydefect, notify Transport Canadaimmediately, and notify GeneralMotors of Canada Limited.Call Transport Canada at1-800-333-0510 or write to:

Transport CanadaRoad Safety Branch80 rue NoelGatineau, QC J8Z 0A1



Reporting Safety Defectsto General MotorsIn addition to notifying NHTSA(or Transport Canada) in a situationlike this, notify General Motors.

Call 1-800-222-1020, or write:

Chevrolet Motor DivisionChevrolet CustomerAssistance CenterP.O. Box 33170Detroit, MI 48232-5170

In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777(English) or 1-800-263-7854(French), or write:

General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Care Centre, Mail Code:CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Vehicle DataRecording andPrivacyThis GM vehicle has a number ofsophisticated computers that recordinformation about the vehicle’sperformance and how it is driven.For example, the vehicle usescomputer modules to monitor andcontrol engine and transmissionperformance, to monitor theconditions for airbag deploymentand deploy airbags in a crash, and,if so equipped, to provide antilockbraking to help the driver control thevehicle. These modules may storedata to help your dealer technicianservice the vehicle. Some modulesmay also store data about how youoperate the vehicle, such as rate offuel consumption or average speed.These modules may also retain theowner’s personal preferences, suchas radio pre-sets, seat positions,and temperature settings.

Event Data RecordersThis vehicle has an Event DataRecorder (EDR). The main purposeof an EDR is to record, in certaincrash or near crash-like situations,such as an airbag deployment orhitting a road obstacle, data that willassist in understanding how avehicle's systems performed. TheEDR is designed to record datarelated to vehicle dynamics andsafety systems for a short period oftime, typically 30 seconds or less.The EDR in this vehicle is designedto record such data as:. How various systems in the

vehicle were operating.. Whether or not the driver and

passenger safety belts werebuckled/fastened.

. How far, if at all, the driver waspressing the accelerator and/orbrake pedal.

. How fast the vehicle wastraveling.



This data can help provide a betterunderstanding of the circumstancesin which crashes and injuries occur.

Important: EDR data is recordedby the vehicle only if a non-trivialcrash situation occurs; no data isrecorded by the EDR under normaldriving conditions and no personaldata (e.g., name, gender, age, andcrash location) is recorded.However, other parties, such as lawenforcement, could combine theEDR data with the type ofpersonally identifying data routinelyacquired during a crashinvestigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR,special equipment is required, andaccess to the vehicle or the EDR isneeded. In addition to the vehiclemanufacturer, other parties, such aslaw enforcement, that have thespecial equipment, can read theinformation if they have access tothe vehicle or the EDR.

GM will not access this data orshare it with others except: with theconsent of the vehicle owner or,if the vehicle is leased, with theconsent of the lessee; in responseto an official request by police orsimilar government office; as part ofGM's defense of litigation throughthe discovery process; or, asrequired by law. Data that GMcollects or receives may also beused for GM research needs or maybe made available to others forresearch purposes, where a need isshown and the data is not tied to aspecific vehicle or vehicle owner.

OnStar®

If the vehicle is equipped with anactive OnStar system, that systemmay also record data in crash ornear crash‐like situations. TheOnStar Terms and Conditionsprovides information on datacollection and use and is availablein the OnStar glove box kit, atwww.onstar.com (U.S.) orwww.onstar.ca (Canada), or bypressing theQ button andspeaking to an advisor.

Navigation SystemIf the vehicle has a navigationsystem, use of the system mayresult in the storage of destinations,addresses, telephone numbers, andother trip information. Refer to thenavigation manual for information onstored data and for deletioninstructions.



Radio FrequencyIdentification (RFID)RFID technology is used in somevehicles for functions such as tirepressure monitoring and ignitionsystem security, as well as inconnection with conveniences suchas key fobs for remote door locking/unlocking and starting, andin-vehicle transmitters for garagedoor openers. RFID technology inGM vehicles does not use or recordpersonal information or link with anyother GM system containingpersonal information.

Radio FrequencyStatementThis vehicle has systems thatoperate on a radio frequency thatcomply with Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and with Industry CanadaStandards RSS‐GEN/210/220/310.

Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:

1. The device may not causeharmful interference.

2. The device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may causeundesired operation of thedevice.

Changes or modifications to any ofthese systems by other than anauthorized service facility could voidauthorization to use this equipment.


INDEX i-1

AAccessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

Accessory Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23Add-On ElectricalEquipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-55

Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine . . . . . 10-14Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6AirbagAdding Equipment to theVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-31

Airbag SystemCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-32How Does an AirbagRestrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24

Passenger SensingSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-26

What Makes an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24

What Will You See after anAirbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24

When Should an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-23

Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . .3-21

AirbagsPassenger Status Indicator . . .5-12Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11Servicing Airbag-EquippedVehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-30

System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-19AlarmVehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14

AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12AntennaMulti-band . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-18Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-18

Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17

Appearance CareExterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-86Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-90

Ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7Assistance Program,Roadside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6

Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-18

Audio SystemRadio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-17Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . . 7-2

AutomaticClimate Control System . . . . . . . . 8-3Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11Headlamp System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . 9-29Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-31Shift Lock ControlFunction Check . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26

Auxiliary Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20

BBattery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-80Power Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Voltage and ChargingMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28

Blade Replacement, Wiper . . . 10-28Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . 7-23, 7-25, 7-29Brake System Warning Light . . . 5-16Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22Antilock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-35Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-36Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-36System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29


i-2 INDEX

Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Break-In, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 9-15Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29Headlamps, Front TurnSignal, and ParkingLamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29

License Plate Lamps . . . . . . . 10-34Taillamps, Turn Signal,Sidemarker, Stoplamps,and Backup Lamps . . . . . . . . 10-31

Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57

CCalibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4CaliforniaFuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . .9-45Perchlorate MaterialsRequirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3

Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3Canadian Vehicle Owners . . . . . . . . iiiCapacities andSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Carbon MonoxideEngine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-27Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8

CargoTie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

Cautions, Danger, andWarnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv

CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18Center Console Storage . . . . . . . . 4-2Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62Charging System Light . . . . . . . . 5-13CheckEngine Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13IgnitionTransmission Lock . . . . . . . . 10-27

Child RestraintsInfants and YoungChildren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-35

Lower Anchors andTethers for Children . . . . . . . . .3-41

Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-33Securing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-48, 3-50Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-37

Cigarette Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35

CleaningExterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-86Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-90

Climate Control Systems . . . . . . . 8-1Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5Cluster, Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Clutch, Hydraulic . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14Collision Damage Repair . . . . . . 13-9Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . 10-80Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29

Compressor Kit, TireSealant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65

Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15CoolantEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16Engine TemperatureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10

Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16Engine Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30

Courtesy Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5


INDEX i-3

Courtesy TransportationProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8

Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29

Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . 13-4Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-3Text Telephone (TTY)Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-4

Customer InformationService PublicationsOrdering Information . . . . . . 13-12

Customer SatisfactionProcedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1

DDamage Repair, Collision . . . . . . 13-9Danger, Warnings, andCautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv

Data Recorders, Event . . . . . . . 13-14Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22

Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3

Devices, Auxiliary . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20Distracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5DoorAjar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10Power Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11

Drive Belt Routing, Engine . . . . . 12-4Driver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23

DrivingCharacteristics andTowing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-49

Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Drunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3For Better Fuel Economy . . . . .1-21Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . 9-7If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . .9-10Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . .9-10Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8

EElectrical Equipment,Add-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-55

Electrical SystemEngine CompartmentFuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36


Instrument Panel FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40

Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35EngineAir Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14Check and Service EngineSoon Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13

Compartment Overview . . . . . . .10-6Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16Coolant TemperatureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10

Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16Cooling System Messages . . .5-30Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . . . . . .12-4Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-27


i-4 INDEX

Engine (cont.)Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-22Overheated ProtectionOperating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21

Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19Power Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20Reduced Power Light . . . . . . . . .5-21Running While Parked . . . . . . . .9-28Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-20

Engine OilLife System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30

Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Equipment, Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-55Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . 13-14Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Extender, Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . 3-17Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . . 6-1

FFilter,Engine Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . 10-14

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2Flashers, Hazard Warning . . . . . . 6-3Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-63Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-72

Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-93FluidAutomatic Transmission . . . . 10-13Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22

Fog LampsFront . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16Front Fog LampLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22

Front SeatsAdjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7

Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-44Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-45Filling a Portable FuelContainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-48

Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-46Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . .9-45Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . .9-44Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . .5-20Recommended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-44Requirements, California . . . . .9-45System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31

Fuel EconomyDriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-21

FusesEngine CompartmentFuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-36


Instrument Panel FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40


INDEX i-5

GGasolineSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-44

GaugesEngine CoolantTemperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10

Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Warning Lights andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7

General InformationService and Maintenance . . . . . 11-1Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-48Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2

Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5

HHazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . 6-3Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2HeadlampsAiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-29Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Daytime Running Lamps(DRL) Indicator Light . . . . . . . .5-22

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . .5-21High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-2Lamps On Reminder . . . . . . . . .5-22

Heated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16HeaterEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-22

Heating and AirConditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-1, 8-3

High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . 9-7

Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11

Hydraulic Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14

IIgnition Positions . . . . . . . . 9-15, 9-18Ignition Transmission LockCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27

Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14Infants and Young Children,Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35

Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Instrument PanelStorage Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Instrument Panel Overview . . . . . 1-2Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii

JJump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-80


i-6 INDEX

KKey and Lock Messages . . . . . . . 5-31Keyless EntryRemote (RKE) System . . . . . . . . 2-3

Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

LLabeling, Tire Sidewall . . . . . . . . 10-44Lamp Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31LampsCourtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Daytime Running (DRL) . . . . . . . 6-2Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Exterior Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Front Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4Headlamps, Front TurnSignal, and ParkingLamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29

License Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34Malfunction Indicator . . . . . . . . .5-13On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12

LATCH SystemReplacing Parts after aCrash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-48

LATCH, Lower Anchors andTethers for Children . . . . . . . . . . 3-41

LightStabiliTrak® OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18

Lighter, Cigarette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6LightingEntry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Illumination Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

LightsAirbag Readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11Antilock Brake System(ABS) Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17

Brake System Warning . . . . . . .5-16Charging System . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22

Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . .5-20Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2Front Fog Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22High-Beam On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21

Lights (cont.)High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-2Low Fuel Warning . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20Reduced Engine Power . . . . . .5-21Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . .5-10Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21Service Vehicle Soon . . . . . . . . .5-16Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19Traction Control System(TCS)/StabiliTrak® . . . . . . . . . .5-18

Traction Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18Up-Shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17Warning, Power Steering . . . . .5-17

LocksAutomatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12

Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . . . 5-20Low-Profile Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children (LATCHSystem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41


INDEX i-7

MMaintenanceRecords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-16

Maintenance ScheduleRecommended Fluidsand Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-13

Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . 5-13Manual Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . 9-33Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13

MessagesAirbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32Battery Voltage andCharging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28

Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29Engine Cooling System . . . . . . .5-30Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30Engine Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31Key and Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31Object Detection System . . . . .5-32Ride Control System . . . . . . . . . .5-32

Messages (cont.)Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32Service Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32Starting the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . .5-33Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28Vehicle Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34

MirrorsAutomatic DimmingRearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17

Convex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16Manual Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16

Monitor System, TirePressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50

Multi-band Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18

NNavigationVehicle Data Recordingand Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15

New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . 9-15

OObject Detection SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32

Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9

Off-RoadRecovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5

OilEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-9Engine Oil Life System . . . . . 10-12Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20

Older Children, Restraints . . . . . 3-33Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . . 13-4OnStar® System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22Operation, InfotainmentSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6

OrderingService Publications . . . . . . . . 13-12


i-8 INDEX

OutletsPower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

Overheated EngineProtectionOperating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21

Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . 10-19Overview, InfotainmentSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-3, 7-5

PParkShifting into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-24Shifting out of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-25

Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27Assist, Ultrasonic . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-42Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-36Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-27

Over Things That Burn . . . . . . .9-27Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12

Passenger Sensing System . . . 3-26Perchlorate MaterialsRequirements, California . . . . . 10-3

PersonalizationVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34

PhoneBluetooth . . . . . . . . . 7-23, 7-25, 7-29

PowerDoor Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5Protection, Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6Reduced Engine Light . . . . . . . .5-21Retained Accessory (RAP) . . .9-23Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18

Power Steering WarningLights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17

Pregnancy, Using SafetyBelts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17

PrivacyRadio FrequencyIdentification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-16

ProgramCourtesy Transportation . . . . . .13-8

Proposition 65 Warning,California . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

RRadio FrequencyIdentification (RFID) . . . . . . . . 13-16Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16

RadiosAM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-12Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-17Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-14

Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8Rearview MirrorAutomatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . .2-17

Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5RecommendedFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-44

Recommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13

RecordsMaintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-16

Recreational VehicleTowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-84

Reduced Engine PowerLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21

Reimbursement Program,GM Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5


INDEX i-9

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34Replacement PartsAirbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-32Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-15

Replacing Airbag System . . . . . . 3-32Replacing LATCH SystemParts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48

Replacing Safety BeltSystem Parts after a Crash . . . 3-18

Reporting Safety DefectsCanadian Government . . . . . . 13-13General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13

RestraintsWhere to Put . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-40

Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23

Ride Control SystemsMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32

RoadsDriving, Wet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6

Roadside AssistanceProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6

RoofSunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-21

Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55Routing, Engine Drive Belt . . . . . 12-4Running the Vehicle WhileParked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28

SSafety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-18Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-17How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . .3-12Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10Replacing after a Crash . . . . . .3-18Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . .3-17

Safety Defects ReportingCanadian Government . . . . . . 13-13General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13

Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12Safety System Check . . . . . . . . . . 3-17Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14Scheduling Appointments . . . . . . 13-8Sealant Kit, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65

SeatsAdjustment, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Heated Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7Power Adjustment, Front . . . . . . 3-4Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

Securing ChildRestraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48, 3-50

SecurityLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14Vehicle Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14

ServiceAccessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3

Doing Your Own Work . . . . . . . .10-4Engine Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13Maintenance Records . . . . . . .11-16Maintenance, GeneralInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

Parts Identification Label . . . . .12-1Publications OrderingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12


i-10 INDEX

Service (cont.)Scheduling Appointments . . . . .13-8Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32Vehicle Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16

Servicing the Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30Shift Lock Control FunctionCheck, AutomaticTransmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26

ShiftingInto Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-24Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-25

SidemarkerBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-31

Signals, Turn andLane-Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Spare TireCompact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-80

Specifications andCapacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9StabiliTrakOFF Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-38

Start Vehicle, Remote . . . . . . . . . . 2-9

Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . 10-26Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20Starting the VehicleMesssages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33

Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Power, Warning Lights . . . . . . . .5-17Wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

Stoplamps and Back-Up LampsBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-31

Storage AreasCenter Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Storing the Tire Sealantand Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . 10-72

Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ivSystemInfotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2

TTachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9TaillampsBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-31

Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . 13-4Theft-Deterrent Systems . . . . . . . 2-14Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14

Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5TiresBuying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-72Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-80Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-63Inflation Monitor System . . . . 10-52Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55Low Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19Pressure Monitor System . . . 10-50Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55Sealant andCompressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65


INDEX i-11

Tires (cont.)Sealant and CompressorKit, Storing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-72

Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44Terminology andDefinitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46

Uniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59

Wheel Alignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61

Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-61When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57

Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42TowingDriving Characteristics . . . . . . . .9-49Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-55General Information . . . . . . . . . .9-48Recreational Vehicle . . . . . . . . 10-84Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-53Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-83

TractionControl System (TCS) . . . . . . . .9-37Control System (TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18

Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-53TransmissionAutomatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-29Fluid, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13Fluid, Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33

Transportation Program,Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8

Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Turn SignalBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-31

UUltrasonic Parking Assist . . . . . . 9-42Uniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59

Up-Shift Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17Using This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv

VVehicleAlarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14Canadian Owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iiiControl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4IdentificationNumber (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1

Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-10Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28Personalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34Reminder Messages . . . . . . . . . .5-34Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14Service Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . .5-16Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-83


i-12 INDEX

Vehicle CareStoring the Tire Sealantand Compressor Kit . . . . . . . 10-72

Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49Vehicle IdentificationService Parts IdentificationLabel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1

Ventilation, Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20

WWarningBrake System Light . . . . . . . . . . .5-16

Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7

Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ivCautions and Danger . . . . . . . . . . . .ivHazard Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22

WheelsAlignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61

Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61

When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57

Where to Put the Restraint . . . . 3-40Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18

WindshieldWiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

WinterDriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8

Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . 10-28